JP7384870B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

Conventional gaming machines have a system that prevents the progress of the game when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1,500 games or when the net increase in the awarded gaming value exceeds the upper limit (when a predetermined condition is met). There is a controllable game stop state (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2020-65820A

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that there is room to improve the product appeal as a gaming machine that can be controlled to a game stop state where the progress of the game is stopped.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be controlled to a game stop state and that can improve its marketability.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to calculate a counter value related to the difference between the gaming value used in the game and the gaming value given,
controllable into a normal state, a first special state more advantageous than the normal state, and a second special state more advantageous than the first special state,
After the end of the advantageous state, control is possible to the first special state or the second special state,
If the counter value reaches the operating value while being controlled in the first special state, control is performed to stop the progress of the game;
If the counter value reaches the operating value while being controlled in the second special state, control is performed to stop the progress of the game;
If the counter value reaches the operating value while being controlled to the advantageous state, control to stop the progress of the game is not performed, and control is performed to the first special state and the second special state after the advantageous state ends. Performs control to stop the progress of the game without any trouble,
When the counter value becomes an operating value while being controlled in the first special state and control to stop the progress of the game is performed, displaying a display indicating that the progress of the game is stopped;
When the counter value becomes the operating value while being controlled in the second special state and control to stop the progress of the game is performed, displaying a display indicating that the progress of the game is stopped;
When the counter value reaches the operating value while being controlled to be in the advantageous state and control is performed to stop the progress of the game after the advantageous state ends, a display indicating that the progress of the game is stopped is displayed. death,
A display indicating that the progress of the game has been stopped is displayed when the counter value reaches the operating value while being controlled in the first special state, and a display indicating that the progress of the game is stopped when being controlled in the second special state. A display indicating that the progress of the game has been stopped is displayed when the counter value reaches the operating value, and a display indicating that the progress of the game is stopped when the counter value becomes the operating value at a predetermined timing when the control is in the advantageous state. The display indicating that the progress of the game has been stopped, which is displayed when the control to stop the progress of the game after the end, is a common display (FIGS. 12-57 and 12-58).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this example. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this example. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing the pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 131SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine in the feature section 131SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern type determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the expectation degree of the reach effect of super reach. It is an explanatory diagram showing the difference in the degree of expectation between reach effects of super reach. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a data holding area for game control. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a data holding area for production control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. FIG. 3 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transition. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing an execution rate of a look-ahead notice performance. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a determination ratio of stopping symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing performance control patterns according to variation patterns. It is an explanatory diagram showing performance control patterns according to variation patterns. It is a figure showing the flow of performance during variable display in a normal state. It is a diagram showing the flow of performance during variable display in time saving state A and variable probability state. It is a figure showing the flow of performance during variable display in time saving state B. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of low base weak reach A effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A performance. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of low base weak reach B effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B performance. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of low base strong reach A effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image which shows a bad example of low base strong reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of low base strong reach B effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base strongest reach effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strongest reach effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image in the modified example of a title display part. It is a diagram showing the transition of images during execution of high base super reach effects A to D. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of high base super reach effects A to D. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing positions where title characters are displayed in a display area of an image display device. It is an explanatory diagram showing performance time of super reach performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between performance times of super reach performance. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between title characters and decorative patterns of a super reach effect. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution status of expectation level suggestion display. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of a selection effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing the number of operations until switching to the next title in the selection performance and the execution rate of the super reach performance when the selection performance is executed. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed during variable display. It is an explanatory diagram about the execution rate of the performance which can be performed during variable display. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display state of an explanatory text displayed in an explanatory text display effect. It is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect. It is a figure which shows the execution status of title color change effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of title characters changes in a title color change effect. It is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion effect A. It is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance B. It is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance C. It is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance D. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the operation promotion image. It is a diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start performance. It is a figure which shows the display situation of the remaining number of times until play time. It is a diagram showing the execution status of play time start effect. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title character of the super reach performance, the explanatory text, the title character of the jackpot start performance, and the operation promotion character. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters, etc. of the super reach performance and the title characters, etc. of the play time start performance. It is a diagram showing the arrangement state of game effect lamps. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. It is a diagram showing a brightness data table used for super reach effect. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of title common chance up red. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the title common chance up red child table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up red. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up red. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up red. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of title common chance up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the title common chance up golden child table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of a strong reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of a strong reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a strong reach common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a strong reach common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a strong reach common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a strong reach common title. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the parent table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the parent table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the parent table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of a high base reach type common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of a high base reach common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a high base reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a high base reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a high base reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach system reach A introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the parent table of high base reach system reach B introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of high base reach system reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach system reach C introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of high base reach type reach C introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach system reach D introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of high base reach system reach D introduction. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the engine which comprises the title display part of low base weak reach A, B effects, and brightness data. It is a front view showing a gaming machine in an example. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. It is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a special variable winning ball device. It is an explanatory diagram of an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a display monitor. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a display monitor. It is a flowchart showing game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing game control timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating power-off detection processing. It is a flowchart showing game stop monitoring processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows random numerical value judgment processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart showing game stop processing. It is an explanatory diagram of game stop timing. (A) is an explanatory diagram when an error occurs, and (B) is an explanatory diagram when the MY counter value reaches a specified value. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control board to the payout control board, and (B) is a control command transmitted and received between the game control board and the payout control board. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving control signals and control commands. It is a sequence diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a flow chart showing payout control main processing. It is a flow chart showing payout control timer interrupt processing. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram for explaining communication between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a flowchart showing production control main processing. It is a flowchart showing production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows advance notice setting processing. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a pre-read preview effect is executed and the determination ratio of each display pattern. It is a flow chart showing game stop suggestion production processing. It is a flowchart which shows right-handed hitting promotion display processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows preview production decision processing. It is an explanatory diagram of whether or not to execute a preview performance and the determination ratio of each performance pattern. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows ending effect processing. It is a flowchart showing game stop performance processing. It is an explanatory diagram of the execution period and performance contents of a design determination period performance, an ending performance, and a game stop performance. It is a timing chart showing the production during the second symbol confirmation period. It is a timing chart showing the ending performance. It is a timing chart showing a game stop effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode at the time of starting a jackpot game. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode when controlled from a time saving state or a probability variable state to a normal state. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode of a game stop suggestion effect. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode of a game stop suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode when controlled to a game stop state. It is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode when controlled to a game stop state. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode of a customer waiting demonstration effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a game stop performance as a modification. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode of performance during the second symbol confirmation period as a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a frequency display LED as a modified example. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode of a display monitor as a modification. It is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between a game control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer as a modified example. It is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode when starting a pachinko game machine in a game stop state. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table in a modification. (A) is an explanatory diagram when an error occurs in the modified example, (B) is an explanatory diagram when the MY counter value reaches the specified value in the modified example, and (C) is an explanatory diagram when the settings are changed in the modified example. It is an explanatory diagram of a state.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and in the title display part in the specific reach, the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) becomes the reach mode. This system is characterized by displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach so as to use the display position of the title.
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying a title display corresponding to a specific reach using the display position of the identification information, it is possible to draw attention naturally to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be suitably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 1-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-1,
Decorative identification information is displayed in the reach mode of the first size (decorative pattern (large)) before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) displayed in the reach mode (Large)) is displayed in a second size (decorative design (small)) smaller than the first size, and the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed in the second size. It is characterized by being displayed using the display position of the displayed decoration identification information (decoration pattern (small)).
According to this feature, the decoration identification information displayed in the first size becomes the second size to attract the attention of the player, and the display position of the decoration identification information in the second size is used to reach a specific reach. By displaying the corresponding title display, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-3 is the gaming machine described in Embodiment 1-1 or 1-2,
In the title display part of the specific reach, at the timing when the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become the reach mode is displayed, the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) that has become the reach mode. It is characterized by displaying the corresponding title display (title characters).
According to this feature, at the timing when the decoration identification information that has become the reach mode is displayed in the title display part in the specific reach, the title corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decoration identification information that has become the reach mode. By displaying this, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
The specific reach (super reach performance) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) and a second reach (low base strong reach) that is expected to be controlled to the advantageous state more than the first reach. A to C performances), including
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear in a state where they overlap with one of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern on the left side) among the decoration identification information in the reach mode. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear in a state where they overlap with one of the decoration identification information in the reach mode, This makes it easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of Form 1-5 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-4,
The specific reach (super reach performance) includes a third reach (low base strongest reach performance) that has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
The title display corresponding to the third reach is characterized in that it appears in a state where it overlaps with the decoration identification information (decoration patterns on both sides) of both sides in the reach mode.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the third reach, which is expected to be controlled to be more advantageous than the first reach and the second reach, is displayed in a state where it overlaps with the decoration identification information of both reaches in the reach mode. Therefore, the title display corresponding to the third reach can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

The gaming machine of Form 1-6 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-5,
The title display corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), and the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) ) The title display corresponding to the above appears in a state where it overlaps with one of the decoration identification information (decoration pattern on the left side) or both of the decoration identification information (decoration pattern on both sides) among the decoration identification information in reach mode, It is characterized in that it is displayed in a fixed position, and even during the period when it is displayed in the fixed position, it is displayed in a state that overlaps with a part of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) that has become a ready-to-reach mode.
According to this feature, even after the title display is displayed at a fixed position, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern),
Displaying second decoration identification information (an even-numbered decorative pattern) in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, the reach mode and Display the title display (title characters) so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) that has become
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. The present invention is characterized in that the title display (title characters) is displayed using the display position of the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative patterns).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information has become the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach and the second reach using the display position of the decoration identification information that has become the mode, it is possible to draw attention naturally to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be suitably displayed. It can be carried out.

The gaming machine of Form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 2-1,
The case where the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a ready-to-win mode and the case where the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) are displayed in a ready-to-win mode are the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ) are characterized by different levels of expectations controlled by
According to this feature, when the decorative identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the degree of expectation for being controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on which decorative identification information is in the ready-to-reach mode, making it easier to draw attention to the title display. .

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth variation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. ), and determine one of the multiple fluctuation patterns including
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
When determining the fifth variation pattern, transmitting a fifth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-11 to PB1-13) to the production control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The third reach (low base strongest reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part up to, and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern),
Displaying second decoration identification information (an even-numbered decorative pattern) in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, the reach mode and Display the title display (title characters) so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) that has become
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd-numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, the first decoration in the reach mode is displayed. The title display (title characters) is displayed using the display position of the decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns),
The second decoration identification information (even-numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, the second display part in the reach mode is displayed. It is characterized in that the title display (title characters) is displayed using the display position of the decoration identification information (even-numbered decorative designs).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information has become the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach, second reach, and third reach using the display position of the decorative identification information in the reach mode in the display part, it is possible to naturally draw attention to the title display. As a result, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and in the title display part in the specific reach, the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) becomes the reach mode. Display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach so as to use the display position of
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying a title display corresponding to a specific reach using the display position of the identification information, it is possible to naturally draw attention to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. , a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to PA2-9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state. Decide on one of the multiple fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second variation pattern (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-3), transmitting a second command to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-5 to PB1-7) to the production control means,
When the fourth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-7 to PA2-9) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The first reach (low base weak reach B performance) and the second reach (low base strong reach B performance) are reaches in which multiple characters are used,
The first reach (low base weak reach B production) uses the first character (ally character "Yumemu") in the first reach and the second character (enemy character "Boingo") in the first reach, The reach is informed that the first character (ally character "Yumemu") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is a game in which the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") in the second reach and the second character (enemy character "Robo") in the second reach a reach that is used and is notified that the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") will be controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") in the second reach is on the near side and the second character (enemy character) in the second reach is The display starts with the character "Robo") placed at the back,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach B effect), the first character (ally character "Yumemu") in the first reach is on the near side, and the second character (enemy character "Boingo") in the second reach is ”) is characterized in that the display starts from a display that is placed so that it is not on the back side.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has relatively high expectations, the first character who is informed that it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state is on the front side, and the second character is on the back side. This allows the player to empathize with the game, makes it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the player has high expectations, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 5-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 5-1,
The first character is a character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") that is given a benefit when winning a battle,
The second character is a character (enemy character "Robo") that is not given a benefit when winning a battle,
At the start of the introduction part in the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first characters (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") are displayed in the front position with their backs turned, and the second The character (enemy character "Robo") is displayed in a position on the back side facing toward you, and the first character and the second character are facing each other.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has relatively high expectations, the player's direction and the first character's direction are the same, making it easier for the player to empathize with the player, and making the player have high expectations. This makes it easier to recognize that the level is high.

The gaming machine of Form 5-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 5-1 or 5-2,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and the second character (enemy character "Robo") are shown in the title display part. The title display (title characters) is displayed at a position that includes the display area where the title display (title characters) was displayed.
According to this feature, a player who has been paying attention to the title display will naturally look at the first character and the second character when the title display disappears.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second variation pattern (a variation pattern designation command that specifies PA2-2 and PA2-3), transmitting a second command to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performances) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performances),
The execution time of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is longer than the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects),
The first reach and the second reach are reaches in which dialogue subtitles are used,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles are displayed,
In the introduction part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), continue to display the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part in the first reach,
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the title display (title characters) is displayed without displaying dialogue subtitles.
According to this feature, the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation level and a long execution time, is displayed so as not to overlap the title display and dialogue subtitles as much as possible, while the second reach, which has a relatively low expectation level and a short execution time. At the time of the first reach, even if the dialogue subtitles and title display overlap, by finishing the title display first, the dialogue subtitles can also be noticed, and the title display and dialogue subtitles can be suitably provided to the player. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 6-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 6-1,
If the title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), in the subsequent introduction part, the title The feature is that the production scene does not change until the dialogue subtitles that were displayed at the same time as the title characters have finished displaying.
According to this feature, if the title display and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part in the first reach, in the subsequent introduction part, the dialogue subtitles that were displayed at the same time as the title display are displayed. The scene does not change until the end of the scene, so you can draw attention to the title display and then the dialogue subtitles.

The gaming machine of Form 6-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 6-1 or 6-2,
When the title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output. However, it is characterized in that the audio corresponding to the title display (title characters) is not output.
According to this feature, when the title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed at the same time, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, but the audio corresponding to the title display is not output, so that the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles can be heard. It becomes easier.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the particular reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The titles of the specific reaches (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effects A to D) are displayed with multiple characters (``6 people catch Bakuchu!'', ``Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D'')) It consists of
The display means (image display device 5) displays the title (title characters) of the specific reach in a first size (enlarged size) in which only a part of the plurality of characters is visible in the title display part of the specific reach. The display size gradually decreases from the first size, and the title display (title characters) of the specific reach is displayed so that the display size becomes a second size (reduced size) where all the multiple characters can be seen. ,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title for strongest reach system, common title for high base reach system),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction (high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D) It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means using
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, the first size is displayed where only a portion of multiple characters can be seen, and then the size is gradually reduced until all characters are visible. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 7-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 7-1,
Before the title display part of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect) is started, a movable object (movable body 32) is operated so as to overlap with the front side of the display means (image display device 5),
During the period from when the movable object moves until the movable object returns to its initial position (falling effect), a background corresponding to the movement of the movable object (background exclusively for falling effect) is displayed, and the movable object returns to its initial position. The title display (title characters) is displayed at a first size (enlarged size) in which, when returning to It is characterized in that the display starts, and then a second size (reduced size) title display and a background corresponding to the title display (background dedicated to title display) are displayed.
According to this feature, while giving an impact with the display method of the reach title, it is possible to simultaneously switch the background without feeling strange, and the title display can be suitably shown to the player.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the particular reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The titles of the specific reaches (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effects A to D) are displayed with multiple characters (``Catch Bakushu with 6 people!'', ``Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D'')) It consists of
The display means (image display device 5) enlarges and displays a plurality of characters from a state in which the plurality of characters are displayed (a state in which they are displayed in a reduced size and in a fixed position) in the title display part in the specific reach. By (expanding the display area until the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters), the title display part ends, and the display corresponding to the introduction part in the specific reach (the background at the start of the introduction part) becomes visible. Display it so that
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title for strongest reach system, common title for high base reach system),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction (high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D) It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means using
According to this feature, the player pays attention to the title display in the title display part, and can suitably use the title display to smoothly switch to the display corresponding to the next introduction part. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
Execution time (T1-1 to 2) of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and execution time of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) Unlike (T2-1~3),
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts until it is displayed at a fixed position, and a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position. It consists of the third part (title end period) from displaying the fixed position to ending the display,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A and B effects), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period). displaying a title display (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period). The title display (title characters) is displayed such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the second part displayed in a fixed position is made the longest to draw attention to the type of title display. Can be done. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the first reach and the second reach, the first part until it is displayed at the fixed position is longer than the third part from the display at the fixed position until the display ends. By setting the time to be long, it is possible to influence which title display is displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the 1st reach and the 2nd reach, the title display part can be easily understood by making the relationship between the execution times of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd parts the same. It can be made easier.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in the normal state) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (normal state) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. a third fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a certain variable state) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled by the advantageous state), and a fourth fluctuation pattern (a winning fluctuation pattern in a certain variable state) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state. Decide one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including (outlier fluctuation pattern),
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates an outlier fluctuation pattern in the normal state) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a jackpot variation pattern in a variable probability state) to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies an outlier variation pattern in a probability variation state) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
Execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in normal state) and title display in the second reach (super reach performance in variable probability state) Unlike the part execution time (T4),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is a reach performed in the normal state, and the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is a special condition (probable variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state. is the reach executed in
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts until it is displayed at a fixed position, and a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position. It consists of the third part (title end period) from displaying the fixed position to ending the display,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in normal state), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period). , displaying a title display (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period). , the title display (title characters) is displayed such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the second part displayed in the fixed position is the most By making it longer, you can draw attention to the type of title display. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the first part will be displayed in the fixed position until it is displayed in the fixed position. By making the time from the time to the end of the display longer than the third part, it is possible to influence which title display is displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the relationship between the execution times of the first part, second part, and third part is By making them common, the title display part can be made easier to understand.

The gaming machine of Form 10-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 10-1,
The execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is the execution time (T1-1 to T1-2, It is characterized by being shorter than T2-1 to T2-3 and T3).
According to this feature, since the execution time of the title display part in the second reach executed in the special state is relatively short, the special state can be advanced at a good tempo, while the execution time of the title display part in the first reach executed in the normal state is relatively short. The execution time of the title display part is relatively long, so you can really stir things up.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts until it is displayed at a fixed position, and a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position. It consists of the third part (title end period) from displaying the fixed position to ending the display,
The display means (image display device 5) is arranged such that in the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), the second part (title display period) is different from the first part (title start period) and the third part ( displaying a title display (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, by making the second part displayed at a fixed position the longest, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title display. Further, by making the first part until the title is displayed at the regular position longer than the third part from when the title is displayed at the regular position until the display ends, it is possible to decide which title to display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the particular reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The display means is
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) is displayed in a first mode (white mode), and the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a first mode It is possible to display in a second mode (red mode) in which the expectation level of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the second mode (red mode),
In the title display part (title display part shown in Figure 11-43) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production), the expectation level suggestion display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first size. and then displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in a second size larger than the first size,
When the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode (white mode) and the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second mode (red mode). In any case when displaying, displaying the expectation level suggestion display in a common manner,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach system strongest reach title, strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to a specific reach is larger in size than the expectation level suggestion display, and its appearance suggests the expectation level, so it attracts the player's attention. By displaying the expectation level suggestion display before the title display, attention can be drawn to the expectation level suggestion first. Moreover, since the expectation level suggestion display is performed in a common manner whether the title is displayed in the first manner or in the second manner, attention can be drawn to the manner in which the title is displayed thereafter.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-7) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. ~9), a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to 10) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to PA2-12) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Decide one of the fluctuation patterns from among the multiple fluctuation patterns including and,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-5 to PB1-7) to the production control means;
When the second fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-7 to PA2-9) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-8 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When determining the fourth variation pattern, transmitting a fourth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-10 to PA2-12) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach B effect),
The display means is
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach B production), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach C production), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the second mode (4 stars),
The expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance) and the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C performance) are made to be the same. highlight and
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (strong reach system strong reach B title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach C performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach type strong reach C title),
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach C introduction). It is said that
According to this feature, even when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the first mode in the title display part in the first reach, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the second mode in the title display part in the second reach. In this case, development costs can be reduced by using a common highlighted display. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 13-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 13-1,
The expectation level suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
In the first reach (low base strong reach B effect), the degree of expectation is suggested by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects,
In the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the degree of expectation is suggested by N+1 (4) objects,
In the expectation level suggestion display, each object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and even if one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, , is characterized by highlighting in a common manner.
According to this feature, whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, development costs are reduced by highlighting in a common manner. It can be reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 13-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 13-2,
The expectation level suggestion display is characterized in that the time during which one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted and the time during which 0.5 objects (star-shaped object) are highlighted are the same. It is said that
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by making the time for highlighting one object and the time for highlighting 0.5 objects the same.

The gaming machine of Form 13-4 is the gaming machine described in Form 13-2 or 13-3,
In the expectation level suggestion display, a common emphasis sound ( It is characterized by the output of a sound that suggests the degree of expectation.
According to this feature, a common voice is output whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, reducing development costs. be able to.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) with a specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect). It is possible to notify the
When the second command is received, the specified reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). It is possible to notify the
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach; An introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced;
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect), an expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed. It is possible and
In the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production), emphasis is placed on the first object (star-shaped object). Then, while continuing to highlight the first object (star-shaped object), highlight the second object (star-shaped object), and then highlight the first object (star-shaped object). The third object (star-shaped object) is highlighted.
According to this feature, in the title display part of a specific reach, it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display consisting of multiple objects, and in the expectation level suggestion display, before the highlighting for the first object ends. , the highlighting for the second object starts, but the highlighting for the third object does not start until the highlighting for the first object ends, so we are aware of the number of objects that indicate the degree of expectation. It becomes easier to do so.

The gaming machine of Form 14-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 14-1,
In the expectation level suggestion display, an emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) is output every time an object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and an emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) is output for highlighting one object (star-shaped object). After the output of the expectations-suggesting sound is completed, a highlighting sound for highlighting the next object (expectations-suggesting sound) is output.
According to this feature, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object and the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects that indicate the degree of expectation.

The gaming machine of Form 14-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 14-1 or 14-2,
The expectation level suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) and characters (characters "expectation level"),
The object (star-shaped object) is highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text (the text "Expectation level").
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to both the plurality of objects and the characters that constitute the expectation level suggestion display by highlighting the objects.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) with a specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect). It is possible to notify the
When the second command is received, the specified reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). It is possible to notify the
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach; An introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced;
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect), an expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed. It is possible and
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach performance A to D performance), the suspension display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strong reach type common title, strongest reach type strongest reach title, high base reach type common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means using the high base reach type reach B introduction, the high base reach type reach C introduction, and the high base reach type reach D introduction).
According to this feature, while an expectation level suggestion display consisting of multiple objects is displayed in the title display part of a specific reach, the pending display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistakenly recognized as an expectation level suggestion display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 15-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 15-1,
The maximum number of active displays corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display that has started matches the maximum number (5) of objects (star-shaped objects) constituting the expectation level suggestion display.
According to this feature, even if a specific reach is reached in a situation where the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, it may be mistakenly assumed that the maximum number of objects that constitute the expectation suggestive display are displayed in the pending display and active display. It is possible to prevent this from being recognized as such.

The gaming machine of Form 15-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 15-1 or 15-2,
The present invention is characterized in that the suspended display ends when the display means (image display device 5) displays a monochrome display before the start of the title display part.
According to this feature, the hold display can be ended without any discomfort.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4/PB1-14) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. (PA2-4 to 6/PA2-16), a third variation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. A certain fourth variation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-8 to 10/PB1-16) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a certain fourth variation pattern (PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-17) Deciding one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including the sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to PA2-12/PA2-18) which is an uncontrolled fluctuation pattern,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-2 to PB1-4/PB1-14) to the production control means;
When determining the second variation pattern, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-6/PA2-16) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-15) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-17) to the production control means,
When determining the fifth variation pattern, transmitting a fifth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-8 to PB1-10/PB1-16) to the production control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-10 to PA2-12/PA2-18) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance), it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display composed of a first number (3) of objects (star-shaped objects),
Expectations that the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is composed of objects (star-shaped objects) of a second number (3.5) that is larger than the first number. It is possible to display a degree-suggestive display,
Expectation level suggestion made up of a third number (4) of objects (star-shaped objects) that are larger than the second number in the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) display is possible and
The difference in number between the first number and the second number is the same as the difference in number between the second number and the third number (0.5),
The expectation level controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is executed and the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) The difference from the expectation level that is controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is executed is the expectation level that is controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is executed. The difference is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as an expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases from the first number to the second number, and when it increases from the second number to the third number, The amount of increase in the number is the same, but the amount of increase in expectation that is controlled to be more advantageous when increasing from the second number to the third number than when increasing from the first number to the second number is Therefore, as the number of objects increases, it can be expected that the increased number of objects will be controlled to an advantageous state. I never get my hopes up.

The gaming machine of Form 16-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 16-1,
The plurality of fluctuation patterns include a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13/PB1-17) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-17) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19),
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, transmitting a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-11 to PB1-13/PB1-17) to the production control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, transmitting an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15/PA2-19) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The display means displays an object (star-shaped object) with a fourth number (4.5), which is larger than the third number, in the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect). It is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of
The difference in numbers between the third number and the fourth number (0.5) is smaller than the difference in numbers between the first number and the third number (1),
The expectation level controlled to the advantageous state when the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) is executed and the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) ) is executed and the expectation level is controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is executed. The difference is greater than the difference between the expectation level to be controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases from the third number to the fourth number than when the number increases from the first number to the third number, Although the amount of increase in the number is small, the amount of increase in the degree of expectation controlled to be advantageous is greater when increasing from the third number to the fourth number than when increasing from the first number to the third number. Therefore, as the number of objects increases, it can be expected that the control will be more advantageous even if the increased number of objects is small.

The gaming machine of Form 16-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 16-2,
The difference between the third number and the fourth number is 0.5, and the difference between the first number and the third number is 1.
According to this feature, the number of objects displayed as the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases by 0.5 from the third number than when the number increases by 1 from the first number to become the third number. If the number is 4, it can be expected that the control will be more advantageous.
The gaming machine of Form 16-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16-1 to 16-3,
When the third reach (high base reach C performance) is executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state, the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state and the second reach (high base reach B performance) ) is executed and the expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is the difference from the expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect) is executed in the normal state. The difference is greater than the difference between the degree of reach and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance) is executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to expect that a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state will be controlled to an advantageous state when the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases. can.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach effects A to C) are both reaches executed in a normal state, and the second reach (low base strong reach effects) is a reach executed in a normal state. Reach A to C effects) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performances) is longer than the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performances),
The display means (image display device 5)
displaying an expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production);
The expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (weak reach system common title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), use the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) controlling the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using a strong reach C system.
According to this feature, the title display part in the second reach, which has relatively high expectations, is longer than the title display part in the first reach, which has relatively low expectations, and the title display part in the second reach While the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the first reach, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the first reach, so it is made to feel that the expectation level is higher in the second reach than in the first reach. be able to. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 17-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 17-1,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period). ,
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period) and is composed only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period). and
The character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects). It is characterized by
According to this feature, the text display part of the title display part in the second reach is longer than the text display part of the title display part in the first reach, so the second reach is longer than the first reach. It is possible to make the user feel that the level of expectation is high.

The gaming machine of Form 17-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 17-1 or 17-2,
This is a reach executed in the normal state, and includes a third reach (low base strongest reach performance) that has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach effects A to C effects). ,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period). ,
The title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period) and consists only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach effect A to C effect). It is said that
According to this feature, the text display part of the title display part in the third reach is longer than the text display part of the title display part in the second reach, so the third reach is longer than the second reach. It is possible to make the user feel that the level of expectation is high.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2, 5, 8) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2 to 3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-4) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. 12) Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies PB1-2, 5, and 8) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 to PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be executed,
When the second command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be executed,
When the third command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) can be executed,
When the fourth command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) can be executed,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are both reaches executed in a normal state,
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), there is no notification that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) as a result of the performance, and ), there are cases where it is announced that it will not be controlled, and cases where another reach (super reach effect) is executed.
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performances) is performed when it is announced that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) as a result of the production, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). There are cases where it is announced that it will not be done, and there is a certain reach.
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification whether or not the other reach is executed. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The display means (image display device 5)
displaying an expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production);
The expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The light emission control means (effect control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (weak reach system common title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), use the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) controlling the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using a strong reach C system.
According to this feature, while the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the second reach where it is sometimes reported that the control will be directly controlled to an advantageous state, Since the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the first reach that is not reported, it is possible to prevent the first reach from giving an excessive sense of expectation. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 18-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 18-1,
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A and B effects), the title is displayed (title letters) in a confirmed mode (gold) that confirms that another reach (super reach effect) will be executed. It is characterized by the fact that it can be displayed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention even to the title display part in the first reach where the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) is achieved through a selection effect using title display (title letters) corresponding to multiple reaches including the specific reach (super reach effect). may be executed,
The display means is
It is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display together with the title display (title characters) in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach) and the selected production,
When displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach), the expectation level suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects). step by step,
When displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the selection performance, the expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is not displayed in stages.
According to this feature, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of a specific reach, the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects is displayed in stages, whereas the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects is displayed in stages, whereas the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects is When displaying the degree suggestion display, the expectation degree suggestion display consisting of multiple objects is not displayed in stages, so the expectation degree suggestion display is not only displayed in stages in the title display part but also in the selection performance before it. This eliminates the annoyance caused by the display of

The gaming machine of Form 19-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 19-1,
The selection performance is a performance that changes in stages from a reach with low expectations (super reach performance) to a reach with high expectations (super reach performance) by operating the performance operation means (push button 31B),
The time required to change by one level in the selected production (minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach production) is based on the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach) It is characterized in that the time required for displaying one level of the expectation level suggestion display of the title display part of the title display part (the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold through highlighting) may be shorter.
According to this feature, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the stepwise changes in the selection performance.

The gaming machine of Form 19-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 19-2,
The selection performance is a performance that changes from the current reach (super reach performance) to a reach (super reach performance) with a higher expectation level by one stage at each stage, and changes to the next stage each time it changes by one stage. This feature is characterized in that the number of operations of the effect operation means (push button 31B) required for this purpose is increased.
According to this feature, the higher the expected level of reach, the more anxious the player can be.

The gaming machine of Form 19-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 19-1 to 19-3,
When the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach) is selected by the selection performance, the game starts from the title display part.
According to this feature, even when a specific reach is executed via a selection effect, it starts from the title display part, so it is easy for the player to determine which reach has finally been executed.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special map, second special map),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) in a manner with larger movement than the title display corresponding to the specific reach (title letters of the super reach effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by moving the name display of the advantageous state more greatly, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 20-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 20-1,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach B, C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D), when displaying the title display (title characters), a background dedicated to the title display is provided. displayed,
The background of the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is characterized in that it is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display.
According to this feature, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled to an advantageous state by moving the background of the advantageous state name display more widely.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part (operation promotion effects B and D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to make an action can be displayed;
Displaying the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) in a manner with larger movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (effect control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional characters displayed in the introductory part encourage the player to take action, and by moving them larger than the title display displayed in the title display part, the characters intuitively prompt the player to move. can encourage action. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 21-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 21-1,
In the introductory part of the specific reach (super reach effect), a special promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to take action and suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed. Promotional characters (large)) can be displayed,
Both the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) and the special promotion text display (operation promotion text (large)) move more than the title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by being displayed in a large format.
According to this feature, whether it is a promotion character display or a special promotion character display, by moving the title display larger than the title display displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to make a move. .

The gaming machine of Form 21-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 21-1 or 21-2,
The number of characters (3) of the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is smaller than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title display (title characters).
According to this feature, since the number of characters in the promotion character display is smaller than the number of characters in the title display, the content of the characters can be recognized even if the character is moved significantly.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display an explanatory character display (explanatory characters) that is different from the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) and that explains the content of the specific reach,
Displaying the explanatory character display (explanatory character) in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, by displaying the additionally displayed explanatory text display in a manner with greater movement than the title display, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory text display is added in addition to the title display. Can be done. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 22-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 22-1,
The explanatory character display (explanatory character) is characterized in that the content suggests that the particular reach (super reach performance) is advantageous.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw more attention to the fact that the explanatory character display is added.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The degree of expectation that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) will be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects),
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is better than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects). Also displays the font size to be larger,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (weak reach system common title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), use the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) controlling the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using a strong reach C system.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is displayed in a larger font size than the title display corresponding to the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation. Therefore, just by displaying the title, it is possible to make the user realize that the second reach has higher expectations than the first reach. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 23-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 23-1,
The number of characters (10) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is the title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effects) The display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect) is larger than the number of characters (7, 8) that make up (title characters). It is characterized by being larger than the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect).
According to this feature, since the display area occupied by one character is larger in the title display corresponding to the second reach, it is made to feel that the expectations for the second reach are higher than the first reach. be able to.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of multiple characters,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
The first size of the decoration identification information (decorative design (large)) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the second size smaller than the first size is displayed. Displaying the decoration identification information (decoration pattern (small)) in a reach mode,
displaying at least one character of a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) in a size larger than the second size (decorative design (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, at least one character of the title display corresponding to a specific reach is displayed in a larger size than the decorative identification information reduced to the second size, so it is possible to draw attention to the title display in the title display part. can. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 24-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 24-1,
Any character of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is smaller than the first size (decorative design (large)) and smaller than the second size (decorative design (small)). It is also characterized by being displayed in a large size.
According to this feature, the decoration identification information can be reliably recognized when the reach mode is reached, but after that, the decoration identification information is reduced and the title display is configured in a larger size than the decoration identification information. Since each character is displayed, it is possible to draw attention to the title display in the title display part.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part (operation promotion effects B and D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to make an action can be displayed;
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) larger than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which promotion characters are displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether the control will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is a situation in which an advantageous state is already in place. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled in the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 25-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 25-1,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of jackpot start effect) is composed of a first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and a second character string (“BONUS”),
After the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) is displayed in the first position (upper position), the second character string (“BONUS”) is displayed in the second position (lower position). is,
After the second character string (“BONUS”) is displayed in the second position (bottom position), the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) displayed in the first position (top position) is displayed. ") and the second character string ("BONUS") displayed at the second position (at the bottom of the fixed position) are gradually enlarged and displayed,
The first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and the second character string (“BONUS”) are displayed in the first position (upper position) and the second position (lower position). Sometimes the font size is displayed at its smallest size,
When the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and the second character string (“BONUS”) are displayed in the first position (upper regular position) and the second position (lower regular position); The size of the characters is larger than the size of the characters constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the advantageous state name display are always displayed larger than the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that being controlled to be in an advantageous state can be celebrated even more.

The gaming machine of Form 25-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 25-1 or 25-2,
The smallest character of the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is greater than the largest character of the character strings constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)). It is also characterized by its large size.
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string that makes up the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string that makes up the promotion character display. Even so, since the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state even more.

The gaming machine of Form 25-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 25-1 to 25-3,
A special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) can be displayed;
The special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is characterized in that it is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect).
According to this feature, the special promotion character display, which suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display, is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, so that the player can feel the advantageous situation.

The gaming machine of Form 25-5 is the gaming machine described in Form 25-4,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) is the largest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of jackpot start effect). It is characterized by being larger than.
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string that makes up the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string that makes up the advantageous state name display, so which character should you focus on? Even so, since the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, the player can feel the advantageous situation.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) larger than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (effect control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 26-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 26-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes multiple types of specific reaches with different title displays (title characters),
The advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) is characterized in that it is displayed larger than the title display (title letters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, being controlled to be in an advantageous state can be congratulated by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach.

The gaming machine of Form 26-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 26-2,
The smallest character among the character strings that make up the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) is the character that makes up the title display (title letters) that corresponds to any type of specific reach (super reach effect). Characterized by being larger than the largest character in the column.
According to this feature, the smallest character of the character strings that make up the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character of the character strings that make up the title display that corresponds to any type of specific reach. Therefore, no matter which character you pay attention to, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, so you can celebrate being controlled to be in an advantageous state even more.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
In front of the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to move can be displayed. can be,
displaying a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) larger than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion text display before the title display part and displaying the title display that will be displayed thereafter larger than the promotion text display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 27-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 27-1,
After the promotion character display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed, the game progresses to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), and a title display part in the specific reach starts. .
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion text display before the title display part in a series of flows, and by displaying the title display that will be displayed later larger than the promotion text display. can.

The gaming machine of Form 27-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 27-1 or 27-2,
The smallest character of the character strings that constitute the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) constitutes the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)). It is characterized by being larger than the largest character in the string.
According to this feature, the smallest character of the character strings that make up the title display that corresponds to a specific reach is displayed larger than the largest character of the character string that makes up the promotional character display. Even if the user pays attention to the title, the title display can draw the user's attention.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
In front of the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to move can be displayed. can be,
After it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled by the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the advantageous condition name display (title characters of jackpot start effect) corresponding to the advantageous condition to be controlled will be displayed. It is possible to display
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) larger than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
displaying a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) larger than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state. Moreover, by displaying the promotional text display before the title display part and displaying the subsequent title display larger than the promotional text display, attention can be drawn to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 28-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 28-1,
After the promotion character display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed, it develops into the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the title display part in the specific reach starts, and the specific reach ( The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed after it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled by the low base weak reach A and B performances).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion text display before the title display part in a series of flows, and by displaying the title display that will be displayed later larger than the promotion text display. After being informed that the game will be controlled into an advantageous state due to a specific reach, the name display of the advantageous state is displayed larger than the title display, thereby congratulating the player on being controlled into an advantageous state.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) for a longer time than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 29-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 29-1,
The time from when all the character strings forming the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) are displayed until at least a part of the character string is no longer displayed corresponds to the specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by a longer time than the time from when a part of the character string that makes up the title display (title characters) is displayed until all of the character string is no longer displayed.
According to this feature, by making the time during which the name display of an advantageous state with the intention of blessing is clearly visible longer than the time during which the title display whose purpose is to agitate the possibility of being controlled into an advantageous state, the game can give people a sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine of Form 29-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 29-1 or 28-2,
After the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed, the advantageous state name display is changed to an operation suggestion display (image (small) promoting right-handed hitting and promotion of right-handed hitting) that suggests how to operate during the advantageous state. image (large)), and after a predetermined period of time has passed since switching to the operation suggestion display, operate using the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display (operation method of launching the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R). This allows for advantageous control,
The time at which the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start performance) switches to the operation suggestion display (right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and right-handed hitting promotion image (large)) corresponds to the specific reach (super reach performance). It is characterized by being shorter than the time it takes to finish the title display (title characters).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display switches to the operation suggestion display in a short time, and after a predetermined period of time, advantageous control is performed by operating in the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display. It is possible to prevent disadvantages to the player due to changing the operating method from the period in which display of the advantageous state name ends.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part (operation promotion effects B and D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to make an action can be displayed;
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which promotion characters are displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether the control will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is a situation in which an advantageous state is already in place. This is the situation after being notified that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state for a longer period of time than displaying the promotion characters, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled in the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 30-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 30-1,
The prompting character display (operation prompting characters (small)) is displayed until the prompted action is performed or a valid time period for the prompted action has elapsed;
The time during which the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed is the period after the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small)) is displayed, the prompted action is not performed, and the prompted action is not performed. It is characterized by the fact that the effective time is longer than the time it takes to elapse.
According to this feature, after the prompting character display is displayed, the advantageous state name display is displayed for a longer period of time than the time when the prompted action is not performed, thereby controlling the vehicle to an advantageous state. can be blessed.

The gaming machine of Form 30-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 30-1 or 30-2,
The time from when all the character strings forming the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) are displayed until at least a part of the character strings is no longer displayed is the time when the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (lower case) )) is characterized by being longer than the displayed time.
According to this feature, the time during which the name display of an advantageous state with the intention of blessing is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the display of promotional characters whose purpose is to encourage the player to take action, thereby satisfying the player. It can give a feeling.

The gaming machine of Form 30-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 30-1 to 30-3,
A special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion text (small)) is a display of promotion characters (characters encouraging operation) without a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect);
In the special operation promotion display (operation promotion characters (large)), promotion characters (characters that prompt operation) are displayed after the promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect) is displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed for a longer period of time than the special promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the name display of an advantageous state with blessings is displayed is longer than the time during which the special promotion character display accompanying the promotion introduction display is displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction. be able to.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
In front of the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to move can be displayed. can be,
displaying a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) for a longer time than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion text display before the title display part and displaying the title display that will be displayed thereafter for a longer time than the promotion text display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 31-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 31-1,
The promotion character display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed for a period of time from when all the character strings forming the title display (title characters) are displayed until at least a part of the character string is no longer displayed. It is characterized by being longer than time.
According to this feature, the title display can be drawn to attention by making the time during which the title display is clearly visible longer than the time during which the promotional character display whose purpose is to encourage the player to take action is displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 31-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 31-1 or 31-2,
A special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion text (small)) is a display of promotion characters (characters encouraging operation) without a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect);
In the special operation promotion display (operation promotion characters (large)), promotion characters (characters that prompt operation) are displayed after the promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect) is displayed,
The time during which the title display (title characters) is displayed is longer than the time during which the special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, by making the time during which the title display is displayed longer than the time during which the special promotion character display accompanying the promotion introduction display is displayed, attention can be drawn to the title display.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
In front of the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to move can be displayed. can be,
After it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled by the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the advantageous condition name display (title characters of jackpot start effect) corresponding to the advantageous condition to be controlled will be displayed. It is possible to display
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start performance) for a longer time than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
displaying a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) for a longer time than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled in an advantageous state. Further, by displaying the promotional text display before the title display part and displaying the title display that will be displayed thereafter for a longer time than the promotion text display, attention can be drawn to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-14) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a sixth variation pattern (PA2-16) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, and A plurality of fluctuation patterns including a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-15 to PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to an advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-17 to PA2-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
When determining the fifth variation pattern, transmitting a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-14) to the production control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-16) to the production control means,
When determining the seventh variation pattern, transmitting a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-15 to PB1-17) to the production control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, transmitting an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-17 to PA2-19) to the production control means;
The performance control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The third reach (high base reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part up to, and
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are reaches executed in a normal state,
The third reach (high base reach A performance) and the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performances) are reaches performed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects),
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the third reach (high base reach A effect),
The third reach (high base reach A effect) has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The display means is
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
The expectation level suggestion display can be displayed in the title display part in the third reach (high base reach A performance),
The expectation level suggestion display can be displayed in the title display part in the fourth reach (high base reach A performance),
It is characterized in that the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A and B effects).
According to this feature, since the first reach in the normal state has a lower expectation level than the second reach in the normal state, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the second reach, but the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the first reach. By not displaying it, it is not possible to make people expect excessively that the first reach will control the player to an advantageous state. On the other hand, the third reach in the special state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation level than the fourth reach in the special state, but the expectation level is higher than the first reach in the normal state. By displaying the expectation level suggestion display even in reach, it is possible to make the player expect to be controlled in an advantageous state both in the case of the third reach and in the case of the fourth reach.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in the normal state) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (normal state) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. a third fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a certain variable state) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled by the advantageous state), and a fourth fluctuation pattern (a winning fluctuation pattern in a certain variable state) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state. Decide one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including (outlier fluctuation pattern),
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates an outlier fluctuation pattern in the normal state) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a jackpot variation pattern in a variable probability state) to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies an outlier variation pattern in a probability variation state) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) is a reach performed in the normal state,
The second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is a reach performed in a special state (variable probability state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is shorter than the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in a normal state),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state), the light emitting means control,
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table (high base reach system common title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (super reach performance in normal state), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong Controlling the light emitting means using the introduction of reach A, the introduction of strong reach system strong reach B, and the introduction of strong reach system strong reach C,
In the introduction part of the second reach (super reach performance in variable probability state), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled by using reach C and high base reach system reach D.
According to this feature, by making the title display part of the second reach in the special state shorter than the title display part of the first reach in the normal state, the special state can be advanced at a good tempo. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 34-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 34-1,
The frequency of the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) in the special state (variable probability state) is higher than the frequency of the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) in the normal state. There is.
According to this feature, even if the frequency of second reach increases in the special state, the special state can be advanced at a good tempo.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. ~12), a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PA2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state. Decide one of the fluctuation patterns from among the multiple fluctuation patterns including and,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-11 to PB1-13) to the production control means,
When determining the fourth variation pattern, transmitting a fourth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strongest reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part up to, and
The second reach (low base strongest reach performance) has a higher expectation that the advantageous state will be achieved than the first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect), the first reach is performed in the first display operation mode (display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side to the center of the display area). Display the title display (title characters) corresponding to
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strongest reach effect), the second display operation mode (display mode in which title characters are displayed reduced from enlarged display) that is different from the first display operation mode is displayed. Display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the reach,
When the special state (time saving state B (play time)) is controlled after reaching the specific number of times, a display (title character of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is displayed in the second It is characterized by display in a display mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed in a reduced size instead of being enlarged).
According to this feature, when the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times, the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specific number of times is displayed in the same way as the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation. Since the display is performed in two display operation modes, it is possible to recognize that the special state is highly advantageous after reaching a specific number of times.

The gaming machine of Form 35-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 35-1,
When ending the display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state (time saving state B (play time)) will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times, the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) The present invention is characterized in that the title display (title characters) of the title display part is ended in the same display operation manner as that in which the title characters are enlarged and erased.
According to this feature, even when ending the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a certain number of times, the display operation mode is the same as when ending the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation. Since the operation is ended in the display mode, it is possible to recognize that the special state is highly advantageous after reaching the specific number of times.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
When the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times (time saving state B (play time)), a display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times can be displayed. can be,
The size of the characters composing the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times (title letters of the play time start effect) is the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). larger than the size of the characters that make up the
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether the title will be controlled to an advantageous state or not, whereas the situation in which the title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the title will be controlled to an advantageous state. The display shown is a situation in which the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times, and the size of the characters that make up the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is changed to the title display corresponding to the specific reach. By making it larger than the font size, you can celebrate being controlled into a special state after reaching a certain number of times. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 36-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 36-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes multiple types of specific reaches with different title displays (title characters),
The characters that make up the display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times are the title display (title letters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by being larger than the letters that make it up.
According to this feature, the characters composing the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a specific number of times are displayed larger than the characters composing the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. After reaching it, you can be blessed with being controlled by a special state.

The gaming machine of Form 36-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 36-2,
The smallest character of the character string that makes up the display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times corresponds to which type of specific reach (super reach effect) It is characterized by being larger than the largest character in the character string that makes up the title display (title character).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the character strings composing the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a certain number of times is the character string composing the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. It is displayed larger than our largest font, so no matter which font you pay attention to, the display indicating that you will be controlled into a special state after reaching a certain number of times will be displayed larger than the title display corresponding to a specific reach. Therefore, being controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of times can be a blessing.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times (time saving state B (play time)), a display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times can be displayed. can be,
The display time of the display (title letters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times is longer than the display time of the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). Also long,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether the title will be controlled to an advantageous state or not, whereas the situation in which the title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the title will be controlled to an advantageous state. This is a situation in which a special state is entered after reaching a certain number of reaches, and by displaying a display indicating that a special state will be entered after reaching a certain number of reaches for a longer period of time than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, After reaching it, you can be blessed with being controlled by a special state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 37-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 37-1,
The time from when all the character strings that make up the display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times is displayed until at least a part of the character strings is no longer displayed is , characterized by being longer than the time from when a part of the character string forming the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed until all of the character string is no longer displayed. There is.
According to this feature, a title display whose purpose is to arouse the possibility of being controlled into an advantageous state is displayed during the time when the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a certain number of blessings is clearly visible. By making the time longer than the average time, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters),
The size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is the display (remaining number of characters until play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times. larger than the size of the constituent characters,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters that make up the title display corresponding to a specific reach larger than the size of the letters that make up the display that shows the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching a certain number of times, It is possible to draw attention to the title display corresponding to the title. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 38-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 38-1,
The specific reach (super reach performance) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) and a second reach (low base strong reach) that is expected to be controlled to the advantageous state more than the first reach. A to C performances), including
The display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters) is displayed during the execution of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), (Low base strong reach A to C effect) is not displayed during execution.
According to this feature, in the first reach where expectations are low, by displaying the remaining number of times until reaching a special state after reaching a certain number of times, it is possible to make people aware of the number of times until reaching a special state after reaching a certain number of times. With a high second reach, it is possible to draw attention to the performance by not displaying the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times, and also reduce the player's sense of regret when the number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is small. It can be alleviated.

The gaming machine of Form 38-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 38-2,
When it is announced that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state, a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining time until play time) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) without displaying the number of times character) again,
If it is reported that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state, the specified number of times is reached after the second reach (low base strong reach effects A to C effects) is completed. The feature is that the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state (remaining number of times until play time characters) is displayed again.
According to this feature, when it is announced that the second reach will be controlled to the advantageous state, the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is not displayed again, so that the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is When the number of plays is small, the player's sense of regret can be alleviated. In addition, if it is reported that the second reach is not controlled to an advantageous state, the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed again after the second reach ends, so the number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed again. It can quickly provide relief when there is little.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
At the timing (operation promotion effects A to D) related to the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to make an action can be displayed;
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters),
The size of the characters constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is the same as the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number of times until play time characters) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times. bigger than it,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means (C introduction).
According to this feature, the size of the characters that make up the promotional text display that prompts the player to take action at a timing related to a specific reach, and the size of the letters that make up the display that shows the remaining number of times until a special state after reaching a certain number of times are changed. By making the size larger than that of , it is possible to draw attention to the promotion character display, and it is possible to effectively urge the player to take action. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 39-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 39-1,
If the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed before the title display part (operation promotion production A) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the specific reach has been reached. A display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state (remaining number of times until play time characters) is displayed at the same time,
If the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed in the introduction part (operation promotion production D) of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production), a special state will be activated after reaching the specific number of times. It is characterized by the fact that the display indicating the remaining number of times until the play time (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) is not displayed.
According to this feature, before developing to a specific reach, the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed at the same time as the promotion text is displayed, so that the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed. By not displaying the remaining number of times until a special state is reached after reaching a certain number of times in the operation promotion display of the introduction part, it is possible to determine whether or not it will be notified that the control will be in an advantageous state.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters),
Before displaying the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance), the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters) is ended,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number characters until play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times. Bigger than size;
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means (C introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the name of an advantageous state is displayed is the situation after it has been announced that the advantageous state will be controlled, and there is no need to display the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching a certain number of times. Therefore, before displaying the advantageous state name display, the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times ends, and the size of the characters that make up the advantageous state name display is changed to the special state after reaching the specified number of times. By making the size of the characters larger than the display indicating the number of times remaining to reach the state, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of form 40-2 is the gaming machine according to form 40-1,
Regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state (time-saving state B (play time)) after reaching the specified number of times, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining number of times until play time) is displayed. The sizes of the characters that make up the characters (characters) are the same,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number characters until play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times. It is characterized by being larger than its size.
According to this feature, regardless of the number of times remaining to reach a special state after reaching a specific number of times, the size of the characters that make up the advantageous state name display indicates the number of times remaining to reach a special state after reaching a specific number of times. By making the size of the characters larger than the size of the characters forming the display, it is possible to celebrate being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 40-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 40-1 or 40-2,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) first puts game media into the starting area (first starting prize opening, second starting winning opening) in a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times. It is characterized in that a special fluctuation pattern (time saving B start fluctuation pattern) is determined when a (game ball) enters the ball.
According to this feature, when the game medium first enters the starting area in the special state after reaching the specific number of times, it is possible to perform an effect according to the special variation pattern.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) may be changed from a first aspect (white aspect) to a second aspect (red or gold aspect) and displayed. It is possible and
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed. ) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), the specific reach (low base weak reach A, The time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) is displayed is longer than the time when the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) is displayed in the first mode (white mode). (title characters) are displayed for longer than the displayed time,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, when changing the title display corresponding to the specific reach from the first mode to the second mode in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the specific reach is changed in the second mode. By making the time that the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed longer than the time that the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode, it is possible to ensure that the change to the second mode has been made. It can be recognized. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 41-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 41-1,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed. ) may be changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), or may not be changed as the first aspect (white aspect),
When changing the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), , at a specific timing (when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period), the first mode (white mode) is changed to the second mode (red or gold mode), and a specific effect is generated. Outputs a sound (specific sound),
If the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not changed in the first mode (white mode), when the specific timing comes (title display When the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the period), the specific sound effect (specific sound) is output without changing the first mode (white mode).
According to this feature, a specific sound effect is output when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at a specific timing, and a specific sound effect is output when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at a specific timing. Since a specific sound effect is also output, it is possible to expect that the mode will change to the second mode by outputting the specific sound effect.

The gaming machine of Form 41-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 41-1 or 41-2,
The second aspect includes multiple types of aspects (red and golden aspects),
When changing the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red, gold aspect), , a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output when changing to any type of the second mode (red mode, golden mode).
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at a specific timing, a specific sound effect is output when changing to any type of second mode. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which type of second mode changes by outputting the specific sound effect.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to change and display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red aspect). can be,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled from the first aspect (white aspect) to a more advantageous state than the second aspect (red aspect). It is possible to change and display the third aspect (golden aspect) with high expectations,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed. ) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red aspect) or the third aspect (golden aspect), the first aspect (white aspect) The display is changed from a common display mode (a mode that appears to glow) to a common display mode (a mode that appears to glow) and then to the second mode (a red mode) or the third mode (a golden mode). It is said that
According to this feature, even when changing the title display corresponding to a specific reach from the first mode to the second mode in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is changed from the first mode to the third mode. When changing from the common display mode to the second mode or the third mode, the common display mode is changed to the second mode or the third mode. Alternatively, until the change to the third mode, the user can expect the change to the third mode, which is more expected than the second mode, until the end.

The gaming machine of Form 42-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 42-1,
The common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title display (title characters) shine, and when the light is clear, the characters change to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode). It is characterized by change.
According to this feature, by lighting the characters forming the title display, it is possible to encourage a change to the second mode or the third mode.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. , a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2) to the production control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When the fourth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-3) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base weak reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
A brightness data table (weak reach type) for the title display part that is common to the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) controlling the light emitting means using a common title);
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction). It is said that
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part common for two different reaches, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part can be set to the same brightness data table corresponding to each title display part. By using the data table, it is possible to suitably lengthen the period until it is announced whether or not the situation will be advantageous, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. , a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state; a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-6) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state; and a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state. a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10), and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12), which is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2) to the production control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When the fourth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-3) to the production control means,
When the fifth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fifth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-2 to PB1-4) to the production control means;
When the sixth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-4 to PA2-6) to the production control means;
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, transmitting a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) to the production control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, transmitting an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
The first reach (low base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part until the
The fourth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and whether the fourth reach is controlled to the advantageous state. It is composed of an introductory part until the propriety of the judgment is announced, and
The third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) are the same as the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the second reach The expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
The luminance data table (weak control the light emitting means using the reach system common title),
A second title display part that is common to the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) Control the light emitting means using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introduction part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the third reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means (C introduction).
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part the same for Reach 2 with high expectations and Reach 2 with low expectations, increases in cost and capacity can be prevented, and By using the corresponding brightness data tables, it is possible to suitably lengthen the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state exists, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed. .

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. , a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state; a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-6) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state; and a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state. a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10), and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12), which is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state. A plurality of patterns including a ninth variation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a tenth variation pattern (PA2-13 to PA2-15) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2) to the production control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When the fourth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-3) to the production control means,
When the fifth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fifth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-2 to PB1-4) to the production control means;
When the sixth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-4 to PA2-6) to the production control means;
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, transmitting a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) to the production control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, transmitting an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) to the production control means;
When the ninth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a ninth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-11 to PB1-13) to the production control means,
When the tenth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a tenth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
When the ninth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the tenth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part until the
The fourth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and whether the fourth reach is controlled to the advantageous state. It is composed of an introductory part until the propriety of the judgment is announced, and
The fifth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part up to, and
The third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) are the same as the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the second reach The expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) includes the first reach (low base weak reach effect A effect), the second reach (low base weak reach effect B effect), and the third reach (low base strong reach effect A effect). ), the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than either of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
The luminance data table (weak control the light emitting means using the reach system common title),
A second title display part that is common to the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) Control the light emitting means using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for
In the title display part in the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the third title display part (strongest reach system strongest reach title) for the fifth reach. ,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introduction part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the third reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C) to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the fifth reach (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction). .
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part common for Reach 2, which has a high expectation level, and Reach 2, which has a low expectation level, the increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and the introduction part The brightness data table corresponding to By providing dedicated brightness data tables for the title display part and the introduction part, the interest can be increased, and as a result, suitable title display can be performed.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to change and display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from a first aspect (white) to a second aspect (red or gold),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A and B effects), if the title display (title characters) is not changed to the second mode (red or gold), the first brightness data table (common title for weak reach systems) (white)) to control the light emitting means,
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A and B effects), when changing the title display (title characters) to the second mode (red or gold), the second brightness data table (common title for weak reach systems) (red) or weak reach common title (gold)) to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), regardless of whether the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach changes to the second mode (red or gold), the same The light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, whether the title display is not changed to the second mode or changed to the second mode in the title display part of a specific reach, the brightness data table corresponding to each introduction part can be made common. By using brightness data tables corresponding to each title display part to prevent an increase in cost and capacity, it is possible to prevent the title display from changing to the second mode and when changing it to the second mode. Each can be suitably rendered, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) is as follows:
A first part (title start period) from when the title display corresponding to the specific reach starts to be displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position;
A second part (title display period, title end period) after the title display corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed at the fixed position,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the first part (title start period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the luminance data table for the first part (weak reach title start) is used to emit light. control the means;
In the second part (title display period, title end period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the brightness data table for the second part (weak reach type title display) is set. controlling the light emitting means using
In the introduction part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponds to the first part from when the title display starts displaying until it is displayed at the fixed position in a specific reach, and the second part after the title display is displayed at the fixed position. By using the luminance data table corresponding to the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part and the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part, the period for displaying the title and the period until notifying whether or not an advantageous state is reached can be optimized. As a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Example]
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

[Basic explanation]
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

[Configuration, etc. of Pachinko gaming machine 1]
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable piece becomes the winning ball. It approaches the device 6A and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting prize opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), a predetermined ball rest is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray), apart from the upper tray, from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the batting rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17, for example.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 may be used as long as it can display setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol. It should be noted that the "loss" in this pachinko game machine 1 includes the "loss with time saving" which is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be executed repeatedly until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time saving state is also called a low certainty/high base state, the variable probability state is also called a high certainty/high base state, the normal state is also called a low certainty/low base state, etc. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be performed to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.

[Progress of production, etc.]
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as a performance using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any performance device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching a reach mode with a non-probability variable pattern, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). '') may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Substrate configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. It's good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The performance random number may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

[Main operations of main board 11]
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is good if it is possible to restart the fluctuation of the symbols.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so as to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in an on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

The CPU 103, which has executed such game control main processing, receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random numbers. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority play). Furthermore, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball hitting rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball launch rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball launch rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the variable special figure has a setting value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 8, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reach and super reach may differ depending on the setting value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

[Main operations of the production control board 12]
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the origin position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the production control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

[Variation of basic explanation]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. Alternatively, the process may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May be included. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 131SG]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the feature section 131SG will be explained. In addition, in the explanation of each step of the flowchart in the characteristic section 131SG, for example, the part written as "Step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "131SGS1", and "Normal reach" is replaced by "N reach" and "Super reach". It is sometimes abbreviated as "SP reach". Furthermore, in the feature section 131SG, "variation" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, configurations that are similar to those of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic explanation or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc. but have similar functions will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted. In addition, in the following, the front side of Fig. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the pachinko game machine 1 when viewed from the front side. The explanation will be based on the direction. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1.

Unlike the explanation of FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) that have different ratios of displaying jackpot display results. This game machine will be described as a gaming machine in which the variable display result is not ``time saving, winning or losing'' and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/319.

In addition, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, variable display is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 900 times) in a low certainty state. If the next jackpot does not occur, the game may be controlled to a time saving state B (also referred to as a relief time saving state or relief time saving state) among a plurality of types of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided to help players who have not won a jackpot despite playing games for a long period of time (for example, to reduce investment in games). , is a gaming state also called "play time" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled to be the jackpot A of the plurality of types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are performed in the time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) among the plurality of time-saving states. Therefore, the number of variable display times from the end of the time saving state A to the arrival of the relief time saving is 790 times, but if the jackpot game state is controlled to be either jackpot B or jackpot C among multiple types of jackpots. Since the variable display is performed 110 times in the variable probability state (high probability/high base state), the number of variable displays remaining from the end of the variable probability state to the arrival of the relief time reduction is 900 times. Further, in this embodiment, the number of variable display times in the time saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the rescue time saving number counter becoming "0" is 1100 times.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-1, at the lower left of the image display device 5, it is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the first special symbol pending memory for which a starting prize has been won but the variable display has not been executed yet. A first special figure pending storage display area 130SG005D is provided, and in the lower right corner of the image display device 5, a pending display corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in which a starting prize has been won but the variable display has not been executed yet is displayed. A displayable second special figure pending storage display area 130SG005U is provided. At the lower center of the image display device 5, an active display area 130SG005F is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

In addition, on the right side of the image display device 5, there is a fourth symbol 131SG005J for informing the player that the variable display is being executed, and the same as the variable display of the decorative symbol in the center of the image display device 5. It is possible to display a small pattern 131SG005M in which a variable display is executed, and in the upper right corner of the image display device 5, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays until the time saving state B (relief time saving state) is controlled, which will be described later. It is possible to display a remaining number of rescue time reduction attainment display 131SG005Z indicating the remaining number of rescue time reduction attainment.

Furthermore, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed in a left game area 2L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed with a left side where game balls can flow down. It is formed in the right game area 2R that can be flowed down. The game ball weakly launched by the firing device flows down the first path as the left game area 2L, and the game ball strongly launched by the firing device flows down the second path as the right game area 2R.

Further, at the lower left of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory display area 131SG005D that indicates the number of reserved special symbols by the number of reserved displays is displayed, and at the lower right of the image display device 5, a second reserved special symbol is displayed. A second pending storage display area 131SG005U is provided in which the number of stored items is indicated by the number of pending displays. Furthermore, an active display area 131SG005F is provided at the lower center of the image display device 5, in which a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed as an active display.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed with a first big winning hole and a second big winning hole along the downward direction of the game balls. The first big prize opening is opened and closed by driving the solenoid 131SG082A (see Figure 11-2) to open and close the big winning opening door (not shown), which allows the game ball to enter the open state and the game ball to enter the closed state where the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to change the state. The second grand prize opening is opened and closed by driving the solenoid 131SG082B (see Figure 11-2) to open and close the grand prize opening door (not shown). It is possible to change the state.

Furthermore, a first count switch 131SG023A that can detect game balls is provided in the first grand prize opening, and a second count switch 131SG023B that can detect game balls is provided in the second grand prize opening. There is.

In other words, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 2L (first route) can win in the general winning opening 10 and the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and can win in the right gaming area 2R (first route). 2 paths), the game balls flowing down the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, the first big winning hole or the second big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, It is possible to win a prize, and it is also possible to pass through the passage gate 41.

The switch circuit 110 in this embodiment is connected to a first count switch 131SG023A, a second count switch 131SG023B, and a jackpot start switch 131SG024 built in the jackpot start gate 131SG042.

A plurality of obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 2L cannot win the second starting prize opening or the big winning opening, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area 2R cannot win the first starting prize opening. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area), there is a first Special symbol display device 131SG004A, second special symbol display device 131SG004B capable of variable display of the second special symbol, first reservation display device 131SG025A capable of displaying the first reservation memory number, capable of displaying the second reservation memory number 2nd pending display 131SG025B, normal symbol display 131SG020 that can perform variable display of normal symbols, normal pattern pending display 131SG025C that can display the number of normal patterns stored, number of rounds of the jackpot game during the jackpot game (jackpot Round indicator 131SG131 capable of displaying the game type), jackpot game state, high-accuracy/high-base state (variable probability state), low-accuracy/high-base state (time-saving state), etc. A game in which game balls are launched toward the right gaming area 2R. right-handed lamp 131SG132 that lights up in the high-accuracy/high-base state (variable-probability state), variable-probability lamp 131SG133 that lights up in the high-accuracy/high-base state (variable-probability state), and low-accuracy/high-base state (variable-probability state) and low-accuracy/high-base state (time-saving state) A game information display section is provided in which lighted time-saving lamps 131SG134 are collectively arranged. In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display result becomes a jackpot, the right-handed lamp 131SG132 lights up exceptionally from the timing when the variable display stops.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 transmits gaming information (signals) to external devices such as a management computer of the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed via a terminal board (not shown). It is equipped with an information output circuit for output.

In this embodiment, the second big winning hole is provided with a V winning hole and an outlet located on the downstream side of the V winning hole. Further, a variable V winning ball device (V lid) is provided on the upstream side of the V winning opening. The variable V winning ball device changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, the game ball flowing down inside the second big winning hole can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the open state, and can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the closed state. It is assumed that the water cannot pass through the water and flows down to the outlet.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 includes a V switch 131SG023B1 that can detect, via the switch circuit 110, that a game ball has passed through the V winning hole provided downstream of the second big winning hole. and an ejection switch 131SG023B2 that can detect that the game ball has passed through the ejection port.

Further, a vibration motor 61 built in the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32 are connected to the effect control board 12. In addition, the lamp control board 14 includes a right-handed LED 131SG031 for encouraging a right-handed operation, a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that lights up while the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that is lit while the second special symbol is being variably displayed. the second special figure LED 131SG033, the first reservation LED 131SG034A that lights up when the first reservation memory number is 1 to 2, and the first reservation LED 131SG034B that lights up when the first reservation memory number is 3 to 4. , a second hold LED 131SG035A that lights up when the second hold memory number is 1 to 2, a second hold LED 131SG035B that lights up when the second hold memory number is 3 to 4, and are built in the push button 31B. The button LED 62, the movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

FIG. 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR2 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern, a random number MR4 for determining a fluctuation pattern, a random number MR5 for determining a normal figure display result, and a random number MR6 for determining an initial value of MR5 is controlled to be countable. . Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR6 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these The range of the random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be varied depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variable display of each symbol in the variable display of special symbols, normal symbols, etc. A variation pattern determination table and the like that store a plurality of types of variation patterns serving as modes are stored.

FIG. 11-3(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result and a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table that will be used.

In the special figure display result determination table in this embodiment, the special figure display results are displayed depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). ” is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/319.68 in this example), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/319.68 in this example). /80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, in addition to the display result determination table for the first special symbol and the display result determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 7, the jackpot type determination table (C1) shown in FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), the fluctuation pattern type determination table, the fluctuation pattern determination table, and the regular pattern display result determination table (not shown) ), a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball launch rate) does not change depending on the setting value, but the probability of winning the jackpot (ball launch rate) varies depending on the setting value. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the values change.

[Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 11-3 (C1) and FIG. 11-3 (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, in Figure 11-3 (C1), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when Further, in FIG. 11-3 (C1), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referenced to determine the

Here, the jackpot type in this example will be explained using FIG. 11-3(D). In this embodiment, as jackpot types, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided, in which time saving control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, these jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C can be achieved by entering the V winning hole after the game ball enters the second big winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and the maximum after the end of the jackpot game. This is also a jackpot in which variable probability control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this embodiment, the open states of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) include a short open state in which the open state is short (for example, 0.1 seconds) and a long open state in which the open state is long. (for example, 15 seconds). Jackpot A is when the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and jackpot B and jackpot C are when the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state. shall be.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" changes the second big prize opening to an open state that is advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first big prize opening to an advantageous state for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot A", since the variable V winning ball device is in a short-circuit open state in the first round, it is extremely difficult to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can't expect it, it's essentially a regular jackpot.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot B" changes the second jackpot in the first round to an open state that is advantageous for the player, and the first jackpot in the second to sixth rounds that is advantageous to the player. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot B", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so it is extremely easy to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability change control is executed. Since you can expect it, it will be a real surefire jackpot.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot C" changes the second big prize opening to an open state that is advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first big prize opening to an advantageous state for the player in the second to 10th rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot C", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so it is extremely easy to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can expect it, it will be a real surefire jackpot.

In addition, in this example, a form in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of jackpot types is two or less, or four. More than one type may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 are assigned to jackpot A. 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot B. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state at a rate of 50%, so that the jackpot is achieved. After the game ends, both probability change control and time saving control are carried out. Furthermore, if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state with a probability of 100%, and the probability change control will be performed after the jackpot game ends. and time-saving control are both implemented.

In this example, even if the jackpot A is achieved, it is possible to win a V prize when the V lid is short-circuited, but it is extremely rare. , V will not be won and probability variable control will not be executed. In addition, even in the case of jackpot B and jackpot C, it is possible but extremely rare that you will not be able to win a prize when the V lid is in a long open state, so it will be jackpot B and jackpot C. In this case, the description will be made on the assumption that V is won and probability variable control is executed.

In addition, in this example, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is determined by the special figure display result determination. It may also be determined using MR1, which is a random value for.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, a form having jackpots B and C in which probability change control and time saving control can be executed 110 times after the end of the jackpot game state is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and for example, a jackpot D etc. may be provided in which the time saving control is performed 1009 times (variable probability state: 110 times + time saving state A: 899 times) after the end of the jackpot gaming state. By doing this, it is highly likely that there will be a jackpot next time, so the interest will be increased, and even if the probability variable control ends without a jackpot occurring in the probability variable state 110 times after the end of jackpot D, the time saving state A (low probability After performing 899 variable displays without a jackpot in the /high base state), by performing only one variable display in the normal state, the system is further controlled to the time-saving state B (relief time-saving state), which will be described later. Therefore, interest will increase.

[Number of time savings]
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this example, when jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the variable probability area, (1) time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) low Time saving state A where the probability control is performed 110 times (in this embodiment, the time saving state is controlled to BATTLE RUSH where the number of time savings is 110 times. Also, either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game is in the probability variable area. When a ball wins, (1) the time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the variable probability state where the variable probability control is performed 110 times (in this example, the time saving control is performed 110 times). RUSH)).In addition, when variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled by jackpot in a low accuracy state, (1) time saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low accuracy It is controlled to the time saving state B in which the control is performed 1100 times (in this example, the play time is 1100 times shortened).However, after the end of the time saving state B, the control is performed again in the 900 time saving state without being controlled to hit the jackpot in the low probability state. Even if the number of changes is made, the time saving state B will not be controlled again based on this change.

Note that the relief time reduction attainment rate is the rate at which the time reduction state is controlled via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by variable displaying n times (900 times in this embodiment) without being controlled by the jackpot gaming state, the relief time saving attainment rate K is It can be calculated as follows.

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K=Relief time saving arrival rate, ML=Jackpot probability, n=Number of variable displays)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is about 1/319, the relief time saving attainment rate K is 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that allows setting of a setting value, if the setting value with a lower jackpot probability is set, the higher the relief time shortening attainment rate becomes, the player can be rescued even with a setting value with a low jackpot probability. can do.

[Variation pattern]
FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation patterns in this embodiment. The variation patterns of this embodiment are roughly divided into a loss variation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss, and a jackpot variation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-5, the out-of-reach fluctuation patterns can be roughly divided into non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns whose fluctuation pattern type is non-reach), and normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns in which no reach effect is executed and the result is a loss. Variation pattern of normal reach where reach effect is executed and misses (variation pattern where variation pattern type is normal reach), reach effect of low base weak super reach A or reach of low base weak super reach B in normal state (low base state) Variation pattern of low base weak super reach where the performance is executed and misses (fluctuation pattern type is low base weak super reach variation pattern), final low base strong super reach A reach in normal state (low base state) A variation pattern of low base strong super reach A that results in a miss after the performance is executed (a variation pattern where the variation pattern type is low base strong super reach A), and finally a low base strong super reach B in the normal state (low base state) The variation pattern of low base strong super reach B that is executed and misses (the variation pattern of variation pattern type is low base strong super reach B), in the normal state (low base state), the low base strong super reach Variation pattern of low base strong super reach C that results in reach effect of reach C being executed (fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C variation pattern), finally low base in normal state (low base state) The variation pattern of the strongest super reach on a low base that is executed and misses when the reach effect of the strongest super reach is executed (the variation pattern of the strongest super reach on a low base), the final result in time saving state A or definite variable state (high base state) Variation pattern of high base super reach A that results in a miss when the reach effect of high base super reach A is executed (fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A variation pattern), time saving state A or definite variable state (high base state) , the fluctuation pattern of high base super reach B is finally executed and the reach effect of high base super reach B is missed (the fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of high base super reach B), the time saving state A or the variable probability state (high base super reach B). Variation pattern of high base super reach C that ultimately results in the execution of reach effect of high base super reach C (base state) (variation pattern of high base super reach C as variation pattern type), time saving state A or definite variation In the state (high base state), a fluctuation pattern of high base super reach D (fluctuation pattern of high base super reach D whose fluctuation pattern type is a fluctuation pattern) is provided in which the reach effect of high base super reach D is finally executed and misses. ing.

As a variation pattern where the variation pattern type is non-reach, the special figure variation time is 12000ms, and when the number of pending memories of the target special figure of variable display in the normal state is 2 or less, no reach effect is executed. PA1-1, special figure fluctuation time is 5000 ms, and when the number of pending memories of the target special figure of variable display in the normal state is 3, no reach effect is executed PA1-2, special figure fluctuation time PA1-3 is 2000 ms and no reach effect is executed during time saving control (time saving state A or probability variable state), and special symbol variation time is 500 ms and any reach effect is not executed during time saving control (time saving state B). There are four types of variation patterns PA1-4 in which no performance is executed.

As a variation pattern whose variation pattern type is normal reach, there is one type of variation pattern PA2-1 in which the special symbol variation time is 20000 ms and the reach effect of normal reach is executed and the player loses.

The variation pattern of the low base weak super reach variation pattern is PA2-2, where the special figure variation time is 43000ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, and the special figure variation time is Two types of variation patterns are provided, PA2-3, which is 53000ms and results in a low base weak super reach B reach effect being executed and a miss.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach A, the special symbol variation time is 63000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed. PA2-4, which is executed and misses, the special symbol fluctuation time is 73000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed and it becomes a miss. PA2-5, the special symbol fluctuation time is 40000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, and it misses. There are three types of variation patterns PA2-6.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach B, the special symbol variation time is 78000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed. PA2-7 is executed and misses, the special figure fluctuation time is 83000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed and it becomes a miss. PA2-8, the special figure fluctuation time is 45000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B and misses. Three types of variation patterns are provided, PA2-9.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach C, the special symbol variation time is 88000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed. PA2-10, which is executed and misses, the special symbol fluctuation time is 93000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed and it becomes a miss. PA2-11, the special symbol fluctuation time is 50000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B and it misses. There are three types of variation patterns PA2-12.

The variation pattern of the variation pattern type of low base strongest super reach is that the special symbol variation time is 98000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed. PA2-13 is a miss, and PA2-14 is a miss because the special symbol fluctuation time is 103000ms, and after the low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, the low base strongest super reach reach effect is executed. , the special figure variation time is 60000ms, and the reach effect of the strongest low base super reach is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a miss PA2- 15 three types of variation patterns are provided.

As a variation pattern with a variation pattern type of high base super reach A, there is one variation pattern of PA2-16 where the special symbol variation time is 30000 ms and the reach effect of high base super reach A is executed and misses. It is provided. As a variation pattern with a variation pattern type of high base super reach B, there is one variation pattern of PA2-17 where the special symbol variation time is 30000 ms and the reach effect of high base super reach B is executed and misses. It is provided. As a variation pattern with a variation pattern type of high base super reach C, there is one variation pattern of PA2-18 where the special symbol variation time is 30000 ms and the reach effect of high base super reach C is executed and misses. It is provided. As a variation pattern with a variation pattern type of high base super reach D, there is one variation pattern of PA2-19 where the special symbol variation time is 30000 ms and the reach effect of high base super reach D is executed and misses. It is provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-6, the jackpot variation patterns include non-reach, normal reach, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, as well as the loss variation pattern. Variation patterns of the following variation pattern types are provided: low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 11-6, as a variation pattern whose variation pattern type is non-reach, the special symbol variation time is 500ms + 15000ms, and during time-saving control (time-saving state B), any reach One type of variation pattern, PB1-18, in which no performance is performed is provided.

As a variation pattern whose variation pattern type is normal reach, there is one type of variation pattern of PB1-1 in which the special symbol variation time is 20000ms+15000ms and a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a jackpot is achieved.

The variation pattern for the low base strong super reach A variation pattern type is that the special symbol variation time is 63000ms+15000ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strong super reach A reach effect is executed. PB1-2, which is executed and becomes a jackpot, the special symbol fluctuation time is 73000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed and becomes a jackpot. PB1-3, the special symbol fluctuation time is 40000ms + 15000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a jackpot. Three types of fluctuation patterns of PB-4 are provided.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach B, the special symbol variation time is 78000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed. PB1-5 is executed and becomes a jackpot, the special symbol fluctuation time is 83000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed and becomes a jackpot. PB1-6, the special symbol fluctuation time is 45000ms + 15000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a jackpot. There are three types of variation patterns PB1-7.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach C, the special symbol variation time is 88000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed. PB1-8 is executed and becomes a jackpot, the special symbol variation time is 93000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed and becomes a jackpot. PB1-9, the special symbol fluctuation time is 50000ms + 15000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a jackpot. There are three types of variation patterns PB1-10.

The variation pattern of the variation pattern type of low base strongest super reach is that the special symbol variation time is 98000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed. PB1-11 which becomes a jackpot when the special symbol fluctuation time is 103000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed and becomes a jackpot PB1-12 , PB1- where the special symbol variation time is 60000ms + 15000ms and the reach effect of the strongest low base super reach is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a jackpot. There are 13 types of variation patterns.

The variation pattern of the variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach A, the special symbol variation time is 30000ms + 15000ms, and there is one type of variation pattern of PB1-14 in which the reach effect of High Base Super Reach A is executed and a jackpot is achieved. It is provided. The fluctuation pattern type of high base super reach B is one type of fluctuation pattern of PB1-15 where the special symbol fluctuation time is 30000ms + 15000ms and the reach effect of high base super reach B is executed and a jackpot is achieved. It is provided. The fluctuation pattern type of high base super reach C is one type of fluctuation pattern of PB1-16 where the special symbol fluctuation time is 30000ms + 15000ms and the reach effect of high base super reach C is executed and a jackpot is achieved. It is provided. As a variation pattern of the variation pattern type High Base Super Reach D, there is one variation pattern of PB1-17 where the special symbol variation time is 30000ms + 15000ms and the reach effect of High Base Super Reach D is executed and a jackpot is achieved. It is provided.

[Fluctuation pattern type determination table/Fluctuation pattern determination table]
The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include a plurality of variable pattern type determination tables for determining variable pattern types according to gaming conditions and variable display results, and variable patterns determined by the variable pattern type determination tables, gaming conditions, and variable display results. Also included are a plurality of variation pattern type determination tables for determining variation patterns according to the display result and the number of pending memories of special symbols to be variable displayed (number of pending memories for variable display).

In the variation pattern setting process in this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table is selected according to the gaming state and variable display results. Next, the selected variation pattern type determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read out in step 131SGS55 of the special symbol normal processing, and the variation pattern type is determined.

For example, if the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display result is a loss, select the loss variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing with the value of numerical value MR3. If the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the variation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach". If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base weak super reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the variation pattern type is determined. If the type is determined as "low base strong super reach A" and the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strong super reach B", and the value of random number MR3 is determined as "low base strong super reach B". is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strong super reach C", and when the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 4095, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strongest super reach" decided on.

In addition, if the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state and the variable display result is a loss, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) and determine the fluctuation pattern for the loss. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing table B with the value of the random number MR3. If the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the variation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach". If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the variation pattern type is determined as "High Base Super Reach A", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the variation pattern is determined. If the type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach B" and the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the variation pattern type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach C" and the value of the random number MR3 is 4095. If it is within the range, the variation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state B and the variable display result is a loss, select the loss variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7(C), and select the loss variation pattern determination table C. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the values of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach".

In addition, if the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display result is a jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing with the value of numerical value MR3. If the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 1298, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Normal Reach", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 1299 to 1934, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Low Base Strong Super". If the random number MR3 value is in the range of 1935 to 2676, the variation pattern type is determined to "Low Base Strong Super Reach B" and the random number MR3 value is in the range of 2677 to 3706. If so, the variation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the random value MR3 is in the range of 3707 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

In addition, if the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state and the variable display result is a loss, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7 (E) and determine the corresponding jackpot variation pattern. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing table B with the value of the random number MR3. If the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 25, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Normal Reach", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 26 to 975, the variation pattern type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach". A", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the variation pattern type is determined to "High Base Super Reach B", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380 The variation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and when the random value MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state B and the variable display result is a loss, select the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), and The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the values of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach".

After determining the variable pattern type as described above, depending on the gaming state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols to perform variable display (number of reserved variables subject to variable display), Select one of the fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in , and compare the selected fluctuation pattern determination table with the random number MR3 read out in step 131SGS55 of the special symbol normal processing to determine the fluctuation pattern type.

For example, if the variable display result is a loss, the gaming state is normal, and the number of variable display target pending memories is 0 to 2, select the loss variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-8 (A). , the deviation pattern determination table A is compared with the random value MR4 to determine a variation pattern. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-1. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1. If the determined variation pattern type is low base weak super reach, if the random number MR4 value is within the range of 0 to 199, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-2, and the random number MR4 value is 200 to 255. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-3.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-8, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-11, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined variation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the random number MR4 value is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-13, and the random number MR4 value is 89 to 173. If the random number value MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

In addition, if the variable display result is a loss, the gaming state is normal, and the number of variable display target pending memories is 3, select the loss variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-8(B) and select the corresponding A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-2. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4. If the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-8, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-11, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined variation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the random number MR4 value is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-13, and the random number MR4 value is 89 to 173. If the random number value MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

In addition, if the variable display result is a loss and the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state, select the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), and select the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C. A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing C and the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-3. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach A, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-16. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach B, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-17. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach C, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-18. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach D, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-19.

In addition, if the variable display result is a loss and the gaming state is the time saving state B, select the loss variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of numerical value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-4.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is the normal state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 11-10 (A), and select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the random value The fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to PB1-2, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-2. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-3, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-4. When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to PB1-5, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-5. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-6, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-7.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-8, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-8. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-9, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-10. If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strongest Super Reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to PB1-11, and the value of random number MR4 is 82 to 166. If the random number value MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-13.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-10(B), and select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing B with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach A, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-14. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach B, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-15. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach C, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-16. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach D, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-17.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is time saving state B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of numerical value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-18.

[Expectations for super reach performance]
When the variation pattern type and variation pattern are determined as described above, the jackpot expectation level is as shown in FIGS. 11-11(A) to (C). The expected jackpot of a super reach performance is the percentage of jackpots when the corresponding super reach performance is executed, and the probability of a jackpot when the corresponding super reach performance is executed is the probability of a jackpot when the corresponding super reach performance is executed. It is a value calculated by dividing by the sum of the percentage of winnings by executing the corresponding super reach effect and the percentage of losing by executing the corresponding super reach effect.

As shown in Figure 11-11(A), among the reach performances of super reach performed when the gaming state is normal, the reach performances of low base weak super reach A and low base weak super reach B are Since there is no direct jackpot, the expected jackpot is 0% for each, but from the reach effects of low base weak super reach A and low base weak super reach B, other super reaches (low base strong super reach A ~ C, low base weak super reach) may develop into a reach effect, and the expected degree of development from low base weak super reach A to other super reach reach effects is approximately 44%, and from low base weak super reach B to other super reach effects. The level of expectation for the development of Super Reach's Reach production is approximately 68%. The expected level of development of a super reach performance is the rate at which it will develop into other super reach performances when the corresponding super reach performance is executed. The rate of development is determined by the sum of the ratio of executing the relevant super reach performance and developing into another super reach performance, and the ratio of executing the relevant super reach performance and failing without developing into another super reach performance. This is the value calculated by dividing.

Also, among the super reach effects that are executed when the gaming state is normal, the jackpot expectation for the low base strong super reach A reach effect is about 20%, and the jackpot expectation for the low base strong super reach B reach effect is about 20%. The jackpot expectation level is about 25%, the jackpot expectation level for the low base strong super reach C reach effect is about 35%, and the jackpot expectation level for the low base strong super reach reach effect is about 55%. Furthermore, the jackpot expectation of the reach performance of Low Base Strong Super Reach A to C and Low Base Strongest Super Reach is as follows: when developing from Low Base Weak Super Reach A, when developing from Low Base Weak Super Reach B, and when developing from Low Base Weak Super Reach B. The expected jackpot is different when executed directly without going through Weak Super Reach A and B, and the expected jackpot for the reach performance of Low Base Strong Super Reach A, which evolved from Low Base Weak Super Reach A, is approximately 19. %, the expected jackpot of the reach effect of low base strong super reach A that evolved from low base weak super reach B is about 20%, the jackpot of the reach effect of low base strong super reach A that was executed directly without going through B The expectation level is about 21%, and the jackpot expectation of the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, which evolved from low base weak super reach A, is about 24%, and the low base strong super reach B, which developed from low base weak super reach B. The expected jackpot for the reach effect of is about 25%, and the expected jackpot for the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, which was executed directly without going through B, was about 27%, which evolved from low base weak super reach A. The jackpot expectation of the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is about 33%, and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, which evolved from low base weak super reach B, is about 35%. The expected jackpot for the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, which was executed directly without any hit, is about 37%, and the jackpot expectation for the reach performance of low base strong super reach, which evolved from low base weak super reach A, is about 53%. The expected jackpot of the low base strongest super reach reach effect developed from low base weak super reach B is approximately 55%, and the jackpot expectation level of the low base strongest super reach reach effect executed directly without going through B is approximately This will be 57%.

As shown in Figure 11-11(B), the jackpot expectation of the reach performance of high base super reach A executed when the gaming state is time saving state A is about 14%, and the reach performance of high base super reach B The jackpot expectation level of the reach performance of the high base super reach C is about 27%, and the jackpot expectation level of the reach performance of the high base super reach D is about 70%.

As shown in Figure 11-11(C), the jackpot expectation of the reach effect of high base super reach A executed when the gaming state is variable probability state is about 40%, and the reach effect of high base super reach B is about 40%. The jackpot expectation level is about 45%, the jackpot expectation level for the reach performance of the high base super reach C is about 60%, and the jackpot expectation level for the reach performance for the high base super reach D is about 90%.

As will be described later, in the super reach performance, it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display that suggests the jackpot expectation level of the corresponding super reach performance by the number of stars. As shown in Figure 11-11(A), among the super reaches performed when the gaming state is normal, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed for the low base weak super reach A and B reach effects, and the 3 stars for the expectation level suggestion display in the reach performance of strong base super reach A, 3.5 stars for the expectation level suggestion display for the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, and expectations for the reach performance of low base strong super reach C 4 stars are displayed in the degree suggestion display, and 4.5 stars are displayed in the expectation degree suggestion display in the reach performance of the strongest low base super reach. As shown in Figures 11-11 (B) and (C), 3 stars are displayed in the expectation level suggestion display in the reach performance of high base super reach A that is executed when the gaming state is time saving state A and variable probability state. 3.5 stars are displayed in the expectation level suggestion display for the reach performance of high base super reach B, and 4 stars are displayed in the expectation level suggestion display for the reach performance of high base super reach C. 4.5 stars are displayed in the expectation level suggestion display for D's reach performance.

The same number of stars will be displayed in the expectation level suggestion display for the super reach reach performance that is performed when the gaming state is normal and the super reach reach performance that is performed when the gaming state is variable. However, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), even if the number of stars displayed in the expectation level suggestion display is the same, the suggested jackpot expectation level is not the same. If the number of stars displayed in the degree suggestion display is the same, the super reach performance that is performed when the gaming state is in a variable state is greater than the super reach performance that is performed when the gaming state is in the normal state. It is suggested that the reach performance of the reach has a higher jackpot expectation.

In addition, whether it is a super reach effect that is executed when the gaming state is normal or a super reach effect that is executed when the gaming state is variable, the expectation level suggestion is displayed. Each time the number of stars displayed increases by 0.5, the implied jackpot expectation increases, but as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the super Also in the reach effect expectation level suggestion display, the more the number of stars increases, the greater the amount of increase in the suggested jackpot expectation level. Also, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), when the number of stars displayed in the expectation level suggestion display increases from 3 to 3.5, the amount of increase in the jackpot expectation level is It is the same whether it is a super reach effect that is executed when the gaming state is normal or a super reach effect that is executed when the gaming state is variable, but the expectation level The amount of increase in the jackpot expectation when the number of stars displayed in the suggestion display increases from 3.5 to 4 and from 4 to 4.5 is when the gaming state is normal. The reach effect of the super reach executed when the gaming state is in a variable probability state is larger than the reach effect of the super reach.

[Production control command]
FIG. 11-13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIGS. 11-13(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-13(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and any value may be set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (B), determines whether the variable display result is a "miss" or "jackpot" (predetermined result), or the variable display result. ``In the event of a jackpot, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation designation command that specifies the stop (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative symbols in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. be.

Command 9000H is an initialization designation (power-on designation) command for displaying an initial screen when the power is turned on in the image display device 5. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery designation command for displaying a power outage recovery screen on the image display device 5 indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered from a power outage (power outage) state.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a gaming state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , time saving state).

Command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command that designates display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In the jackpot start specification command and the jackpot end specification command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command that the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state (for example, "1" to "10").

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the first pending memory display area 132SG005D or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the second pending memory display area 132SG005U or the like. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that designates the winning determination result at the time of starting winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning determination result at the time of starting winning.

The command D100H is a jackpot start switch passage notification command that notifies that the game ball has passed the jackpot start switch 131SG024 in a state where the variable display result is a jackpot, that is, the start of the jackpot game. The command D200H is a V winning notification command that notifies that the game ball has passed the V switch 131SG023B1 in the jackpot game state, that is, the game state will be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game.

The command E1XXH is a remaining time saving number notification command that notifies the remaining number of times of time saving control in the time saving state (time saving state A) excluding the relief time saving. Command E2XXH is a remaining probability variation number notification command that notifies the remaining probability variation number of times in the probability variation state.

Command F100H is a right-handed player LED lighting notification command that notifies the right-handed player LED 131SG031 to be lit. Command F101H is a right-handed LED extinguishing notification command that notifies that the right-handed LED 131SG031 is turned off.

The command 91XXH is a command for specifying the number of rescue time reductions at the time of recovery, and is an effect control command for converting the value of the rescue time reduction counter into hexadecimal and specifying it at the time of power restoration. For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (C), the command for specifying the number of times saving time is Different EXT data is set depending on the digit (4th digit).

For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (C), commands 9100H to 910FH are commands 1 command for specifying the number of times saving time saving during recovery that specifies the first digit of the value of the number of saving time saving times. It is. Commands 9110H to 911FH are 2 commands for specifying the number of rescue time reductions during recovery, which specify the second digit of the value of the number of rescue time reductions. Commands 9130H to 913FH are three commands for specifying the number of rescue time reductions during recovery, which specify the third digit of the value of the number of rescue time reductions. Commands 9140H to 914FH are four commands for specifying the number of times the rescue time is shortened during recovery, which specifies the fourth digit of the value of the number of times the rescue time is shortened.

The command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the rescue time is shortened. In the rescue time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (D), different EXT data is set depending on the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the rescue time is shortened. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13(D), the command 9400H is a rescue time reduction number A designation command that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a relief time reduction number B designation command that specifies that there are 1 to 125 times remaining until relief time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a relief time reduction number C designation command that specifies that there are 126 times remaining until the relief time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a relief time reduction number D designation command that specifies that there are 127 or more times remaining until relief time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened. In the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time is shortened is 100, command 9601H is sent as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of variable display times is 700, the relief Command 9607H is transmitted as a time saving number 1 designation command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration display designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

[Game control data holding area]
The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 131SG150 as shown in FIG. It is being The game control data holding area 131SG150 shown in FIG. 11-14 includes a first special symbol reservation storage section 131SG151A, a second special symbol reservation storage section 131SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 131SG151C, a game control flag setting section 131SG152, It includes a game control timer setting section 131SG153, a game control counter setting section 131SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 131SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit that can store pending data (pending memory) in the second special figure pending storage section 131SG151B is always 4 regardless of the gaming state. The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 131SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit that can store pending data (pending memory) in the second special figure pending storage section 131SG151B is always 4 regardless of the gaming state. The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 131SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In other words, in this embodiment, a maximum of four reservation memories can be stored as the first special symbol reservation memory (retention memory that can be stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 131SG151A), and a maximum of four reservation memories can be stored as the second special symbol reservation memory ( A maximum of four pending memories can be stored in the second special figure pending storage section 131SG151B.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

In addition, when executing the variable display, the CPU 103 first inputs random numbers MR1 to MR4 from the second special symbol reservation storage section 131SG151B if the second special symbol reservation memory exists in the special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 6). After reading out, the storage contents of the second special figure reservation storage section 131SG151B are shifted. In other words, when the random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the second special figure reservation storage section 131SG151B, the CPU 103 stores the random numbers MR1 to MR4 stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the second special figure reservation storage section 131SG151B. At the same time as reading out the values of MR1 to random number MR4, the pending memory of the pending number 1 is erased, and the pending memory stored as the pending memory of pending number 2 is used as the pending memory of pending number 1 and the pending memory of pending number 3. The stored suspension memory is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 2, and the suspension memory stored as suspension memory of suspension number 4 is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 3.

Moreover, CPU103 determines whether the 1st special figure reservation memory exists, when the reservation memory is not memorize|stored in the 2nd special figure reservation memory|storage part 131SG151B. When the first special figure reservation memory exists, after reading the random numbers MR1 to MR4 from the first special figure reservation storage section 131SG151A, the storage contents of the first special figure reservation storage section 131SG151A are shifted. In other words, when the random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the first special figure reservation storage section 131SG151A, the CPU 103 stores the random numbers MR1 to MR4 stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the first special figure reservation storage section 131SG151A. At the same time as reading out the values of MR1 to random number MR4, the pending memory of the pending number 1 is erased, and the pending memory stored as the pending memory of pending number 2 is used as the pending memory of pending number 1 and the pending memory of pending number 3. The stored suspension memory is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 2, and the suspension memory stored as suspension memory of suspension number 4 is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result (if the variable display result is a jackpot, the random number value After executing the judgment of the jackpot type based on MR2), in the variation pattern judgment process (see Figure 6), different variation patterns are determined depending on the gaming state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol for which variable display is executed. After determining the type of variation pattern using the type determination table, the variation pattern is further determined using a different variation pattern determination table depending on the determined type of variation pattern, gaming status, number of pending memories, etc.

That is, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of pending memories obtained by subtracting 1 from the pending memory immediately before variable display.

The normal pattern holding storage section 131SG151C stores the holding information of the normal pattern game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 131SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 131SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 131SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 131SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 131SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 131SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 131SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section 131SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR6 are stored as random count values, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 131SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

[Production control data holding area]
The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 131SG190 as shown in FIG. 11-15(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. It is being The production control data holding area 131SG190 shown in FIG. 11-15(A) includes a production control flag setting section 131SG191, a production control timer setting section 131SG192, a production control counter setting section 131SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 131SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 131SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 131SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 131SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 131SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 131SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 131SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-15(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 131SG194. The start winning command buffer 131SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) is provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) is provided. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 131SG194A are an area for storing these starting opening winning designation commands and a storage area for storing the symbol designation commands. The storage area, the area for storing the variable category designation command, the area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and the area for storing the pending display flag are associated with the pending memory number, and the first special figure pending memory is created. A storage area (entry) is secured for separately storing the special figure and the second special figure reservation memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition has been met is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B in FIG. will be deleted. Then, the storage contents of storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted one by one to the storage areas higher up.

As described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the active display buffer 131SG194B stores the content of the pending memory (for which the start condition is satisfied). data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 11-15(C), a storage area similar to the starting winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is provided. In other words, there is an area for storing the starting opening winning designation command, an area for storing the symbol designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending storage number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag. , is provided.

In this embodiment, if a starting winning occurs when the variable display is not executed and there is no pending memory, a starting winning prize designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a pending memory based on the starting winning, etc. The number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B without passing through the reception command buffer 131SG194A at the time of starting winning. Incidentally, the suspension display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing a prefetch notice setting process (S161) to be described later.

The storage contents of the active display buffer 131SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

Note that the pending display flag is a flag indicating a display mode of an active display corresponding to a pending display or a variable display in progress. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to suggest the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (value of the pending display flag).

[Start winning determination process]
FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (131SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (131SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (131SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 131SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 131SGS102 (131SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 131SG155 is set to "1" (131SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 131SGS101 (131SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol reservation memories has reached the upper limit value in 131SGS102 (131SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (131SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (131SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (131SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 131SG154. When the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 131SGS105 (131SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 131SG155 is set to "2" (131SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 131SGS103 and 131SGS106, the number of special figure reservations stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (131SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (131SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 131SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 131SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the winning type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154. 131SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the free entry in the special figure reservation storage section (131SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the hit type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a “big hit” or “small hit”. is used to determine the jackpot type/small win type when the variable display result is a "big hit" or "small win". The random number value MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern and the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine a variation pattern including a variable display time of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. By executing the process of 131SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 131SGS110, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (131SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the processing of 131SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random value determination process (131SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. (131SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 131SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (131SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (Y in 131SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N at 131SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

[Random numerical value judgment process when winning a prize]
FIG. 11-17(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 131SGS 112 in FIG. 11-17 as the winning random value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (FIG. 6) is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as a "jackpot" and enter the jackpot game state. A determination is made as to whether or not to control. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 6), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value determination process of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole). Accordingly, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is determined whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined that the special figure display result will be a "jackpot", and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. will perform a pre-read notice such as a panel display performance or a pending notice performance, as will be described later. will be executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 11-17, the CPU 103 first specifies the gaming state (step 131SGS121) and selects the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3(B) (step 131SGS122). . Then, in step 131SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 extracted in step 131SGS109 with the display result determination table, and determines whether the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range.

If the random number value MR1 is outside the jackpot determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, a symbol designation command transmission setting is made in accordance with the loss (step 131SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state (step 131SGS126b). If the gaming state is the normal state, select the loss variation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7(A) and proceed to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126c).

If the gaming state is not the normal state, it is further determined whether the gaming state is the time saving state B (step 131SGS126d). If the gaming state is not the time-saving state B, that is, the gaming state is the time-saving state A or the variable probability state, select the loss variation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7(B) and proceed to step 131SGS131 ( In step 131SGS126e), if the gaming state is time saving state B, select the losing variation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7(C) and proceed to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126f).

Further, in step 131SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the jackpot (step 131SGS129). Then, it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state (step 131SGS130a). When the gaming state is the normal state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (D) is shown, and when the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the table is shown in Figure 11-7 (E). If the jackpot variation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. , step 131SGS130d, step 131SGS130e).

In step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern type determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 131SGS109, and determines the variation category from non-reach, super reach, and other (normal reach). For example, if the random number MR3 is a variation pattern type of non-reach, the variation category is determined to be non-reach, and if the random number MR3 is a variation pattern type of normal reach, the variation category is determined to be other (normal reach), and the variation category is determined to be other (normal reach). Numerical MR3 is low base weak super reach A/B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B , high base super reach C, or high base super reach D, the fluctuation category may be determined to be super reach. Then, transmission settings are made for a fluctuation category designation command (one of those shown in FIGS. 11-17(B)) according to the determination result, and the winning random value determination process is ended (step 131SGS132).

Note that the command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

[Game control main processing]
FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the processing in steps S1 to S7, the processing in steps S8 to S9, and the processing in steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, when the production control command instructing recovery from a power outage is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of variable displays until the relief time is shortened. Then, a value obtained by converting the current value of the rescue time reduction number counter into hexadecimal is set, and control is performed to send a command for specifying the number of rescue time reduction times at the time of recovery to the effect control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to set a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction number counter and send a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0014). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 125, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9401H as the relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the RAM clearing process is not executed when the gaming machine is powered on and the recovery process is executed, a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions is sent, and the remaining variable number until the current rescue time reduction is You will be notified of the number of views.

Note that although this embodiment shows a case where, at the time of restoration from a power outage, a command for specifying the number of times to shorten rescue time and a command for specifying the number of times to shorten rescue time are transmitted in addition to the command at the time of recovery, but this is limited to such an embodiment. do not have. For example, the configuration may be such that the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 is set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened and then transmitted. .

Further, when RAM clear is requested in step S3, if there is no backup data in step S4, or if there is an abnormality in the backup RAM in step S5, the area of the rescue time reduction counter is also cleared in the initialization process of step S8. Execute clear processing on the included area.

Further, when the production control command instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "900" (step 131SGS0015). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, "900" is set in the rescue time reduction counter. That is, in this embodiment, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, if a jackpot does not occur even after executing the variable display 900 times, the relief time is shortened and the game enters the time saving state B. It will be controlled. In addition, in this embodiment, since the effect control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the rescue time reduction counter, the CPU 103 performs initialization. It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the transmission of the production control command instructing.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter (in this embodiment, it is "900"), sets the current value of the rescue time reduction counter to a hexadecimal number, and performs the recovery at the time of recovery. Control is performed to transmit a time saving number designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0016).

In this way, the setting of the relief time reduction number counter is executed before the timer interrupt processing, which is the game progress process, is executed, so that the variable display does not start before the relief time reduction number counter is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably manage the number of times until relief time is shortened.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" for initial setting. However, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed when the RAM clearing process is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the previous day's relief time reduction counter, so the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced, and the configuration is such that it is not disadvantageous to the player. be able to.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, the configuration is such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when ON of the clear switch is detected (step S3; Yes) and RAM clear processing is executed. When an abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the rescue time saving counter may be initialized.

[Time saving flag, fixed variable flag]
In this embodiment, the time saving flag can be set when any of the conditions for being controlled to be in the time saving state is satisfied. The time saving flag includes a time saving flag A and a time saving flag B. Note that in the following description, erasing (or clearing) a flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The time-saving flag A is set when the time-saving state A is controlled via jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, and when the time-saving state A ends (the timing when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state A, the 110 time-saving control ends and the normal state (timing controlled by).

The time saving flag B is set when the time saving state B is controlled via the relief time saving. This time saving flag B is set when 900 variable displays are executed after the RAM is cleared and the display result does not become a jackpot symbol, or when the display result does not become a jackpot symbol after the end of the jackpot game state in a low probability state. is set when is executed, and is cleared when time saving state B ends (timing when a jackpot occurs during time saving state B, timing when 1100 time saving controls are completed and control returns to normal state, etc.) .

The variable probability flag is set when the variable probability state is controlled. In this embodiment, when a V prize is won in the first round of a jackpot game, when the jackpot game ends, a probability change flag is set as the game state is controlled to a probability change state. This probability variation flag is erased at the timing when the probability variation state ends (timing when a jackpot occurs during the probability variation state, timing when the 110th probability variation control is executed and control returns to the normal state, etc.). For example, if the determination is YES in step 131SGS69A of FIG. 11-20, which will be described later, the variable probability flag is erased based on the fact that this is the 110th time since the variable display has been controlled to the variable probability state.

[Special design normal processing]
11-19 and FIG. 11-20 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 131SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is checked. If the total number of pending memories is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second number of pending memories is 0 (step 131SGS52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set in (step 131SGS53). If the second pending memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first pending memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 131SGS54).

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps 131SGS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in priority to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Note that the mode is not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, and for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It may be configured to do so.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 131SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer. and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 131SGS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending memory number counter, and stores each storage area in the first pending memory number buffer. Shift the contents of . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending memory number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 saves the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending memories by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 131SGS57). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 131SGS61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step 131SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for winning determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value and a random number for hit determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot when they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if the probability variable state is low), the CPU 103 performs jackpot determination using the low probability jackpot determination value. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 performs jackpot determination using the high probability jackpot determination value. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any jackpot determination value, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined to be a jackpot (Step 131SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (Step 131SGS64). The type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) corresponding to the value that matches the random number value is determined as the jackpot type (step 131SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process moves to step 131SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a jackpot (step 131SGS63; No), the process moves to step 131SGS66.

In this embodiment, by performing special symbol normal processing, the rescue time saving condition (by subtracting the value of the rescue time shortening counter to control the rescue time shortening regardless of the variable display result (jackpot, miss) is set to "0". The configuration is such that it is possible for this to occur. In this embodiment, the time-saving state A is established based on the fact that the jackpot A has been reached, and the next jackpot has not occurred even after the variable display has finished a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 900 times). Although the time saving state B is controlled, it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display in which the rescue time saving condition is satisfied becomes a jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is satisfied becomes a jackpot, the control is performed to the time saving state A based on the jackpot.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of variable display during the time saving state is 0 (step 131SGS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 131SGS67), and checks whether the value of the time saving number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the variable display (step 131SGS69).

Note that in this embodiment, steps 131SGS66 to 131SGSS69 are executed to perform subtraction processing of the time saving number counter before the counting process of the number of variable display times until relief time saving is performed after step 131SGS71. It is not limited to the processing mode. For example, the process of subtracting the time saving number counter may be performed after the process of counting the number of variable displays until the time saving time reduction after step 131SGS71 is executed. In this case, for example, if the variable display is a relief time reduction, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time reduction counter to "110" (see step 131 SGS172), the value of the time reduction counter will increase by 1. Since the value is subtracted, in a variable display that shortens the rescue time, the value of the time saving counter may be incremented by 1 again after the subtraction process. Alternatively, the time reduction counter may be configured to be set to "111" which is one more than the number of time reduction counters.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 131SGS69A). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is present), the process moves to step 131SGS84. In this embodiment, when the process of step 131SGS69A is executed and the game is in a variable probability state, the processes after step 131SGS70 (particularly the process of step 131SGSS71) are not performed, so when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, Even if the variable display is executed during extreme battle rush (in this embodiment), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not decremented. If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the state is non-probability variation), the process moves to step 131SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the probability change flag is set, the process moves to step 131SGS84 without executing the processes from step 131SGSS70. If it is set, the process moves to step 131SGSS70, but the process of step 131SGSS71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated, a rescue time reduction number designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction number counter that has not been updated may be transmitted.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes), the process moves to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time saving number counter is 0 at this point, it means that the timing after the time saving state (time saving state B) has already been controlled via the rescue time saving (time saving state B) or the time saving state B This is the timing when the control is returned to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations), and the jackpot that is the trigger for setting the relief time reduction number counter to 900 has not occurred. Further, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (step 131SGS70; No), the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 131SGS71). In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the process of step 131SGS71, it does not matter whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 126 or less (step 131SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data and issues a relief time reduction number designation command. Control is performed to transmit data to the control CPU 120 (step 131SGS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9401H as a relief time reduction number designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 947EH as a relief time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS74). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 131SGS84. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that control is to be made to the time reduction state B at the end of the variation based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 131SGS75). ). Then, the process moves to step 131SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as EXT data and sends command 957FH as the rescue time reduction number designation command for effect control. Control is performed to transmit to the CPU 120 (step 131SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time is shortened in units of 100 times (in this embodiment, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). ) (step 131SGS77). Note that whether or not the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the remaining number of variable display times until relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data, and issues a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control is performed to transmit data to the control CPU 120 (step 131SGS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9601H as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608H as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process moves to step 131SGS84.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) side counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction, and sends a rescue time reduction number designation command and a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Although this example is illustrated, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control may be configured to count the number of variable display times remaining until the relief time is shortened, and execute an inciting effect or a countdown effect, which will be described later.

For example, if the relief time reduction count counter is set (set to "900") at the timing when the relief time reduction occurs, and the configuration is such that relief time reduction can occur continuously, only when the relief time reduction occurs the first time. The system is configured to send a command for specifying the number of times of saving time reduction and a command for specifying number of times of saving time reducing 2, and is configured not to send a command for specifying number of times of saving time saving and a command for specifying number of times of saving time saving 2 when saving time is shortened from the second time onwards. Also good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbols of the special symbols according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step 131SGS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make jackpot A, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2", and if it is decided to be jackpot B, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3". If it is determined to be a jackpot C, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7", and if it is determined to be a loss, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stopping symbol in the stopping symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 131SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 131SGS86).

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIG. 11-21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the symbol determination period timer is operating (step 131SGS131). If the symbol determination period timer is not operating, a stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed (step 131SGS132). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (step 131SGS133).

If the jackpot flag is set, clear the game status flags such as the time saving A flag, the time saving B flag, and the variable probability flag (step 131SGS134), clear the time saving number counter (step 131SGS135), and set the time saving flag according to the jackpot type. The transmission setting of the jackpot start designation command is performed and the process proceeds to step 131SGS147 (step 131SGS136). The jackpot start designation command that has been set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 131SGS133, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 131SGS140). If the relief time saving determination flag is not set, the process advances to step 131SGS147. If the relief time saving determination flag is set, the relief time saving determination flag is cleared and the time saving B flag indicating that the time saving state B is set is set (step 131SGS141, step 131SGS142). Further, the time saving number counter is set to 1100 corresponding to the time saving state B (relief time saving), and the transmission setting of the time saving state B designation command is performed (step 131SGS143, step 131SGS144). The time-saving state B designation command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

Moreover, while starting the lighting of the right-handed player lamp 131SG132, the transmission setting of the right-handed player LED lighting notification command is performed (step 131SGS145, step 131SGS146). In addition, the right hit LED lighting notification command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

Then, the symbol confirmation period timer is set to a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, which is the symbol confirmation period, and a symbol confirmation designation command is set to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS149 (step 131SGS147, step 131SGS148). Note that the symbol confirmation designation command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

In step 131SGS149, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a gaming state designation command according to the gaming state, and ends the special symbol stop processing. In addition, the game state designation command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

Then, if the symbol determination period timer is operating in step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 subtracts the value of the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 131SGS150), and determines whether the symbol determination period timer has timed out ( Step 131SGS151). If the symbol confirmation period timer has not timed out, the special symbol stop processing is finished, and if the symbol confirmation engine timer has timed out, it is determined whether the derived stop symbol is a missed symbol or not (step 131SGS152) . If the derived stopping symbol is a losing symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol halting process is ended (step 131SGS153), and the derived stopping symbol is a jackpot symbol. If so, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing, and the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 131SGS154).

[state transition]
Next, state transition in this embodiment will be explained. FIGS. 11-22 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-22, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability region (V switch 131SG023B1), it is controlled to a variable probability state, and the jackpot occurs. When A occurs, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)) is controlled. Although not shown, even if the jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) is controlled. In addition, even if the result is a loss, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clearing process or after the probability variable state ends, the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or in the time shortened state) After the end of 110 variable displays in A, if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring), time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving (low probability / high base state) ) is controlled by

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-22, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs in the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) and the game ball passes through the variable probability region, the state returns to the variable probability state. controlled. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-22, in time saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the probability variable state will occur. controlled. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled again. Further, in the time saving state A, when the variable display is completed 110 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-22, in time saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the probability variable state will occur. controlled. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled again. Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display is completed 1100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state. Furthermore, even if the result is a loss, if the rescue time is shortened (after the RAM clearing process or after the variable probability state ends, the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or the time is shortened) When the number of variable displays reaches 790 times without the occurrence of the next jackpot after the completion of 110 variable displays in state A), the control is performed to time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot occurs during the time saving state B and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, the case is shown in which the game is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A. Unlimited. For example, by comparing the remaining number of current time saving times with the number of time saving times (in this embodiment, 110 times) corresponding to the case where the game ball did not enter the probability variable area (V switch 131SG023B1), If the remaining number of times is greater, the current time saving state B may be continued as is.

In this embodiment, although it is possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol during the time saving state or the variable probability state, it is a disadvantageous game for the player. The state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed.

[Production control process processing/pre-read notice]
As shown in FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24, in the prefetch notice setting process of this embodiment, the timing when a starting winning occurs (the receiving command buffer at the starting winning as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) By setting the pending display flag to one of 0 to 2 at the timing when the starting opening winning prize designation command, symbol designation command, fluctuation category command, and pending storage number notification command are newly stored, the active display or pending display can be activated. It is possible to determine the display mode of the active display and the pending display, and to suggest the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-24, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "non-reach", the pre-read notice is not executed ( Set the value of the pending display flag to "0") at a rate of 95%, and execute the pre-read notice in production pattern α (set the value of the pending display flag to "1") at a rate of 5%. , and execution of the pre-read notice in presentation pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a ratio of 0%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "miss" and the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "other (normal reach)", the pre-read notice is not executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to " 90% of the time, it is decided to execute the pre-read notice in production pattern α (set the value of the pending display flag to "1") at a 10% rate, and Execution of the preview in production pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "super reach", the pre-read notice is not executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0"). 70% of the time, the execution of the pre-read notice in production pattern α (setting the value of the pending display flag to "1") is decided at a 20% rate, and the pre-read notice is set to "1". Execution in production pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a rate of 10%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is a "jackpot", the non-execution of the pre-read notice (setting the value of the pending display flag to "0") is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pre-read notice is is executed in production pattern α (setting the value of the pending display flag to "1") at a rate of 30%, and the pre-read notice is executed in production pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2"). (to be set) at a rate of 65%.

After executing the pre-read notice setting process, the pending display/active display update process (131SGS162), the display update process for the remaining number of times the relief time reduction etc. are reached (step 131SGS163), and the relief time reduction arrival notification performance execution process (step 131SGS164) are executed. do. In the pending display/active display update process, the process starts displaying the pending display or active display in a display mode according to the value of the pending display flag, and the active display is deleted from the active display area 131SG005F at the end timing of the variable display. Processing and processing to hide or start displaying the pending display and active display according to the progress of the performance during the variable display are executed. In the display update process for the remaining number of rescue time reductions, the value of the remaining number of rescue time reduction display 131SG005Z (see FIG. 11-1) displayed on the image display device 5 is updated each time the variable display starts, and In accordance with the progress of the current performance, processing to hide or start displaying the remaining number of rescue time reduction attainment display 131SG005Z is executed. In the relief time saving arrival notification performance execution process, from the end timing of the variable display when the number of variable displays has reached 900 times, a process for executing a relief time saving arrival notification effect that notifies that the time saving state B has been controlled is executed. .

[Variable display start setting process]
FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS601). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set, copy the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A to the active display buffer 131SG194B. (131SGS602). In addition, the first special figure pending memory (various command data stored in correspondence with buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") in the start winning command buffer 131SG194A is shifted upward one by one. (Step 131SGS603). Note that at this time, the various command data stored in the buffer number "1-1" are erased because there is no destination to shift them to.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not on in step 131SGS601, it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS604). If the second variable display start command reception flag is set, copy the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A to the active display buffer 131SG194B. (131SGS605). In addition, the second special figure pending memory (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") in the start winning command buffer 131SG194A is shifted upward one by one. (Step 131SGS606). Note that at this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "2-1" are erased because there is no destination to shift them to.

Incidentally, if the second special figure variable display start command reception flag is not on, the variable display start setting process is ended.

After executing step 131SGS603 or step 131SGS6060, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 131SGS607). Furthermore, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are determined according to the read variation pattern designation command and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 131SGS608).

For example, as shown in Figure 11-26, if the variable display result is "miss" and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach is off), the stop symbols are set to "124" or "578" at a rate of 100%. ” and other “non-reach” combinations (non-reach mode, non-reach mode). In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (normal reach is off), the stop symbol will be a combination of "reach" with an even number such as "242" or "676" at a rate of 95% ( Even number reach format, even number reach is off format), and a 5% ratio of "reach" combinations with odd numbers other than 7 such as "131" and "545" (odd number reach format, odd number reach is off format) do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (super reach is off), the stop symbol will be "reach" with an even number such as "242" or "676" at a rate of 80%. The combination (even number reach mode, even number reach is off) is decided, and 19% of the combinations are "reach" with odd numbers other than 7 such as "131" and "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach is off) The combination of "reach" with seven symbols such as "767" and "787" ("7" reach mode, "7" reach off mode) is determined at a rate of 1%.

Then, if the variable display result is "Jackpot", the stop symbol is determined to be a "reach" combination (even number reach mode, even number reach jackpot mode) with an even number such as "222" or "666" at a rate of 20%. Then, 50% of the time, the combination of "reach" with odd numbers other than 7 such as "111" and "555" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach jackpot mode) is decided, and 30% of the time, the combination of "777" is decided. A combination of "reach" with 7 symbols ("7" reach mode, "7" reach jackpot mode) is determined.

In other words, the expectation of jackpot is highest when the decorative symbol is a "7" symbol and it is a reach, and from then on, when it is a reach with an odd number symbol other than "7", when it is a reach with an even number symbol, and when it is a non-reach. The jackpot expectation level is set to decrease in order (Jackpot expectation level due to decorative symbols: Reach with "7" symbol > Reach with odd symbols other than "7" > Reach with even numbers > No reach). Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the decorative symbol is a reach mode, and which symbol is a reach mode.

In addition, in this example, a form in which the jackpot expectation level is different depending on the case where the combination of even numbers of decorative symbols is a reach and the case where a combination of odd numbers is a reach, etc., has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the expected level of jackpot may be the same no matter which combination of decorative symbols becomes a reach, or the expected level of jackpot when a reach is achieved depending on the size of the number indicated by the decorative pattern. may be different.

Returning to FIG. 11-25, after determining the stop symbols of the decorative symbols, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute a preview performance during variable display that indicates the possibility that the variable display result will be a jackpot during variable display. A variable display preview performance determination process (step 131SGS609) is executed to determine the.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table (performance control pattern) according to the variable pattern, the gaming state, the variable display result, and the determination result of the variable display notice performance determination process (step 131SGS610), and starts the process timer. Start (step 131SGS611).

Note that a production control pattern is set in each process table. Specifically, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound control for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operations of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (131SGS612). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation patterns that correspond one-to-one to the variation pattern designation commands. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (131SGS613). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (131SGS614). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (S172) (131SGS615).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each reduced by 1. Then, control of the presentation device is executed according to the value of the process timer, variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and decorative pattern is displayed according to the value of the variable display time timer. What is necessary is to stop the variable display of and set the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (S173).

[About production during variable display]
When the production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display in the variable display start waiting process of step S170, the production control CPU 120 sets the variable display start setting of the subsequent step S171. In the process, based on the variable display result such as the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command, the special pattern or decorative pattern specified by the variable display result specification command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), Decide on the variable display mode of the decorative design, whether or not to execute the reach effect, its mode, execution start timing, etc., set the effect control pattern that reflects the decision results, etc., and set the effect control pattern based on the set effect control pattern. Controls variable display of symbols, reach effect, etc.

[About production control pattern]
As shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28, the production control pattern is set for each of the variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, PA2-1 to PA2-19, and PB1-1 to PB1-18.

As performance control patterns corresponding to the variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, non-reach patterns 1 to 4 are set in which the decorative symbols do not become a reach mode and are out of reach mode. The fluctuation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are fluctuation patterns specified in the normal state, PA1-3 is the fluctuation pattern selected in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, and PA1-4 is the fluctuation pattern specified in the time saving state B. This is a variation pattern selected in , and in the corresponding non-reach patterns 1 to 4, the time until the variable display of the decorative pattern ends is set to be different depending on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. ing.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-1, a pattern is set in which a normal reach performance ("Normal" in the figure) in which the decorative pattern is in a reach mode is executed, and then the reach is off. The fluctuation pattern PA2-1 is a fluctuation pattern specified in the normal state, time saving state A, and variable probability state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-2, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance ("low base weak A" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. It is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-3, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance ("low base weak B" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. It is set.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-4, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach A reach performance ("Low base strong A" in the figure) is executed. ”) and then the reach is off. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-5, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-6, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-7, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach B reach performance (in the figure, the low base strong B ”) and then the reach is off. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-8, after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, and then the reach performance of low base strong reach B is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-9, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-10, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-11, after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, and then the reach performance of low base strong reach C is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-12, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-13, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strongest super reach reach performance ("low base strongest" in the figure) ) is executed, and then a pattern is set in which the reach is off. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-14, after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, and then the reach performance of low base strongest super reach is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-15, a pattern is set in which after the normal reach performance, the low base strongest super reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off.

The variation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-15 are all variation patterns specified in the normal state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-16, a pattern is set in which after the normal reach reach performance, the high base reach A reach performance ("high base A" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. There is. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-17, a pattern is set in which after the normal reach reach performance, the high base reach B reach performance ("high base B" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. There is. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-18, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of high base reach C ("high base C" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. There is. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-19, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of high base reach D ("high base D" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. There is.

The fluctuation patterns PA2-16 to PA2-19 are all fluctuation patterns selected in the time saving state A and the variable probability state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-1, a pattern is set in which a normal reach performance is executed and then a jackpot is achieved.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-2, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-3, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-4, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strong reach performance A is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-5, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-6, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-7, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-8, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-9, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-10, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-11, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-12, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then the low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, and then the jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-13, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strongest super reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

The variation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-13 are all variation patterns selected in the normal state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-14, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a high base reach A reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-15, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a high base reach B reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-16, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a high base reach C reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-17, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a high base reach D reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

The fluctuation patterns PB1-14 to PB1-17 are all fluctuation patterns selected in the time saving state A and the variable probability state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-18, a pattern is set in which a jackpot is achieved without executing a normal reach or super reach performance. The fluctuation pattern PB1-18 is a fluctuation pattern selected in the time saving state B.

[About the flow of production during variable display]
FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing the flow of performance during variable display in the normal state. The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA1-1 or PA1-2, To control a pattern so that it is out of reach mode without being in a reach mode.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, the decoration Execute the reach effect of normal reach where the symbol is in the reach mode, and then control so that if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-1, the reach will be off, and the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command If the fluctuation pattern is PB1-1, control is performed so that it is a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-2, the production control CPU 120 executes the normal reach production. After execution, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach A is executed, and then a miss is reported as a performance result of the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and the reach is controlled so that the reach is missed.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-3, the production control CPU 120 executes the normal reach production. After execution, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach B is executed, and then a miss is reported as a performance result of the reach performance of a low base weak super reach B, and control is performed so that the reach is missed.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-4 or PB1-2, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 4, a miss will be announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, and the reach will be controlled so that it will be a miss, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-2, the low base A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach A, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-5 or PB1-3, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 5, a miss is announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, and the reach is controlled so that it is a miss, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-3, the low base is A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach A, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-6 or PB1-4, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-6. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-4, a jackpot will be announced as the production result of the low base strong super reach A reach production. and control it so that it becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-7 or PB1-5, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 7, a miss is announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, and the reach is controlled so that it is a miss, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-5, the low base is A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach B, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-8 or PB1-6, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 8, a miss will be announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, and the reach will be controlled so that it will be a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-6, the low base will be A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach B, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-9 or PB1-7, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, and then execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-9. Control is performed so that a miss is announced as the performance result and the reach is off, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-7, a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the low base strong super reach B reach performance. and control it so that it becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-10 or PB1-8, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 10, a miss will be announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, and the reach will be controlled so that it will be a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-8, the low base A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach C, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-11 or PB1-9, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 11, a miss is announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, and the reach is controlled so that it is a miss, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-9, the low base is A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach C, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-12 or PB1-10, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-12. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-10, a jackpot will be announced as the production result of the low base strong super reach C reach production. and control it so that it becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-13 or PB1-11, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2-13. If so, a miss will be announced as a result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and control will be performed so that the reach will be missed, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-11, the low base strongest super A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of the reach, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-14 or PB1-12, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-14 If so, a miss will be announced as the result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and control will be performed so that the reach will be missed, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-12, the low base strongest super A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of the reach, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-15 or PB1-13, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of the low base strongest super reach, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-15, the result of the reach effect of the low base strongest super reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-13, a jackpot will be announced as a result of the reach performance of the strongest super reach on a low base, and a jackpot will be announced. Control so that

In this way, in the normal state, a jackpot is announced as a result of the reach effect of low base weak super reach A and B, and it is not controlled by the jackpot and goes through the reach effect of low base weak super reach A and B. Low base strong super reach A to C executed with low base strong super reach A to C, low base strongest reach, low base weak super reach A to C executed without going through the reach effect of B, low base strongest Only in the reach performance of Super Reach, a jackpot is announced as a result of the performance, and the jackpot is controlled.

FIG. 11-30 is a diagram showing the flow of performance during variable display in the time saving state A and the variable probability state. The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA1-3, the decoration To control a pattern so that it is out of reach mode without being in a reach mode.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-1 or PB1-1. To do this, execute the normal reach effect, and then control so that if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1, the reach will be off, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is If it is PB1-1, it is controlled so that it becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-16 or PB1-14. After executing the normal reach reach effect, execute the high base super reach A reach effect, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-16, the high base super reach A reach effect is executed. A loss is announced as the result of the performance, and control is performed so that the reach is off, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-14, a jackpot will be announced as the result of the reach performance of high base super reach A. It is controlled so that it is announced and becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-17 or PB1-15. After executing the normal reach reach effect, execute the high base super reach B reach effect, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-17, the high base super reach B reach effect is executed. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-15, a jackpot will be announced as a result of the reach production of high base super reach B. It is controlled so that it is announced and becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-18 or PB1-16. After executing the normal reach reach effect, execute the high base super reach C reach effect, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-18, the high base super reach C reach effect is executed. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-16, a hit will be announced as a result of the reach production of high base super reach C. It is controlled so that it is announced and becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-19 or PB1-17. After executing the normal reach reach effect, execute the high base super reach D reach effect, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-19, the high base super reach D reach effect is executed. A loss is notified as a result of the performance, and control is performed so that the reach is off, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-17, a jackpot will be announced as a result of the reach performance of high base super reach D. It is controlled so that it is announced and becomes a jackpot.

In this way, in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the performance results of jackpot or miss are announced in the normal performance or the reach performances of high base super reach A to D that are controlled after the normal performance, and then the performance results are controlled to be jackpot or miss. Therefore, another reach effect is not executed from the high base super reach A to D that are controlled after the normal effect.

FIG. 11-31 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in time saving state B. The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state B, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA1-4, the decorative pattern is in reach. Control is performed so that the reach is out of reach without becoming a problem.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state B, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PB1-18, the decorative pattern is in reach. It is controlled so that it becomes a jackpot without becoming a pattern.

In this way, in the time saving state B, the control is made such that in the case of a loss and the case of a jackpot, it is always non-reach.

[About super reach performance]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance during variable display. As mentioned above, the reach performance of super reach is performed in the normal state, low base weak super reach A, B, low base strong super reach A to C, low base strongest super reach reach performance, time saving state A, definite variable state Includes reach effects of high base super reach A to D performed in . In addition, below, the normal reach and super reach reach effects may be simply referred to as normal reach effect and super reach effect, respectively, and are referred to as low base weak super reach A, low base weak super reach B, low base strong super reach A, and low The reach effects of Strong Base Super Reach B, Low Base Strong Super Reach C, and Low Base Strongest Super Reach are simply Low Base Weak Reach A Effect, Low Base Weak Reach B Effect, Low Base Strong Reach A Effect, and Low Base Strong Reach, respectively. These are sometimes referred to as B effect, low base strong reach C effect, and low base strongest reach effect, and the reach effects of high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D are respectively Sometimes they are simply called high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach performance.

The super reach performance executes a performance that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, as well as the performance results that will ultimately lead to a jackpot (for low base weak super reach A and B, low base strong super reach A to C, This is a performance that informs you of whether the low base will develop into the strongest super reach or whether it will fail.

In addition, a title is set for each type of super reach performance, and a super reach performance has a title display part where the title of the super reach performance is displayed, and a performance result is announced after the title display part. It consists of an introductory part up to and including.

[About variations of low base weak reach A and B effects]
In this example, as a variation pattern for executing a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, after executing a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, it develops into another super reach performance. Although the configuration does not include a variation pattern that results in a jackpot without any development, after the execution of the low base weak reach effect, there is a variation pattern PB1-JA that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach effect, and a low base weak reach effect B effect. After execution, it may be configured to include fluctuation patterns PB1-JB that become a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects.

In such a configuration, the production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PB1-JA, After executing the normal reach performance, execute the low base weak reach A performance, notify the jackpot as a result of the low base weak reach A performance, control so that it becomes a jackpot, and execute the first variable display start command or When the second variable display start command is received and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-JB, after executing the normal reach effect, the low base weak reach B effect is executed, and the low base weak reach B effect is executed. A jackpot is announced as a result of the production, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs. Therefore, in such a configuration, in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance, either it will be announced whether or not there will be a jackpot as a result of the performance, or it will develop into another super reach performance. Therefore, in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance, either it will be announced whether or not there will be a jackpot as a result of the performance, or it will develop into another super reach performance.

In addition, after the execution of the low base weak reach performances A and B, a configuration may be adopted that does not include a variation pattern that develops into other super reach performances. In such a configuration, in the introduction part of the low base weak reach performances A and B, , it will be announced whether or not there will be a jackpot as a result of the performance.

Also, in the following embodiments, a configuration may be applied that includes a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of the low base weak reach effects A and B; in this case, , Low base weak reach A so that the jackpot expectation level of low base strong reach A to C productions and low base strongest reach production is higher than the jackpot expectation level of low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach A production. , a variation pattern that results in a loss after execution of performance B, and a variation pattern that results in a jackpot after execution of low base weak reach performance A and B, without developing into another super reach performance, has a determined ratio.

[About low base weak reach A production]
FIG. 11-32 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach A effect is executed, and FIG. 11-33 is a diagram showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A effect. This is a timing chart.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the relative As shown in Figure 11-32 (a1), the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result designation command starts changing at a predetermined timing, as shown in Figure 11-32 (a1). ) is stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 to perform a normal reach effect in which the reach mode is set. After that, operation promotion effect A to be described later is executed, and as shown in FIG. 11-32 (a2), the pending display and active display of the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F After executing a white flash effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining , the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect is started.

As shown in Figures 11-32 (a1) to (a3), the background (background of the daytime sky) in which the decorative pattern (large) in the normal state that was displayed before the white flash effect is changing is different from the white flash effect. After that, the background changes to the low base weak reach A effect (corridor background), and the decorative pattern (large) that was displayed in reach mode before the white flash effect is larger than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash effect. Switches to reach mode with small decorative pattern (small).

As shown in FIG. 11-33, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, part of the title characters of the low base weak reach A performance “Catch the Bakuchu!” is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from when the title is displayed until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period in which the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" is displayed in the fixed position, and the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" that was displayed in the fixed position. Catch me!'' disappears and the title ends until it switches to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying the title start period. In the title start period of the low base weak reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a3) to (a4), a part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" is displayed from the left side of the display area in the reach mode. Out of the left and right decorative patterns (small), make it appear in a manner that overlaps with the left decorative pattern (small), then move the entire title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" toward the fixed position and stop at the fixed position. let When the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" is stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" is displayed in a manner that overlaps with both the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode. be done.

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base weak reach A production. During the start period, even if the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode is a number from "1" to "9", part of the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" will be the decoration on the left and right side of the reach mode. It appears in a manner that overlaps with the decorative pattern (small) on the left side of the design (small), and when the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" is stationary in the fixed position, the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" A portion is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the ready-to-reach mode.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a4) to (a5), an enemy character ``Catch the Bakuchu!'' appears behind the title character ``Catch the Bakuchu!'' displayed in a fixed position. ``Bakuchu'' appears, and below the title character ``Catch Bakchu!'', a subtitle with the line ``If you can, try to catch it!'' is displayed, depending on the scene where the enemy character ``Bakuchu'' appears. The audio of the lines displayed as subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-33, no sound for reading the title is output. In addition, as shown in Figure 11-33, the title display period of the low base weak reach A effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach A effect (Figures 11-47 and 11- 48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a5) to (a6), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the display area. Move the title to the right side until all the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-33, the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach A effect (Figures 11-47 and 11 -48). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-33, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, the expectation level suggestion display described later is not displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-32 (a6) to (a7), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect is the same as the background of the title display part (corridor background), and from the title display part The scene of the video that started (the scene where the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears) continues throughout the introduction part, and the line that was displayed in the title display part, "Catch it if you can!", continues to be displayed. , the audio of the lines being output from the speakers 8L and 8R is also continuously output. After that, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a7) to (a8), at the timing when the audio output of the line "Catch it if you can!" displayed in the title display part is finished, the next part of the introductory part is started. The scene changes to a video scene (a scene in which the ally character ``Mumemu'' chases the enemy character ``Bakuchu'').

The production control CPU 120 is introduced when a variation pattern is specified by a variation pattern specification command that develops into any of the low base weak super reach A, the low base strong super reach A to C, and the low base strongest super reach. After executing a falling effect in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the part, it is developed into one of a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, and a low base strongest reach effect. . On the other hand, if the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after the low base weak super reach A, the ally character "Yumemu" will catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part. , the performance result of the low base weak reach A performance is notified to the effect that it is not a jackpot, and then a decorative pattern indicating the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5. Display the (large) combination.

In addition, in a configuration that includes a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after the execution of the low base weak reach A performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes the low base weak super reach A performance using the fluctuation pattern specification command. After executing the low base weak reach A effect, if a variation pattern is specified that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach effect, at the end of the introduction part, the ally character ``Yumemu'' will become the enemy character ``Bakugo''. "Chu" is caught and the performance result of the low base weak reach A performance is a jackpot (controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and then the image display device 5 is notified by a variable display result designation command. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating a designated type of jackpot is displayed.

[About low base weak reach B production]
FIG. 11-34 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach B effect is executed, and FIG. 11-35 is a diagram showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B effect. This is a timing chart.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach B is specified by the variation pattern designation command, As shown in FIG. 11-34 (b1), the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing. , and executes a normal reach performance in which it stops at the "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R and takes a reach mode. After that, the operation promotion effect A to be described later is executed, and as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b2), the pending display and active display of the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are performed. After executing a white flash effect of displaying the entire display area in white while maintaining , the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect is started.

As shown in Figures 11-34 (b1) to (b3), the background (background of the daytime sky) in which the decorative pattern (large) in the normal state that was displayed before the white flash effect is changing is different from the white flash effect. After that, the background changes to the low base weak reach B effect (the background where the character "Yumemu" and the character "Boingo" face each other from side to side with a hockey table in between), and the decorative pattern that was displayed in the reach mode before the white flash effect is displayed. (Large) switches to the reach mode of the decorative pattern (small), which is smaller in size than the decorative pattern (large), after the white flash effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-35, in the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" of the low base weak reach B performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from 2000 until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period in which the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" are displayed in the fixed position, and the display of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" that was displayed in the fixed position. This includes the title end period until it disappears and switches to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying the title start period. In the title start period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b3) to (b4), part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed from the left side of the display area to the left and right sides of the reach mode. The decorative pattern (small) is made to appear in a manner overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small), and then the entire title character ``Bilibili Hockey Showdown'' is moved toward a fixed position and kept stationary at the fixed position. When the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" are stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base weak reach B production During the start period, even if the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode are numbers from "1" to "9", a part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will be replaced by the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode. When the title character "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is stationary in the fixed position, a part of the title character "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" appears in the reach mode. It is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps both the left and right decorative patterns (small).

The production control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b4) to (b5), the ally character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Boingo" are displayed below the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown". '' is displayed in response to the scene in which the left and right players are facing each other, and the subtitles ``Let's play hockey! We won't lose!'' are displayed, and the audio of the lines displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-35, no sound for reading the title is output. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-35, the title display period of the low base weak reach B effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach B effect (Figures 11-47 and 11-35). 48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in (b5) to (b6), the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area. Move it until everything disappears. As shown in Figure 11-35, the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach B effect (Figures 11-47 and 11 -48). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-35, in the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, the expectation level suggestion display described later is not displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-34 (b6) to (b7), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect is the background of the title display part (the character ``Yumemu'' and the character ``Yumemu'' with a hockey table in between. The scene in the video that starts from the title display part (the scene where the friendly character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Boingo" face each other left and right) continues throughout the introduction part. In addition, the line "Let's play hockey! We won't lose!" that was displayed in the title display part continues to be displayed, and the audio of the line that is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R continues to be output. After that, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b7) to (b8), at the timing when the audio output of the line "Let's play hockey! We won't lose!" that was displayed in the title display part ends, the introductory part starts. The scene switches to the next video scene (the scene where the ally character "Mumemu" hits the puck back).

The production control CPU 120 is introduced when a variation pattern that develops into any of the low base weak super reach B, the low base strong super reach A to C, or the low base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command. After executing a falling effect in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the part, it is developed into one of a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, and a low base strongest reach effect. . On the other hand, if the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after the low base weak super reach B, the ally character "Yumemu" will fight against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introduction part. Unable to win, a performance result indicating that it is not a jackpot is notified as a performance result of the low base weak reach B performance, and thereafter, the image display device 5 shows the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result designation command. Display the combination of decorative designs (large).

In addition, in a configuration that includes a fluctuation pattern that becomes a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after the execution of the low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes the low base weak reach B performance by the fluctuation pattern specification command. After execution, if a variable pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects is specified, at the end of the introductory part, the ally character "Yumemu" wins the battle with the enemy character "Boingo" and receives a low The performance result of the base weak reach B performance is a jackpot (it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and then the image display device 5 is notified of the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[About low base strong reach A production]
FIG. 11-36 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low base strong reach A effect, and FIG. 11-37 is a diagram showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect. This is a timing chart.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, perform the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. , develop into a low base strong reach A production. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that directly develops from the normal reach effect, after the normal reach effect is executed, the selection effect described below will be performed. Execute and develop into a low base strong reach A production.

When developing from a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a falling performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the final stage of the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance starts. In the falling effect, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c1), the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode are displayed, the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are displayed. While maintaining the hold display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A production or the low base weak reach B production to the background dedicated to the falling production (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable object 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, in the case of direct development from normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance after executing the selection performance described later, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1'). do. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-37, the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance is the same as the prologue display period before the title characters of the low base strong reach A performance are displayed. , the title start period from when a part of the title character "Two people catch the Bakushu!" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in the fixed position, and the title character "Two people catch the Bakushu!" The title display period during which “Catch the Bakuchu!” is displayed in a fixed position, and the title end period until the display of the title characters “Catch the Bakuchu!”, which was displayed in a fixed position, disappears and switches to the introduction part. ,including.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying a prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A performance that has transitioned from the falling performance, a background dedicated to the falling performance (a background with patterns spreading radially from the center), a display of decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, and the first reserved memory are displayed. While maintaining the pending display and active display of the display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center). , after displaying on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A performance that has transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance (here, the result image of the low base strong reach A performance), the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right of the reach mode. While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Yumemu'' is displayed in a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection performance, and then the ally character ``Yumemu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the performance control CPU 120 causes the transition to the title start period.

As shown in Figures 11-36 (c1) to (c3), during the prologue display period that transitions from the falling effect, only the falling effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" After the prologue display period ends, the background (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) will switch to the background of the low base strong reach A production (the background where the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway). , the pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period when the selection effect is transitioned, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" is changed to the end of the prologue display period. After that, the background changes to a low base strong reach A production (background where the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway). In addition, the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the end of the prologue display period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection performance are maintained hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c4), part of the title characters "Let's catch Bakuchu together!" is displayed from the left side of the display area. Out of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, make it appear in a manner that overlaps with the left decorative pattern (small), and then move the entire title character "Two people catch the Bakushu!" toward the fixed position. and hold it in place. When the title character "Two people catch the Bakushu!" is stationary in the fixed position, a part of the title character "Two people catch the Bakushu!" appears on both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. are displayed in an overlapping manner.

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base strong reach A production During the start period, regardless of whether the decorative pattern (small) on the left or right side of the reach mode is a number from "1" to "9", a part of the title character "Catch Bakuchu with two people!" will be displayed in the reach mode. Out of the left and right decorative patterns (small), it appears in a manner that overlaps with the left decorative pattern (small), and when the title character "Two people catch the Bakushu!" remains in the fixed position, the title character "2" appears. A portion of "Catch the Bakuchu with people!" is displayed in a manner that overlaps with both the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Two people catch the Bakushu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach A production, first, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c4), the title text "Let's catch Bakushu together!" is displayed with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The display is maintained at a fixed position for a predetermined period of time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-37, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c5) to (c6), below the title characters "Two people catch the Bakushu!" there are letters smaller than the title characters "Two people catch the Bakushu!" Display the expectation level suggestion display. As shown in Figure 11-37, the title display period of the low base strong reach A effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). ).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c6) to (c7), the title characters "Two people catch the Bakuchu!" displayed in the fixed position are moved to the fixed position. Move the title from to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. Furthermore, the expectation level suggestion display as well as the title characters are also moved to the right side of the display area until they all disappear. As shown in Figure 11-37, the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach A effect (Figures 11-47 and 11 -48). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-37, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the speaker 8L, The audio of the lines is not output from 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect is the background after the title start period in the title display part (the ally character "Yumemu" in the hallway). and the background where "Jam" is displayed), and the video scene that starts from the title display part (the scene where the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) continues throughout the introduction part. do. In addition, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c8) and 11-37, after the introduction part starts, the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, and the lines corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears. A subtitle saying "Catch it if you can!" is displayed, and the audio of the dialogue displayed in the subtitle is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach A production, the sound that reads the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R in the title display part, but the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, the subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is now output according to the character.

When the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern that becomes a jackpot after a low base strong super reach A, the production control CPU 120 changes the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" to enemy characters at the end of the introduction part. Catch the "bakuchu" and notify the effect that it is a jackpot as a result of the low base strong reach A effect (that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state), and then specify the variable display result on the image display device 5. A combination of decorative patterns (large) representing the type of jackpot specified by the command is displayed. On the other hand, if the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after a low base strong super reach A, at the end of the introduction part, the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" will ”, the performance result of the low base strong reach A performance is notified that it is not a jackpot, and after that, the image display device 5 shows that the reach of the type specified by the variable display result designation command is off. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for the low base strong reach A production]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach A production, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Two people catch the Bakushu!" and the title text "Two people catch the Bakushu!" with a smaller size than the expected level. A suggestion display is displayed. The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star objects and the star object, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c5), and the star object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In a normal state where the low base strong reach A effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reservations and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, since the expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part also suggests the expectation level by multiple objects, the pending display and active display and the expectation level suggestion display are displayed at the same time in the title display part. In this case, there is a possibility that the objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistakenly recognized as the objects of the expectation level suggestion display. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents an object from being mistakenly recognized as an object indicating an expectation level indication.

In addition, since it is almost impossible for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening under normal conditions, if the number of pending special drawings for the first special drawing is at the maximum (4) and is being displayed variablely, the pending display and active display will be displayed. Up to 5 objects may be displayed, which corresponds to the number of objects that indicate the highest level of expectation in the level of expectation suggestion display, but the title display part of the low base strong reach A production. In this case, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so even if the low base strong reach A effect is executed in a situation where up to 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, It is possible to prevent objects displayed in the pending display and active display from being confused with objects in the expectation level suggestion display and being mistakenly recognized as having the highest expectation level in the expectation level suggestion display.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-36, the pending display and active display are displayed in the prologue display period before the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part, but the prologue display period starts. From time to time, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending display and active display are hidden, and even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent objects forming the pending display and active display from being mistakenly recognized as objects in the expectation level suggestion display.

In addition, when performing the low base strong reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c2) to (c3), a background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center) during the prologue display period. , After displaying the ally character "Yumemu" on the layer in front of the pending display and active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled, and the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged. Since the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area is completely filled are hidden after the prologue display period ends, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In the example shown in Figure 11-36, by displaying the character on a layer in front of the pending display and active display and enlarging the display until the entire display area is filled, the character is displayed before the entire display area is filled. The configuration is such that the hold display and active display are not displayed, but when executing the low base strong reach A effect, the entire display area is displayed in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode. By executing the display effect, the configuration may be such that the pending display and active display that were displayed before the monochrome display effect are erased, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. Can be done.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c4), the title text "Two people catch Bakushu!" is placed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. It remains displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c5) to (c6), a display indicating the level of expectation is displayed below the title characters "Let's catch the Bakushu together!" Display. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c5), at the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then As shown in 36 (c6), by changing the color of the three star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strong reach A effect from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects, the low-base strong reach A effect is created. The expectation level of jackpot is suggested.

When developing from a low base weak reach A production or a low base weak reach B production to a low base strong reach A production, as shown in Figure 11-38 (x1) to (x2), during the prologue display period, the ally character " Until the entire display area is filled with the enlarged display of "Yume Yume", if there is a pending number remaining, the pending display and active display will be displayed, and the expectation level suggestion display will be hidden in the subsequent title display part. As shown in Figure 11-38 (x3) to (x4), without going through the step of displaying the title text "Two people catch Bakushu!" in a fixed position, the title text "Two people catch Bakushu!" is displayed. !” At the same time, five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display are displayed, and then the color of the star-shaped objects is changed from black to gold, and the objects that make up the pending display and active display are Immediately after the display, objects constituting the expectation level suggestion display are displayed, and there is a possibility that the pending display and active display are confused with the expectation level suggestion display. On the other hand, in the example shown in Figure 11-36, after the expectation level suggestion display is hidden during the prologue display period, the expectation level suggestion display is hidden during the title display period, and the title text "Two people "Catch Bakushu!" remains displayed in the fixed position for a predetermined period of time, and then a display indicating the level of expectation is displayed below the title characters "Catch Bakushu!", so the display is on hold. Also, it is possible to prevent the active display and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About low base strong reach B production]
FIG. 11-39 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach B effect is executed, and FIG. 11-40 is a diagram showing the execution status of the low base strong reach B effect. This is a timing chart.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, perform the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. , develop into a low base strong reach B production. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that directly develops from the normal reach effect, after the normal reach effect is executed, the selection effect described below will be performed. Execute and develop into a low base strong reach B performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a falling performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the final stage of the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect starts. In the falling effect, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d1), the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode are displayed, the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are displayed. While maintaining the hold display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A production or the low base weak reach B production to the background dedicated to the falling production (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable object 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, in the case of direct development from the normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance after executing the selection performance described later, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d1'). do. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect is the prologue display period before the title characters "Gekisha Robo Battle" of the low base strong reach B effect are displayed, and the display part of the image display device 5. The title start period from when part of the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is displayed in the display area until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period during which the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is displayed in the fixed position, and the fixed position This includes the end period of the title until the title character "Gekken Robo Battle" that was displayed on the screen disappears and switches to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying a prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B performance that has transitioned from the falling performance, a background dedicated to the falling performance (a background with patterns spreading radially from the center), a display of decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, and the first reserved memory are displayed. While maintaining the pending display and active display of the display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center). , after displaying on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B performance that has transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance (here, the result image of the low base strong reach B performance), the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right of the reach mode. While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Yumemu'' is displayed in a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection performance, and then the ally character ``Yumemu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the performance control CPU 120 causes the transition to the title start period.

As shown in Figures 11-39 (d1) to (d3), during the prologue display period that transitions from the falling effect, only the falling effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" After the prologue display period ends, the background (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) will be changed to the background dedicated to displaying the title of the low base strong reach B production (the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo") The pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" will disappear after the prologue display period ends. . Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Additionally, although not shown, during the prologue display period when the transition from the selection effect occurs, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed at the end of the prologue display period. After that, the background is switched to a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low base strong reach B effect (a background in which the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed on the left and right positions). The display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the end of the prologue display period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection performance remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach B production, part of the title characters "Gekishock Robo Battle" is displayed from the left side of the display area to the decorations on the left and right sides of the reach mode, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d4). The symbol (small) is made to appear in such a manner that it overlaps with the decorative symbol (small) on the left side, and then the entire title character ``Geki-Shin Robo Battle'' is moved toward a fixed position and held still at the fixed position. When the title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base strong reach B production During the start period, even if the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode are numbers from "1" to "9", a part of the title character "Gekushin Robo Battle" will be displayed as the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode. ) appears in a manner that overlaps with the decorative pattern (small) on the left side, and when the title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is stationary in the fixed position, part of the title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" appears as a decoration on the left and right side of the reach mode. It is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps both of the small design.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach B production, first, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d4), the title characters "Gekken Robo Battle" were displayed in a fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. This state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-40, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle". As shown in Figure 11-40, the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). ).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach B production, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d6) to (d7), the title characters "Gekushin Robo Battle" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area. Move the title characters until all of them disappear. Furthermore, the expectation level suggestion display along with the title characters is also moved to the right side of the display area until they all disappear. As shown in Figure 11-40, the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach B effect (Figures 11-47 and 11 -48). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-40, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the speaker 8L, The audio of the lines is not output from 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect is the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (allied characters "Jam" and "Nana"). ” and the enemy character “Robo” are displayed on the left and right positions), at the start of the introduction part, the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect changes from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part. (The background shows the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" confronting each other in the town). In the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the enemy character "Robo" faces the front from the back position as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" face the front from the player's point of view. The video begins with the two facing each other with their backs turned. At this time, the enemy character "Robo" located at the back when viewed from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" located at the front when viewed from the player are both displayed as titles during the title display period of the title display part. The characters ``Gekisha Robo Battle'' are displayed in a position that overlaps with the original position. In addition, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d8) and 11-40, after the introduction part starts, the line "Losing The subtitle "No!" is displayed, and the audio of the dialogue displayed in the subtitle is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach B production, while the title display part outputs the audio reading out the title from speakers 8L and 8R, the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed and are output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is now output according to the character.

The production control CPU 120 specifies a variation pattern that becomes a jackpot after a low base strong super reach B by a variation pattern specification command, and in the final stage of the introduction part, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" change to the enemy character " ``Robo'', the performance result of a jackpot as a result of the low base strong reach B performance (controlling to a jackpot game state) is announced, and then a variable display is displayed on the image display device 5. A combination of decorative patterns (large) representing the type of jackpot specified by the result specification command is displayed. On the other hand, if the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after the low base strong super reach B, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" will be connected to the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introduction part. The player loses the battle, and the result of the low base strong reach B performance is notified to the effect that it is not a jackpot, and thereafter, the image display device 5 shows the type of reach specified by the variable display result designation command. Display the combination of decorative designs (large).

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for the low base strong reach B performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" as well as an expectation level suggestion display in a size smaller than the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle." The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star-shaped objects and the star-shaped object, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d5), and the star-shaped object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the normal state where the low base strong reach B effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and in the title display part, the pending display, the active display, and the expected If the degree suggestion display and the expectation degree suggestion display are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that the objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistakenly recognized as the objects of the expectation degree suggestion display. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents an object from being mistakenly recognized as an object indicating the level of expectation.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so in a situation where up to 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, the low Even when the base strong reach B effect is executed, the objects displayed as pending display and active display are confused with the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, and the expectation level is mistakenly recognized as being the highest in the expectation level suggestion display. You can prevent it from being put away.

In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the pending display and active display are hidden from the start of the prologue display period in the low base strong reach B performance, and even in such a configuration, the objects that make up the pending display and active display are It is possible to prevent the object from being mistakenly recognized as a suggestive display object.

In addition, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d2) to (d3), a background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center) during the prologue display period. , After displaying the ally character "Yumemu" on the layer in front of the pending display and active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled, and the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged. Since the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area is completely filled are hidden after the prologue display period ends, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, by executing the monochrome display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, it is possible to A configuration may be adopted in which the displayed pending display and active display are deleted, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing any discomfort.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d4), the title character "Gekisha Robo Battle" is displayed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Gekisha Robo Battle." At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5), at the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects forming the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. As shown in 39 (d6), by changing the color of 3.5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strong reach B effect from black to gold among the 5 star-shaped objects, the low-base strong reach This suggests the level of expectation for a jackpot in performance B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About low base strong reach C production]
The low base strong reach C performance has many points in common with the low base strong reach B performance described above, so the drawing for the low base strong reach C performance will be omitted.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach C is specified by the variation pattern specification command, If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, perform the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. , develop into a low base strong reach C performance. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach C is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that directly develops from the normal reach effect, after the normal reach effect is executed, the selection effect described below will be performed. Execute and develop into a low base strong reach C performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a falling performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the final stage of the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect starts. In the falling effect, while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the low base After switching from the background at the end of the weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance to the background dedicated to the falling performance (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is moved to the initial position. rise to.

In addition, when directly developing from the normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance after executing the selection performance described later. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

The title display part of the low base strong reach C performance is the prologue display period before the title character "Daigekisha Robo Battle" of the low base strong reach C performance is displayed, and the title character "Daigekisha Robo Battle" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from when a part of "Robobattle" is displayed until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period during which the title characters "Great Earthquake Robobattle" are displayed in the fixed position, and the title that was displayed in the fixed position Including the end period of the title until the display of the characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" disappears and the switch to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying a prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C performance that has transitioned from the falling performance, a background dedicated to the falling performance (a background with patterns spreading radially from the center), a display of decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, and the first reserved memory are displayed. While maintaining the pending display and active display of the display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center). , after displaying on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C performance that has transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance (here, the result image of the low base strong reach C performance), the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode. While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Yumemu'' is displayed in a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection performance, and then the ally character ``Yumemu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the performance control CPU 120 causes the transition to the title start period.

During the prologue display period when the transition from the falling effect occurs, the background exclusively for the falling effect (background with patterns radiating from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" is replaced by the prologue display. After the period ends, the background will change to a low base strong reach B effect (background where the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Big Robot" are displayed on the left and right positions), and the ally character "Yumemu" The pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Additionally, although not shown, during the prologue display period when the transition from the selection effect occurs, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed at the end of the prologue display period. Afterwards, the background is switched to a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low base strong reach C production (a background in which the friendly characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Big Robot" are displayed on the left and right positions). The display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the end of the prologue display period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection performance remain hidden.

During the title start period for the low base strong reach C production, a part of the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" will be displayed from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. After that, the entire title character ``Great Earthquake Robo Battle'' is moved toward a fixed position, and then stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" are stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

One of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed as the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, but during the title start period, the reach mode Even if the left and right decorative patterns (small) are numbers from "1" to "9", a part of the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is the left side of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in reach mode. It appears in a manner that overlaps with the design (small), and when the title character "Daigekisha Robo Battle" is stationary in the fixed position, a part of the title character "Daigekisha Robo Battle" appears in the left and right decorative design (small) of the reach mode. are displayed in an overlapping manner with both.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach C production, first, the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" remain displayed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden for a predetermined period of time. , the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle." The title display period of the low base strong reach C effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach C effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach C performance, the title characters ``Great Earthquake Robo Battle'' displayed at a fixed position are moved from the regular position to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear. Furthermore, the expectation level suggestion display along with the title characters is also moved to the right side of the display area until they all disappear. The title end period of the low base strong reach C effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach C effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48). Furthermore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, unlike the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed, and the audio of the dialogue is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance after the end of the title end period. The background at the beginning of the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production is the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Big Robot" are displayed on the left and right positions). At the beginning of the introduction part, the background for the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect (the background of the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" and the enemy character The scene changes to a background scene where the "Big Robot" confronts each other in the town. In the introductory part of the low base strong reach C production, the enemy character "Big Robot" is facing forward on the back side as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" are on the back side on the front side as seen from the player. The video starts with a scene where the two face off against each other. At this time, the enemy character "Big Robot" located in the back as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" located in the front as seen from the player, are displayed during the title display period of the title display part. , the title characters ``Great Earthquake Robo Battle'' are displayed in a position that overlaps with the regular position where they were displayed. In addition, after the introduction part starts, the subtitles ``I will never lose!'' are displayed, corresponding to the scene where the friendly characters ``Mumemu'' and ``Nana'' confront the enemy character ``Big Robot'', and the speaker 8L, The audio of the lines displayed in subtitles is output from 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach C production, while the title display part outputs the audio reading out the title from speakers 8L and 8R, the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed and are output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, the subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is now output according to the character.

When the variation pattern designation command specifies a variation pattern that becomes a jackpot after a low base strong super reach C, the production control CPU 120 changes the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" to enemy characters at the end of the introduction part. After winning the battle with the "big robot", the performance result of the low base strong reach C performance is announced as a jackpot (controlling to the jackpot game state), and then on the image display device 5, A combination of decorative patterns (large) representing the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command is displayed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after a low base strong super reach C, at the end of the introduction part the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" ”, the low base strong reach C performance results indicate that it is not a jackpot, and after that, the image display device 5 shows that the type of reach specified by the variable display result designation command is off. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for the low base strong reach C performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" as well as an expectation level suggestion display in a smaller size than the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle." The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star-shaped objects and the star-shaped object. The degree of expectation is suggested by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state where the low base strong reach C effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and in the title display part, the pending display, the active display, and the expected If the degree suggestion display and the expectation degree suggestion display are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistaken as objects of the expectation degree suggestion display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents an object from being mistakenly recognized as an object indicating an expectation level indication.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so in a situation where up to 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, the low Even when the base strong reach C effect is executed, the objects displayed as pending display and active display may be confused with the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, and the expectation level may be mistakenly recognized as having the maximum level in the expectation level suggestion display. You can prevent it from being put away.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the pending display and the active display are hidden from the start of the prologue display period in the low base strong reach C performance, and even in such a configuration, the objects that make up the pending display and the active display are It is possible to prevent the object from being mistakenly recognized as a suggestive display object.

In addition, when performing the low base strong reach B effect, during the prologue display period, the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the ally character "Dream" on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display. After displaying "Yume", the ally character "Yume" is enlarged and displayed until the display area is completely filled, and the pending display and the display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled due to the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume" are Since the active display is hidden after the prologue display period ends, the pending display and the active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strong reach C effect, by executing the monochrome display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, it is possible to A configuration may be adopted in which the displayed pending display and active display are deleted, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing any discomfort.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach C production, the title text "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" remains displayed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden for a predetermined period of time, and then the title text A display indicating the level of expectation will be displayed below "Great Earthquake Robo Battle". At this time, at the initial stage, all of the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then among the five star-shaped objects, the low base strong reach C effect is displayed. By changing the color of the corresponding four star-shaped objects from black to gold, the expectation level of a jackpot in the low base strong reach C performance is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About low base strongest reach performance]
FIG. 11-41 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low-base strongest reach effect, and FIG. 11-42 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach effect. It is.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 120 If the pattern is a variable pattern that develops from normal reach to low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, perform the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance, Develop into the strongest reach performance with low base. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to the lowest base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, and if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that directly develops from the normal reach, after the normal reach effect is executed, the selection effect described below will be executed. Execute and develop into the strongest reach performance with low base.

When developing from a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a falling performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the final stage of the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect will start. In the falling effect, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e1), the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode are displayed, the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are displayed. While maintaining the hold display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A production or the low base weak reach B production to the background dedicated to the falling production (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable object 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

Furthermore, in the case of direct development from the normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance after executing the selection performance described later, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1'). . Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-42, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, a part of the title characters of the low-base strongest reach effect, ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'', is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from when it is displayed until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period in which the title text "Six people catch Bakuchu!" is displayed in the fixed position, and the title text that was displayed in the fixed position This includes the end period of the title until the display of "Six people catch Bakuchu!" disappears and the introduction part changes.

When the performance control CPU 120 moves to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period for the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e3), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode is maintained, and the title text ``Catch the Bakushu with 6 people!'' !” is displayed at an enlarged size such that only some of the characters are visible in the display area. At this time, the entire display area is displayed with a portion of the title characters ``Six people catch Bakuchu!''. Further, the part of the title character "Six people catch Bakuchu!" that is displayed in the display area appears in a manner that overlaps with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. After that, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title text "Six people to catch Bakushu!" gradually shrinks until all characters in the title text "Six people catch Bakushu!" are displayed. The reduced size title text ``Six people to catch Bakuchu!'' is made to stand still in a fixed position so that it can be seen in the area. When the title character ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' is reduced to a fixed position and remains in place, a part of the title character ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' with the strongest low-base reach effect is in reach mode. It is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps both the left and right decorative patterns (small).

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title starts with the strongest reach effect on a low base. During the period, regardless of whether the decorative pattern (small) on the left or right side of the reach mode is a number from "1" to "9", the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" that appears in enlarged size will be reached. The title character ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' appears in a manner that overlaps with both the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the aspect, and is displayed in a reduced size while stationary in a fixed position. It is displayed in a manner that overlaps both the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode.

As shown in Figures 11-41 (e1) to (e4), during the title start period after the transition from the falling effect, the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' The background dedicated to the falling effect (background with patterns radiating out from the center) that was displayed before being displayed in its full state has been changed to a part of the enlarged title text "Six people catch Bakuchu!" While the display area is completely filled, a background dedicated to displaying the title of the strongest low-base reach effect (background where 6 friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right positions) When the title character ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' is reduced in size and stationary in a fixed position, a background dedicated to displaying the title of the lowest base strongest reach effect is displayed as the background. In addition, during the title start period after transitioning from the falling effect, a portion of the enlarged title text ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' was displayed before the display area was completely filled. The pending display and the active display are hidden while the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Six people catch Bakuchu!". Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode is maintained even after the title start period ends.

In addition, during the title start period when the selection effect was transitioned, a part of the enlarged title text "Six people catch Bakuchu!" was displayed before the display area was completely filled. The selection result image of the selection effect (in this case, the title image of the low-based strongest reach effect) is displayed in such a way that the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' While this is happening, the background changes to the title display for the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which 6 ally characters and the enemy character ``Bakuchu'' are displayed on the left and right positions), and the title text ``Six people make Bakuchu'' appears. Catch it!'' is reduced to a fixed position, and a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed as the background. Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection performance are maintained hidden.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Six people catch the Bakushu!" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low-based strongest reach production, first, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title character "6 people catch the Bakushu!" is set with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The title is kept displayed in the same position for a predetermined period of time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-42, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e5) to (e6), below the title characters "Six people to catch the Bakushu!", there is a message smaller than the title characters "Six people to catch the Bakushu!" Display the expectation level suggestion display. As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low-base strongest reach effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e6) to (e7), the title text "Catch Bakushu with 6 people!" displayed in a reduced size and in a fixed position. , a portion of the title text ``Six people catch Bakushu!'' is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. In this case, instead of being displayed in an enlarged manner, which is the opposite of the case where the title text "Six people catch the Bakushu!" is displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, the title text "Six people catch the Bakushu!" is displayed in an enlarged manner during the title start period. Catch the Bakushu!'' is reduced and displayed in a different manner from the reverse. Expand until the entire display area is filled. In other words, during the title start period, the trajectory of each part of the title character shrinks as the title character "Six people catch the Bakushu!" expands during the title end period. This is different from the trajectory that each part of the title character takes during the process. For this reason, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Six people catch Bakushu!" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in Figure 11-42, the title end period of the low-based strongest reach effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect (Figures 11-47 and 11-48 reference). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-42, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, subtitles for dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance, and the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed on the speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is also not output.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-41 (e4) to (e8), the background at the beginning of the introductory part of the low-based strongest reach effect (the background in which six friendly characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu" in the city) is the title Unlike the background dedicated to displaying the title in the display part (the background in which six friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right positions), during the title end period, the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" After the background dedicated to displaying the title is completely filled and the title end period ends, the background changes to the background at the start of the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect. The introductory part of the low-base, strongest reach performance begins with a video scene in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu." In addition, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e8) and 11-42, after the introduction part begins, the line ``If you can, try to catch it! !” is displayed, and the audio of the lines displayed in the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low-base strongest reach production, while the title display part outputs the sound that reads the title from speakers 8L and 8R, the title display part does not display subtitles with lines corresponding to the scene of the title display part, and the title is read out from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the displayed part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the sound of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the lines you respond to will be output.

When the variation pattern designation command specifies a variation pattern that results in a jackpot after the strongest super reach with a low base, the production control CPU 120 causes six ally characters to capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part. The performance result of the low base strongest reach performance is a jackpot (it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and then the image display device 5 is notified of the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating . On the other hand, when the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after the strongest super reach on a low base, six ally characters are unable to catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part. , notifies the performance result that it is not a jackpot as the performance result of the low base strongest reach performance, and then displays on the image display device 5 a decorative pattern (large) indicating the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result designation command. Display the combination.

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for the lowest base strongest reach performance]
In the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Six people to catch Bakuchu!" and a smaller size than the title text "Six people to catch Bakuchu!" suggesting the level of expectation. Display is displayed. The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star objects and the star object, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e6), and the star object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the normal state where the low base strongest reach effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and in the title display part, the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level are displayed. If the suggestion display and are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that the objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistakenly recognized as the objects of the expectation suggestion display. Therefore, in the title display part of the low-based strongest reach performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents the object from being mistakenly recognized as an object indicating the level of expectation.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so when the low base Even when the strongest reach effect is executed, the objects displayed as pending display and active display may be confused with the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, resulting in the misunderstanding that the expectation level is the highest in the expectation level suggestion display. can be prevented.

In addition, when executing the low-based strongest reach effect, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e2) to (e4), during the title start period, the title characters ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' It was displayed at an enlarged size so that only the letters of the section were visible in the display area, and then reduced to a reduced size so that all letters were visible in the display area, and a background dedicated to displaying the title with the strongest reach of a low base was displayed. Sometimes, the pending display and active display that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, by executing a monochrome display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, the display before the monochrome display effect can be executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the pending display and active display that have been displayed are erased, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing any discomfort.

In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title text "6 people catch the Bakushu!" is placed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The displayed state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e5) to (e6), a display indicating the level of expectation is displayed below the title characters "Six people to catch the Bakushu!" Display. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5), at the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. As shown in 41 (e6), by changing the color of 4.5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strongest reach effect from black to gold among the 5 star-shaped objects, the low-base strongest reach effect is achieved. The expectation level of jackpot is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About the modification of the title display part]
FIG. 11-43 is a diagram showing the transition of images in a modified example of the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, the low base strong reach C performance, and the low base strongest reach performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 moves to the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance, first, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f1), the display area is Executes a blackout effect that displays the entire screen in black. If the pending display and the active display are displayed before the execution of the blackout effect, the pending display and the active display are hidden when the blackout effect is started.

After continuing the blackout effect for a predetermined period of time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an expectation level suggestion display (see FIG. 11-43 (f2)) while maintaining the background of the entire display area in black. In step 43 (f2), a display indicating the degree of expectation of low base strongest reach effect is displayed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the background of the entire display area is displayed in black and the expectation level suggestion display is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (f3) (f5), the corresponding super reach is displayed. The title characters of the performance (in FIGS. 11-43 (f3) and (f5), the title characters of the low base strongest reach performance) are displayed in a fixed position in a larger size than the expectation level suggestion display.

When the title characters of the corresponding super reach effect are all displayed in a fixed position, a part of the title characters are displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed. Regardless of whether the small) is a number from 1 to 9, part of the title character of the corresponding super reach effect when displayed in the fixed position is the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode. are displayed in an overlapping manner with both.

Further, the title characters are displayed in either a white format (FIG. 11-43 (f3)) or a red format (FIG. 11-43 (f5)). Whether the title characters are to be displayed in white or red is determined in the aforementioned step 131SGS609 during the variable display preview effect determination process. In the variable display preview performance determination process, if a variable pattern including execution of low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, low base strong reach C performance, and low base strongest reach performance is identified, a jackpot will be awarded. Whether the title characters are displayed in white or red is determined by the probability depending on whether the title is present or not, and if the title characters are displayed in red, it is a jackpot. Whether to display the title characters in white or red is determined with a probability that the ratio is higher than the ratio of winning a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in white. Therefore, when the title characters are displayed in red in the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the title characters are displayed in white.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the expectation level suggestion display and the title characters of the corresponding super reach performance, and then displays the expectation level suggestion display and the corresponding super reach performance, as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (f4) and (f6). While maintaining the display of the title characters of the reach performance, a background corresponding to the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance is displayed, and a sound reading out the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, in the title display part, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the audio of the dialogue is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, in the title display part, the title characters are displayed for a longer time than the time from when the blackout effect starts until the title characters are displayed (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 shifts to the title end period. Note that the control of the title end period is the same as each of the above-mentioned super reach effects, so the explanation here will be omitted.

In this modified example of the title display part, the title characters of the corresponding super reach effect are larger in size than the expectation level suggestion display, and the expected appearance depends on whether the appearance is white or red. Since the degree is suggested, this attracts the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation degree suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the expectation degree suggestion first.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f2), whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, if the type of super reach effect is the same, the same format is used. An expectation level suggestion display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to whether the title characters after the expectation level suggestion display are displayed are white or red.

[About high base reach A to D effects]
FIG. 11-44 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of high base reach performances A to D, and FIG. 11-44 shows the execution status of high base reach performances A to D. FIG. In addition, high base reach A to D productions are the same except that the expectations suggested by the type of enemy character appearing, the title name, and the expectation level suggestion display are different, so we will explain high base reach A production here. However, the explanation of the high base reach B to D effects will be omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the high base super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g2), the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing. A normal reach performance is executed in which the robot stops at the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R and takes a reach mode. After that, the title display part of the high base reach A performance is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display part of the high base reach A performance starts after part of the title characters “Battle Reach A” of the high base reach A performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period until it is displayed in the position, the title display period in which the title letters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in the fixed position, and the title letter "Battle Reach A" that was displayed in the fixed position disappears. This includes the title end period until switching to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the high base reach A effect, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g2), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed while maintaining the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode. Display at an enlarged size such that only some characters are visible in the display area. At this time, the entire display area is displayed with a portion of the title characters "Battle Reach A". Further, the portion of the title character "Battle Reach A" displayed in the display area appears in a manner that overlaps with both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode. After that, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are gradually reduced to a reduced size where all characters of the title characters "Battle Reach A" are visible in the display area. The title characters ``Battle Reach A'' are held still in a fixed position. When the title character "Battle Reach A" is reduced to a fixed position and remains stationary, a part of the title character "Battle Reach A" is displayed in a manner overlapping both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. Ru.

One of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed as the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, but the title of the high base reach A production will start. During the period, regardless of whether the decorative pattern (small) on the left or right side of the reach mode is a number from "1" to "9", the title character "Battle Reach A" that appears in enlarged size will be the decoration on the left or right side of the reach mode. The title character "Battle Reach A" appears in a manner that overlaps with both the symbols (small) and is displayed in a reduced size while stationary in a fixed position, and part of it is the decorative symbol (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode. are displayed in an overlapping manner with both.

As shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the time saved before the display area is completely filled with part of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A" The changing background (night sky background) of the decorative pattern (large) in state A or variable state is displayed in such a way that the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title letters "Battle Reach A". While there, the background changes to a special background for displaying the title of the high base reach A production (a background in which the ally character "Mumemu" and the enemy character "Maskman" are displayed on the left and right positions), and the title characters "Battle Reach A" are reduced. When the size is fixed at a fixed position, a background dedicated to displaying the title of the high base reach A effect is displayed as the background. In addition, the hold display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled with part of the enlarged title letters "Battle Reach A" are replaced by the enlarged title letters "Battle Reach A". A" is hidden while the display area is completely filled with a portion of "A". Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode is maintained even after the title start period ends.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the high base reach A performance, first, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" were displayed in a fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. This state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-45, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a size smaller than the title characters "Battle Reach A". As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display period of the high base reach A performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the high base reach A performance (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the high base reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g5) to (g6), the title characters "Battle Reach A" displayed in the fixed position in reduced size are replaced with the title characters "Battle Reach A". The display area is expanded until the entire display area is filled with a portion of "Reach A". In this case, instead of being enlarged in the opposite manner to the case where the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period. The title character "Battle Reach A" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled with a part of the title character "Battle Reach A" in a manner different from the reverse manner. In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title character takes as the title character "Battle Reach A" shrinks during the title start period is the same as the trajectory that each part of the title character takes as the title character "Battle Reach A" expands during the title end period. is different. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in Figure 11-45, the title end period of the high base reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the high base reach A effect (Figures 11-47 and 11-48 reference). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-45, in the title display part of the high base reach A performance, subtitles for dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed on the speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is also not output.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the high base reach A performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-44 (g3) to (g7), the background at the beginning of the introduction part of the high base reach A production (the background where the ally character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Maskman" are fighting) differs from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (the background in which the ally character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Maskman" are displayed on the left and right positions), the title character "Battle Reach A" is displayed during the title end period. After the background dedicated to title display is partially filled and the title end period ends, the background is switched to the background at the start of the introduction part of the high base reach A performance. The introductory part of the high base reach A production begins with a video scene where the ally character "Mumemu" and the enemy character "Maskman" are fighting. In addition, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g7) and 11-45, after the introduction part starts, the line ``Fight'' corresponding to the scene where the ally character ``Yumemu'' and the enemy character ``Maskman'' are fighting !” is displayed, and the audio of the lines displayed in the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the high base reach A production, while the title display part outputs the audio reading out the title from speakers 8L and 8R, the title display part does not display the subtitles of dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part, and the title is read out from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the lines corresponding to the scene of the displayed part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the sound of the lines of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the lines you respond to will be output.

The production control CPU 120 specifies a variation pattern that will be a jackpot after high base super reach A by the variation pattern specification command, and in the final stage of the introduction part, the ally character "Yumemu" will interact with the enemy character "Maskman". After winning the battle, the performance result of the high base reach A performance is a jackpot (it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and then the image display device 5 is designated by a variable display result designation command. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of jackpot won is displayed. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern specification command specifies a fluctuation pattern in which the reach is off after a high base super reach A, the ally character "Yumemu" is defeated by the enemy character "Maskman" at the end of the introduction part, and the high A performance result indicating that the base reach A performance is not a jackpot is notified, and then a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5. Display.

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for high base reach A to D performances]
The expectation level suggestion display for high base reach A to D performances are the same except for the different expectations suggested by the expectation level suggestion display, so here we will explain the expectation level suggestion display for high base reach A performance, and An explanation of the display of expectation level suggestions for base reach B to D effects will be omitted.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" as well as an expectation level suggestion display in a size smaller than the title characters "Battle Reach A." The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star objects and the star object, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g5), and the star object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the time saving state A or the variable probability state in which the high base reach A effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the pending display and the active display are displayed in the title display part. If , and the expectation level suggestion display are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that the objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistakenly recognized as the objects of the expectation level suggestion display. Therefore, in the title display part of the high base reach A performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents the object from being mistakenly recognized as an object for displaying expectations.

In addition, in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the game ball almost never enters the first starting prize opening, so if the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum (4) and is being displayed variablely, the reserved A maximum of 5 objects may be displayed as display and active display, and this will match the number of objects that indicate the maximum expectation level in the expectation level suggestion display, but the In the title display part, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so if the high base reach A effect is executed in a situation where up to 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display. However, it is possible to prevent objects displayed in the pending display and active display from being confused with objects in the expectation level suggestion display and being mistakenly recognized as having the highest level of expectation in the expectation level suggestion display.

In addition, when executing the high base reach A effect, only some of the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed during the title start period, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g1) to (g3). When the display is enlarged so that it is not visible in the display area, and then reduced to a reduced size where all characters are visible in the display area, and a background dedicated to displaying the title of the high base reach A effect is displayed, the title start period Since the pending display and active display that were displayed before are hidden, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, when executing the high base reach A effect, by executing a monochrome display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white, excluding the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, the display before the monochrome display effect can be executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the pending display and active display that have been displayed are erased, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing any discomfort.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A". At this time, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4), at the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects forming the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4), As shown in 44 (g5), out of the five star-shaped objects, 3 correspond to the high base reach A effect (3.5 objects for the high base reach B effect, 4 objects for the high base reach C effect, By changing the color of the star-shaped objects (4.5 pieces in the reach D performance) from black to gold, the expectation level of a jackpot in the high base reach A performance is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About the display position of title characters]
FIG. 11-46 is a diagram showing the position where title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 11-46(A) and (B), the image display device 5 has a rectangular display area 5L, and since the game board 2 is arranged in front of the rectangular display area 5L, the image display device 5 The visible area in the display area 5L is an area that is visible from the opening 24 formed in the game board 2, that is, an area that is not covered by the members that constitute the game board 2.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 displays the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" at a fixed position during the title display period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance. At this time, the fixed position where the title characters "Catch Bakchu!" is displayed is as shown in FIG. 11-46 (A), where the title characters "Catch Bakchu!" 5L, and as shown in FIG. 11-46(B), it is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2. This position overlaps with the intersection of diagonal lines of a certain visible rectangular area 5S.

Similarly, the title text for the low base weak reach B production is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown", the title text for the low base strong reach A production is "Catch the Bakushu together!", and the title text for the low base strong reach B production is "Gekishaku". "Robo Battle", title text with low base strong reach C production, "Great Earthquake Robo Battle", title text with low base strongest reach production, "6 people catch Bakuchu!", title text with high base reach A production, "Battle Reach A" , the title characters "Battle Reach B" for the high base reach B production, the title characters "Battle Reach C" for the high base reach C production, and the title characters "Battle Reach D" for the high base reach D production. As shown in FIG. 11-46(A), the fixed position at which the title character is displayed during the title display period is the position where the title character overlaps the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5. As shown in 11-46(B), the intersection of the diagonals of the visible rectangular area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2 within the visible area of the image display device 5. They are in overlapping positions.

Game machines are often subject to design changes during the development stage, and due to changes in the design of the game board 2, the area covered by the display area 5L of the image display device 5 by the members constituting the game board 2 changes. The visible area of the display area 5L may be changed. In addition, gaming machines installed at gaming parlors may be taken over, refurbished, and sold again, and in such cases, the design of the gaming board 2 may be changed and the parts that make up the gaming board 2 may be changed to the image display device 5. The area covered by the display area 5L may change, and the visible area of the display area 5L may be changed. In such a case, if the arrangement of the title characters in the super reach effect is determined based on the display area 5L of the image display device 5, there is a risk that the display position of the title characters will deviate greatly from the center of the visible area. .

In contrast, in this embodiment, in the title display part of any super reach effect, the fixed position where the title characters are displayed during the title display period is such that the title characters are located between the diagonals of the display area 5L of the image display device 5. This is a position that overlaps with the intersection, and also a position that overlaps with the intersection of diagonals of the visible rectangular area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2 within the visible area of the image display device 5. The title characters displayed at a fixed position during the title display period are displayed at a position that overlaps with both the intersections of the diagonals of the rectangular area 5S where the intersections of the diagonals of the display area 5L are visible. Even if the design of the game board 2 is changed when the machine is reused, the display position of the title characters can be prevented from being largely deviated from the center of the visible area.

[About the performance time of super reach performance]
FIG. 11-47 is a diagram showing the performance time of each super reach performance, and FIG. 11-48 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the performance times of each super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the entire performance time (time from the start of the title display part to the end of the introduction part) of the low base weak reach A performance is T1-1, and the performance of the title display part is T1-1. The time is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt1c.

The entire presentation time of the low base weak reach B presentation is T1-2, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, and the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b. Yes, the performance time of the title end period is Tt1c.

In addition, the overall performance time for low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance is different, but the performance time of the title display part, the performance time of the title start period, the performance time of the title display period, and the end of the title. The performance time of each period is the same.

As shown in FIG. 11-47, the entire performance time of the low base strong reach A performance is T2-1, the performance time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the performance time of the title start period is Tt2a, The presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall presentation time of the low base strong reach B presentation is T2-2, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, and the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b. Yes, the performance time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall presentation time of the low base strong reach C presentation is T2-3, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, and the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b. Yes, the performance time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall performance time for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance is different, but the performance time of the title display part, the performance time of the title start period, and the title. The presentation time of the display period and the presentation time of the title end period are both the same time.

The overall performance time of the low base strongest reach performance is T3, the performance time of the title display part is Tt3, of which the performance time of the title start period is Tt3a, the performance time of the title display period is Tt3b, and the performance time of the title display part is Tt3b. The performance time of the end period is Tt3c.

The overall performance time of high base reach performances A to D is all T4, the performance time of the title display part is all Tt4, and the performance time of the title start period is Tt4a, and the performance time of the title display part is Tt4a. The presentation time is Tt4b in both cases, and the presentation time in the title end period is Tt4c in both cases.

Comparing the overall performance time of the super reach performance in the low base medium (normal state) in this form, as shown in Figure 11-48 (A), it is longer than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The overall performance time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance with high jackpot expectation is low base weak reach A The performance is longer than the overall performance time (T1-1, T1-2) of the low base weak reach B performance, and is expected to be a bigger hit than the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach performance B, and the low base weak reach C performance. The total performance time (T3) of the strongest low base reach performance with a high degree of intensity is the total performance time (T2-1, T2- 2, T2-3).

In addition, among the low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production, the overall performance time (T1 -2) is set longer than the entire performance time (T1-1) of the low base weak reach A performance. In addition, among the low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production, the low base strong reach C production has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A production and low base strong reach production B. The overall performance time (T2-3) is longer than the total performance time (T2-1, T2-2) of the low base strong reach A performance and the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach A performance, Among the low base strong reach B performances, the total performance time (T2-2) of the low base strong reach B performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A performance, is the entire performance time of the low base strong reach A performance. It is set longer than (T2-1).

Comparing the production times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period in the title display part in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-48 (B), which super reach productions (low base weak reach A, B Even in the case of production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production), the production time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b/Tt4b) is the production of the title start period. (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) and the presentation time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c), and the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) is longer than the title end period. It is set longer than the presentation time (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c).

Comparing the performance time of the title display part in the super reach performance in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-48 (C), it is found that the low base weak reach performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The production time (Tt2) of the title display part of the strong base reach A production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production is the production time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production. The production time (Tt3) of the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, which is longer than the time (Tt1) and has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach production A, low base strong reach production B, and low base weak reach production C production. is set longer than the performance time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance. In addition, the production time (Tt4) of the title display part of the high base reach A to D production is the production time (Tt4) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, and the low base strongest reach production. It is set shorter than the time (Tt1, Tt2, Tt3).

In this embodiment, if we compare the performance times of the title start period and title display period in the low-base strongest reach effect and the high-base reach effect A to D, we can see that the title in the low-base strongest reach effect is shown in Figure 11-48 (D). The production time (Tt3a) of the start period is set longer than the production time (Tt4a) of the title start period in the high base reach A to D productions, and as shown in Figure 11-48 (E), the production time (Tt3a) of the low base reach is the strongest. The presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period in the reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4b) of the title display period in the high base reach presentations A to D.

Comparing the production times during the title start period for super reach productions (low base weak reach A and B production, low base strong reach A to C production, and low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) in this form, As shown in Figure 11-48 (F), the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The production time (Tt2a) of the title start period of the C production is longer than the production time (Tt1a) of the title start period of the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, and is longer than the production time (Tt1a) of the title start period of the low base weak reach A production and the low base strong reach A production. The performance time (Tt3a) during the title start period of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the strong reach performance B and low base weak reach C performance, is the low base strong reach performance A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance. It is set longer than the performance time (Tt2a) of the title start period of the base strong reach C performance.

Comparing the production times during the title display period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) in this embodiment, As shown in Figure 11-48 (G), the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of C presentation is longer than the presentation time (Tt1b) of the title display period of low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, and is longer than the presentation time (Tt1b) of the title display period of low base weak reach A presentation and low base strong reach A presentation. The performance time (Tt3b) during the title display period of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the strong reach performance B and low base weak reach performance C, is the low base strong reach performance A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance. It is set longer than the performance time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the base strong reach C performance.

Comparing the production times during the title end period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) in this form, As shown in Figure 11-48 (H), the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The performance time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the C performance is longer than the performance time (Tt1c) of the title end period of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The performance time (Tt3c) during the title end period of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the strong reach performance B and low base weak reach C performance, is the low base strong reach performance A, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance. It is set longer than the performance time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the base strong reach C performance.

In this form, the character display period of the title display part (title display Comparing the production time of the part (which does not include the prologue period (described later) and which is the sum of the title start period, title display period, and title end period), as shown in Figure 11-48 (I), the low base The performance time (Tt2d) during the character display period for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance, which have higher jackpot expectations than the weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, are as follows: It is longer than the performance time (Tt1d) of the character display period of low base weak reach A performance, low base weak reach B performance, and is more jackpot than low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach performance B, and low base weak reach C performance. The performance time (Tt3d) during the character display period of the highly anticipated low base strongest reach performance is the performance time (Tt2d) during the character display period of the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance. ).

In this form, the production time of the title start period and title display period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) As shown in Figures 11-48 (J) and (K), any of the super reach effects (low base weak reach effects A, B effects, low base strong reach effects A to C effects) during low base (normal state) , low base strongest reach effect), the effect time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b) is longer than the effect time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a), and the effect time of the title start period (Tt1a) /Tt2a/Tt3a) is set longer than the presentation time (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c) of the title end period.

In this form, super reach performance (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) during low base (normal state) and high base (time saving state A and definite variable state) Comparing the overall performance time of the middle super reach performances (high base reach A to D performances), as shown in Figure 11-48 (L), the super reach performances during the high base (time saving state A and variable probability state) The overall performance time (T4) of (high base reach A to D performances) is the super reach performance (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, low base reach performance) during low base (normal state). It is set shorter than the entire performance time (T1-1, T1-2, T2-1, T2-3, T3) of the base strongest reach performance).

[About the title characters of super reach production]
FIG. 11-49 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns of the title display part in the super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the title text of the low base weak reach A production is "Catch the Bakuchu!", the number of characters in the title is 10 characters, and the font size of the title characters (per character (standard size) is FJ, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed (the size of the area including all title characters) is EJA.

The title character of the low base weak reach B production is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown", the number of characters in the title is 10 characters, the font size of the title character is FJ, and the display area size in which the title character is displayed is EJB. .

The title text of the low base strong reach A production is "Two people catch Bakushu!", the number of characters in the title is 13 characters, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area where the title characters are displayed. The size is EKA.

The title characters of the low base strong reach B production are "Gekushin Robo Battle", the number of characters in the title is 7 characters, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed is EKB.

The title text of the low base strong reach C production is "Great Earthquake Robo Battle", the number of characters in the title is 8 characters, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area size where the title characters are displayed is EKC. .

The title text of the low base strongest reach production is "6 people catch Bakushu!", the number of characters in the title is 13 characters, the font size of the title characters is FSK, and the display area size where the title characters are displayed. is ESK.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the font size of the decorative pattern (large) before it develops into a super reach effect is KD, and the font size of the decorative pattern (small) after it develops into a super reach effect. is KS.

Comparing the font sizes of the title characters in this form, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the low base strong reach A performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. , the font size FK of the title characters for the low base strong reach B performance and the low base strong reach C performance is a larger font size than the font size FJ of the title characters for the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. . Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters for the low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production is the same as the low base weak reach A production, low base weak The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the title characters of the reach B effect.

In addition, the font size FSK of the title text of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performance A, low base strong reach performance B, and low base weak reach C performance, is the low base strong reach performance A, The font size is larger than the font size FK of the title characters of the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters for the low base strongest reach effect constitutes the title characters for the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the font size FJ of the title characters for the low base weak reach A effect, the low base weak reach B effect, the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base weak reach B effect. The font size FK of the title characters for the base strong reach C effect and the font size FSK of the title characters for the low base strongest reach effect are both smaller than the font size KD of the decorative pattern (large) before it develops into the super reach effect. The font size is larger than the font size KS of the decorative pattern (small) after it is developed into a super reach effect. In addition, the size of the largest character of the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A effect, the low base weak reach B effect, the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach The size of the largest font among the characters that make up the title letters for the C production, and the size of the largest font among the letters that make up the title text for the low base strongest reach production, will both develop into a super reach production. It is smaller than the size of the smallest character among the characters that can be taken by the previous decorative pattern (large), and is the smallest of the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production. Small font size, size of the smallest font among the characters that make up the title characters of low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, low base strong reach C production, low base strongest reach production The size of the smallest size of the letters that make up the title letters is larger than the size of the largest size of the letters that can be taken by the decorative design (small) after the development of the super reach effect. .

Comparing the display area sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), the low base strong reach A has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect. The display area size EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title text for the production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production are the display area size EJA of the title text for the low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production. , the display area size ESK of the title characters of the low base strongest reach performance, which is larger than EJB and has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performance A, low base strong reach performance B, and low base weak reach C performance, is the low base strong reach performance ESK. It is larger than the title character display area size EKA, EKB, and EKC for the strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance.

[About expectation level suggestion display]
FIG. 11-50 is a diagram showing the execution status of the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the super reach performance.

The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star objects and the star object, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), and the star object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

When performing the expectation level suggestion display, the performance control CPU 120 first displays five star-shaped objects in black, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), and displays the star-shaped objects indicating the expectation level. After displaying the characters ``expectation level'' to indicate that the object is a certain object, a plurality of star-shaped objects that change from black to gold are gradually changed from black to gold in order from the left side. Furthermore, when changing a star-shaped object from black to gold, the performance control CPU 120 highlights the corresponding star-shaped object and then changes it to a normal display of gold.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-50(B), the production control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the star-shaped object whose color changes, changes its color to white so that it shines from the center to its periphery, and The entire enlarged object changes to white until it disappears, and then a star-shaped object with the entire object or half of it changed to gold is displayed. In particular, for the second to third star-shaped objects, a part of the enlarged star-shaped object is a part of the text "Expectation Level" to indicate that the star-shaped object indicates the level of expectation. Expand it to a size that overlaps with. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 performs highlighted display in a common manner both when changing from a black star-shaped object to the entire star-shaped object to gold, and when changing half of the star-shaped object to gold.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), when changing a plurality of star-shaped objects to gold, the production control CPU 120 waits until the highlighting of the star-shaped object that has started highlighting first has finished. At a timing (t1) before the normal display, the highlighted display of the star-shaped object next to the star object is started. On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 does not start highlighting the star-shaped object that is two adjacent to it until the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the star-shaped object that has started highlighting first ends; At the timing (t2) when the highlighted display of the star-shaped object that started is completed, the highlighted display of the star-shaped object two adjacent stars is started. In other words, two adjacent star-shaped objects are highlighted at the same time, but three star-shaped objects are not highlighted at the same time.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the production control CPU 120 outputs the expectation level suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the timing when the highlighting of the star-shaped object starts, and also outputs the expectation level suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and displays the multiple star-shaped objects. When changing an object to gold, the output of the expectation level suggestion sound that accompanies the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first is ended before the highlighting of the next star-shaped object starts, and then the next star-shaped object is highlighted. The sound that suggests the level of expectation accompanying the highlighting of the star-shaped object is no longer overlapped with the output.

[About selection effects]
FIG. 11-51 is a diagram showing the execution status of the selection effect. The selection performance is any type of super when directly executing the low base strong reach A to C performance or the low base strongest reach performance without going through the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance from the normal reach performance. This is a performance that specifies whether the reach performance will be executed.

When the selection performance is executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes the normal reach performance as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h1), and then controls the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h2). A window is displayed within the display area of , and the title of the selected performance is displayed within the window. In the title of the selection effect, the message "Upgrade your reach!" is displayed, suggesting that the selection effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the performance control CPU 120 displays the title image of the super reach performance in the window, a button image imitating the push button 31B, and continuous operation of the push button 31B. An operation promotion image consisting of operation promotion characters "Continuously press!" is displayed. The title image of the super reach effect is an image with the same content as the display content of the title display period in the title display part of each super reach effect, and the title images of the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strongest reach effect are , an expectation level suggestion display is also displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 uses the title image of the low base weak reach A performance, which has a jackpot expectation of 0 and has the lowest expectation of development to other super reach performances, as the title image of the super reach performance displayed in the window. is first displayed, and each time the push button 31B is operated a number of times corresponding to the title image of the displayed super reach effect, the super reach effect corresponding to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is displayed. Switch to the title image of the next super reach effect until the title image is reached.

As shown in Figures 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the title image of the super reach effect displayed in the window is the low base weak reach effect A effect, which has the lowest expectations for development into other super reach effects. After the title image, the expectation of development to other super reach performances is higher than the low base weak reach A performance.The title image of the low base weak reach B performance, the expectation of jackpot is higher than the low base weak reach A and B performances. Title image of low base strong reach A performance, title image of low base strong reach B performance with higher jackpot expectation than low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach with higher jackpot expectation than B performance The title image of the C performance is switched in order, and the title image of the low base strong reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performance, is switched in order.

Then, when the title image of the super reach effect corresponds to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 presses a push button a number of times corresponding to the title image of the displayed super reach effect. When the operation of 31B is detected, as shown in Figure 11-51 (h9), a confirmed image is displayed in which the operation promotion image disappears and only the title image of the super reach effect is displayed in the window. It is notified that the super reach performance of the title image will be executed, and then the transition is made to the title display part of the super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-52, the number of times the push button 3B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance is three times, and from the title image of the low base weak reach B performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance. The number of times the push button 31B is operated to switch to the title image for the low base strong reach A performance is 4, and the number of times the push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image for the low base strong reach A performance to the title image for the low base strong reach B performance is 8. The number of times the push button 31B was operated was 10 times to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong reach C effect, and from the title image of the low base strong reach C effect to the title of the low base strongest reach effect. The number of times the push button 31B is operated to switch to the image is 15 times, and the more the developing attitude of the super reach effect of the title image to be switched to other super reach effects or the jackpot expectation level increases, the more it is necessary to switch to the next title image. This increases the number of times the push button 31B is operated, and it becomes necessary to operate the push button 31B many times.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-52, when the selection effect is executed, the low base weak reach effects A and B are never executed, and the jackpot expectation level is always higher than the low base strong reach effect A. It has been confirmed that the super reach effect will be executed, and the proportion that the low base strong reach effect will be executed is approximately 32.18%, the proportion that the low base strong reach effect B effect will be executed is approximately 30.16%, and the low base strong reach effect is approximately 30.16%. The rate at which the strong reach C effect is executed is about 30.30%, and the rate at which the low base strongest reach effect is executed is about 7.36%.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 will also display an expectation level suggestion display in the same way as the title display part in the title image of the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach production in the selected production. In the expectation level suggestion display in the part, five star-shaped objects are displayed in black, and multiple star-shaped objects that change from black to gold are gradually changed from black to gold in order from the left side. , In the expectation level suggestion display displayed in the selected performance, out of the five star-shaped objects, the number of star-shaped objects indicating the expectation level of the corresponding super reach performance is displayed in a golden state from the beginning. .

The minimum time required to switch from the title image of the super reach effect displayed in the selected effect to the title image of the next super reach effect is the number of times corresponding to the title image of the super reach effect plus one press of the push button 31B. This is the time multiplied by the time required for the operation. The time required for one operation of the push button 31B is approximately 80 ms, and it is necessary to operate the push button 31B three times when switching from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect. The minimum time required for this is approximately 240 ms.

On the other hand, in the expectation level suggestion display of the title display part, the time for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold after being highlighted, that is, the time for the suggested expectation level to change by one level, is approximately 300 ms, and the low base weak reach A It is set longer than the minimum time required to switch from the title image of the performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance. Therefore, in the selection performance, the performance control CPU 120 changes the title image of the low base weak reach A performance to the low base weak reach A performance in a time shorter than the time for the expectation level suggested in the expectation level suggestion display of the title display part to change by one level. It becomes possible to switch to the title image with weak reach B effect.

[About effects that can be executed during variable display]
FIG. 11-53 is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during variable display. As shown in FIG. 11-53, effects that can be executed during variable display include explanatory text display effects, title color change effects, and operation promotion effects A to D.

The explanatory text display performance is a performance that can be executed during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances, and is a performance that displays an explanatory text that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high.

The title color change performance is a performance that can be executed during the title display period in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance and B performance, and is a performance that changes the color of the title characters from the original white to red or gold.

Operation promotion performance A is a performance that can be performed in the normal reach performance, displays an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the push button 31B, and develops into the low base weak reach performance A and B in response to the operation of the push button 31B. This is a performance that announces whether or not it is true. In addition, in the operation promotion performance A, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, it is possible to develop not only the low base weak reach performance A and B performance, but also the low base strong reach performance A to C and the low base strongest reach performance. good.

Operation promotion performance B is a performance that can be executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach performances A and B, and displays an operation promotion image (small) or operation promotion image (large) that prompts the operation of the push button 31B. This is a performance that informs whether or not the low base strong reach performance will develop into one of the low base strong reach performances A to C in response to the operation of the push button 31B. In addition, in a configuration in which a jackpot is announced as a performance result in the low base weak reach performances A and B, in the operation promotion performance B, the performance result as to whether or not it is a jackpot is notified in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B. It may also be used as a configuration.

Operation promotion performance C is a performance that can be executed in the middle of the introduction part of the low base strong reach A to C performances and the strongest reach performance, and displays an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the push button 31B, and prompts the user to operate the push button 31B. This is an effect that displays one of a plurality of types of cut-in images depending on the cut-in image.

The operation promotion performance D is a performance that can be executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach performances A and B, and displays an operation promotion image (small) or an operation promotion image (large) that prompts the operation of the push button 31B. This is a performance that notifies the performance result of whether or not there is a jackpot in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the explanatory text display effect during variable display, whether to execute the title color change effect and to which color it should be changed, and whether to execute the operation promotion effect A. , whether to display the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) in the operation promotion effect B, whether to execute the operation promotion effect C, and the cut-in image (A) or the cut-in image (B) It is determined in the preview effect determination process of the variable display start setting process whether to display the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) in the operation promotion effect D.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (A), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which low base strong reach effects A to C are executed is specified, whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect is determined. is determined. At this time, if a variation pattern that results in a negative performance result is identified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is specified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution is determined at a rate of 80%. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, execution of the explanatory text display performance is determined at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a loss is identified, so the low base strong reach A The explanatory text display performance is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part of the ~C performance, thereby suggesting that there is a high possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the explanatory text display effect is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part, and regardless of whether or not the explanatory text display effect is executed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. First, although the execution time of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the execution time of the title display part do not change, the first variation pattern is used as a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach effects A to C are executed. a second fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the first fluctuation pattern, and when the first fluctuation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display effect is not executed and the second fluctuation pattern is specified. In this case, the explanatory text display effect may be executed using a variation time set longer than the first variation pattern. In such a configuration, it is not determined whether or not to execute the explanatory text display performance in the preview performance determination process, but the explanatory text is determined based on whether the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern is specified. It is determined whether or not to execute the display effect. At this time, by determining the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern so that when the explanatory text display effect is executed, the expectation level of jackpot is higher than when the explanatory display effect is not executed, the low base strong reach The explanatory text display effect is executed in the title display part of the A to C effects, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (B), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which low base weak reach A and B effects are executed is specified, whether or not to execute the title color change effect is determined. Also, when executing the title color change effect, it is determined which color to change to. At this time, if a variation pattern in which the production result is off is identified, non-execution (white) is determined at a rate of 80%, execution (red) is determined at a 20% rate, and execution (gold) is determined at a rate of 20%. Not determined. In addition, if a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, 20% of the time it will not be executed (white), and 75% of the time it will be executed (red ) is determined, and execution (money) is determined at a rate of 5%. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C production or a low base strongest reach production is identified, title color change production is executed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that deviates from the production is identified. Since it has been decided that the color of the title letters will change in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B performances, there is a high possibility that it will develop into the low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance. It is suggested. In addition, execution (Friday) is determined only when a variation pattern that develops into the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect is identified, so in the title display part of the low base strong reach effects A and B. By changing the color of the title letters to gold, it is confirmed that the low base strong reach effects A to C will develop into the low base strongest reach effects.

In addition, in a configuration that includes a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after execution of the low base weak reach effects A and B, if a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, a variation that results in a loss. It is decided to execute the title color change effect at a higher rate than when a pattern is identified, and the color of the title letters changes in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B effects, indicating that there is a high possibility of a jackpot. may be suggested. In addition, in such a configuration, execution (gold) is determined only when a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, and the color of the title letters changes to gold in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B effects. The jackpot may be confirmed by doing so.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (C), in the preview performance determination process, if a variation pattern that deviates from the normal reach performance or a variation pattern that develops from the normal reach performance to the low base weak reach performances A and B is identified. , it is determined whether or not to execute the operation promotion effect A. At this time, if a variation pattern that is out of line is identified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, when a variation pattern that develops into low base weak reach A and B effects is specified, execution is determined at a rate of 100%. In this way, execution is always decided when a variation pattern that develops into low base weak reach A and B performances is identified, and execution may also be decided when a variation pattern that is out of reach is identified. , it is suggested that when the operation promotion performance A is executed in the normal reach performance, it may develop into low base weak reach performances A and B.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (D), in the preview performance determination process, there is a variation pattern in which the performance results of the low base weak reach A and B performances are off, and a low base strong reach from the low base weak reach A and B performances. When a variation pattern that develops into the A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance is specified, it is determined which of the operation promotion image (small) or operation promotion image (large) is to be displayed. At this time, if a deviation pattern is identified, the operation promotion image (small) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the operation promotion image (large) is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, an operation promotion image (small) will be determined at a rate of 10%, and an operation promotion image will be promoted at a rate of 90%. The image (large) is determined. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, the operation promotion image (small) is used at a higher rate than when a deviation pattern is identified. Since the operation promotion image (large) is determined among the operation promotion images (large) and the operation promotion image (large), the operation promotion image (large) is displayed in the operation promotion performance B at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. In this case, it is suggested that the possibility of developing into the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance is higher than when the operation promotion image (small) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (E), in the preview performance determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance are specified, the operation promotion performance C It is determined whether to execute the cut-in image (A) or the cut-in image (B) when the operation promotion effect C is executed. At this time, if a variation pattern that results in a different performance result is identified, 50% of the time it will be decided not to execute it, 30% of the time it will be decided to execute it (cut-in image (A)), and 20% of the time it will be decided not to execute it. Execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined based on the ratio. In addition, when a variation pattern in which the production result is a jackpot is identified, non-execution is decided at a rate of 5%, execution (cut-in image (A)) is decided at a rate of 30%, and execution is decided at a rate of 65%. Execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, the execution of the operation promotion performance C is determined at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a loss is identified, so the low base strong reach A The operation promotion performance C is executed at the end of the introduction part in the ~C performance, which suggests that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot. In addition, when a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, a higher percentage of the cut-in image (A) and cut-in image (B) than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a loss is identified. B) is displayed, so when the operation promotion performance C is executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach performance A to C and the cut-in image (B) is displayed, the cut-in image (A) is displayed. This suggests that there is a higher possibility of hitting the jackpot than if the player were to win the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (F), in the preview performance determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strongest reach effect are specified, the operation promotion image ( It is determined whether to display the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large). At this time, if a variation pattern that results in a negative performance result is identified, an operation promotion image (small) is determined at a rate of 90%, and an operation promotion image (large) is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is specified, an operation promotion image (small) is determined at a rate of 10%, and an operation promotion image (large) is determined at a rate of 90%. In this way, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, a higher percentage of operation promotion images (small) and operation promotion images (large) are selected than when a variation pattern that results in a loss is identified. Since the image (large) is determined, when the operation promotion image (large) is displayed in the operation promotion performance D at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance, the operation promotion image (large) is displayed. It is suggested that there is a higher possibility of winning the jackpot than when the image (small) is displayed.

[About explanatory text display]
FIG. 11-55 is a diagram showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect, and FIG. 11-56 is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect. .

The performance control CPU 120 displays the ally character "Yumemu" as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (A) to (I) during the prologue display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances. After that, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled, and when an explanatory text is displayed during the prologue display period, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed in front of the background. Display the explanatory characters ``Surprise!'', ``Peach Tree'', and ``Big Lucky!'' that make up the explanatory text in order on the layer. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 first displays the explanatory characters "Surprise!" while moving them leftward at high speed from the right side of the display area toward the center, as shown in FIG. 11-55 (A). 11-56 (t1)), as shown in Figure 11-55 (B), when it is moved near the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at low speed (Figure 11-56 (t2)), and then , as shown in FIG. 11-55(C), it is displayed while moving leftward at high speed again until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56(t3)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-55(D), the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory characters "Peach Tree" while moving them leftward at high speed from the right side of the display area toward the center (FIG. 11-55(D)). -56 (t4)), as shown in Figure 11-55 (E), when it is moved near the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at low speed (Figure 11-56 (t5)), and then, As shown in FIG. 11-55 (F), it is displayed again while moving leftward at high speed until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56 (t6)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-55(G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory characters "Big Lucky!" while moving them leftward at high speed from the right side of the display area toward the center (FIG. 11-55(G)). -56 (t7)), as shown in Figure 11-55 (H), when it is moved near the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at low speed (Figure 11-56 (t8)), and then, As shown in FIG. 11-55 (I), it is displayed again while moving leftward at high speed until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56 (t9)).

[About title color change effect]
FIG. 11-57 is a diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect, and FIG. 11-58 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in the title color change effect.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute a title color change performance that changes white title characters to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the production control CPU 120 causes a part of the white title characters to appear from the left side of the display area during the title start period, move them toward the home position, and move them toward the home position. Make it stand still. Thereafter, during the title display period, the performance control CPU 120 displays the white title characters in a fixed position as shown in FIG. 11-57(A). Then, when the execution of the title color change effect has not been determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R after the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, and outputs the specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, as shown in FIG. -57 (B) (C) As shown in (B) and (C), the white title character is kept stationary in the fixed position, and then the white title character displayed in the fixed position is moved from the fixed position during the title end period. Move the title characters to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear.

On the other hand, when the execution of the title color change effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R after the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, and also outputs the specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as shown in FIG. As shown in -57 (D), if the title characters displayed in a fixed position are changed to appear to glow, and after the time t2 has elapsed, it is determined that the title characters will change to red. As shown in Figure 11-57 (E), the title characters are changed to red, and if the change to gold is determined, the title characters are changed to gold, as shown in Figure 11-57 (F). After that, the title characters are moved from the regular position to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear while maintaining the changed color displayed at the regular position during the title end period. When the title characters are changed from a glowing appearance to red or gold, the title characters change to red or gold when the light on the title characters becomes clear.

As shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and (B), in the low base weak reach A and B effects, the presentation time T1 of the title start period of the title display part is 500ms, the presentation time T2 of the title display period is 2200ms, and the title end. The presentation time T3 of the period is set to 300 ms, and the time t1 from the start of the title display period until the title characters change to appear to glow is 800 ms. The time t2 from which the title characters change to red or gold after changing to a visible mode is set to 200 ms, and the time t3 from which the title characters change to red or gold until the title display period ends is set to 1200 ms. There is.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 11-58 (C), when the color of the title character changes from white to red or gold, the time (t1) at which the title character is displayed in white during the title display period Also, during the title display period, the time (t3) during which the title characters are displayed in red or gold after the change is longer than the time (T1+t1) during which the title characters are displayed in white in the title display part. Also, the time (t3+T3) during which the title characters are displayed in the changed red or gold color in the title display part is longer.

[About operation promotion performance A]
FIG. 11-59 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion effect A.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion performance A that prompts the operation of the push button 31B in the normal reach performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the operation promotion performance A, as shown in FIGS. , an operation promotion image (small) consisting of a button image (small) imitating the push button 31B and operation promotion characters (small) "Press!" urging operation of the push button 31B is displayed.

A remaining time meter is formed on the button image (small) and indicates the remaining time of the valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid. When the operation of the push button 31B is detected or the remaining time meter becomes 0, in the case of a fluctuation pattern that develops into low base weak reach A and B effects, as shown in Figure 11-59 (C) , a white-out effect is executed to display the entire display area in white, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-59(D), low base weak reach A and B effects are executed.

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a miss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation promotion image (small) and stops the decorative pattern (large) in a miss state, as shown in FIG. 11-59 (E). let

[About operation promotion performance B]
FIG. 11-60 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion effect B.

In the low base weak reach performances A and B, the performance control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion performance B that prompts the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part.

When it is decided to execute the operation promotion effect B and it is decided to display the operation promotion image (small), the effect control CPU 120 executes the introduction part as shown in FIG. 11-60(A). At the end of the process, an operation promotion image (small) consisting of a button image (small) imitating the push button 31B and operation promotion characters (small) "Press!" urging the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed.

In addition, when it has been decided to execute the operation promotion effect B and it has been decided to display the operation promotion image (large), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect shown in FIGS. 11-60 (B) and (C). This is an image imitating the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part, with a button image (large) larger in size than the button image (small) and operation promotion letters (large) that prompt the operation of the push button 31B: "Press! ” Displays an operation promotion image (large). At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-60(B), the production control CPU 120 displays a plurality of button images (large) with transparent backgrounds, unlike the case where the operation promotion image (small) is displayed. After performing a promotion introduction effect in which these multiple button images (large) are combined into one button image (large), the button image (large) and the operation promotion text (large) that urges the operation of the push button 31B "Press!" Display an operation promotion image (large) consisting of:

A remaining time meter is formed in both the button image (small) and the button image (large), and the performance control CPU 120 detects the operation of the push button 31B until the remaining time meter reaches 0. Or, when the remaining amount of time on the remaining time meter reaches 0, in the case of a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach effect A to C and a low base strongest reach effect, the operation as shown in Figure 11-60 (D). The promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) is erased, a falling effect is performed in which the movable body 32 falls, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-60(E), the low base strong reach A to C is performed. Performance, execute low base strongest reach performance.

On the other hand, in the case of a deviation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) and erases the entire display area, as shown in FIG. 11-60 (F). After that, as shown in FIG. 11-60(G), a failure is announced as a result of the effect.

[About operation promotion performance C]
FIG. 11-61 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation promotion effect C.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion performance C that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B in the middle of the introduction part in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance.

When execution of the operation promotion performance C is determined, the performance control CPU 120 displays a button image (small size) imitating the push button 31B in the middle of the introduction part, as shown in FIGS. ) and operation prompting characters (small) "Press!" prompting the user to operate the push button 31B.

The effect control CPU 120 is determined to display the cut-in image (A), and if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, the CPU 120 displays the cut-in image (A) in FIG. 11-61 ( As shown in Figure 11-61 (F), after erasing the operation promotion image (small) and displaying the cut-in image (A) in which the ally character "Nana" is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-61 (F). , carry out the continuation of the introductory part.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 has been determined to display the cut-in image (B), and if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, then as shown in FIG. As shown in Figure 11-61(D), after the operation promotion image (small) is erased and the cut-in image (B) in which the ally character "Jam" is displayed is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-61(F). , continue the introductory part.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 also controls the remaining time meter when it is determined to display the cut-in image (A) and when it is determined to display the cut-in image (B). If no operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining amount reaches 0, the operation promotion image (small) is deleted while the middle part of the introduction part continues to be played, as shown in Figure 11-61(E). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-61(F), the continuation of the introduction part is executed.

[About operation promotion performance D]
FIG. 11-62 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation promotion effect D.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion performance D that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance.

When it is determined that the operation promotion image (small) is to be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a button that imitates the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part, as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (A) and (B). An operation promotion image (small) consisting of a button image (small) and operation promotion characters (small) "Press!" urging operation of the push button 31B is displayed.

In addition, when it is determined that the operation promotion image (large) is to be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 presses the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part, as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (A) and (G). Displays an operation promotion image (large) that is a simulated image and consists of a button image (large) that is larger in size than the button image (small) and operation promotion characters (large) that prompt the user to operate the push button 31B, ``Press!'' let At this time, unlike the case where the operation promotion image (small) is displayed, the production control CPU 120 displays a plurality of button images (large) whose backgrounds are transparent, and these plural button images (large) are combined into one button. After performing a promotion introduction effect that is organized into images (large) (see Figure 11-60 (B)), a button image (large) and operation promotion characters (large) urging the user to operate the push button 31B are made, ``Press!'' Display the operation promotion image (large).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern in which a jackpot is reached if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining amount of the remaining time meter reaches 0, or the remaining amount of the remaining time meter becomes 0, the performance control CPU 120 performs As shown in 11-62 (C) and (H), a rainbow effect is performed in which a rainbow-colored pattern swirls over the entire display area while the operation promotion image (small) or operation promotion image (large) gradually disappears, and then , as shown in FIGS. 11-62(D) and (I), a jackpot is announced as a performance result.

On the other hand, in the case of a deviation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large), as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (E) and (J). A darkening effect is executed to darken the entire display area, and then, as shown in FIGS. 11-62(F) and (K), a failure is notified as a result of the effect.

[About operation promotion images]
FIG. 11-63 is a diagram showing a display mode of the operation promotion image. The performance control CPU 120 displays the button images constituting the operation promotion image (small) and the operation promotion image (large) while alternately and continuously moving in the left and right directions, as shown in FIG. 11-63 (A). At the same time, the button is displayed while continuously changing between a state in which the button is not pressed and a state in which the button is pressed. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-63(B), the interval at which the button image moves in the horizontal direction and the interval at which the button changes from not being pressed to being pressed are different, and the button image The motion of moving in the left-right direction and the motion of changing the state in which the button is not pressed and the state in which the button is pressed are not synchronized, resulting in a complicated movement.

[About the jackpot start performance]
FIG. 11-64 is a diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-64(A), the production control CPU 120 stops the decorative pattern (large) in the jackpot mode, and then issues a jackpot start designation command that specifies display of a production image indicating the start of the jackpot game state. When received, a jackpot start effect is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image that moves like a flickering flame as the background during the jackpot start effect, as shown in FIGS. As shown in Figure 11-64 (B), first the first half of the title character "BIG (REG)" of the jackpot title character "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" is displayed in an enlarged size, and then As shown in C), the first half of the title character "BIG (REG)" is gradually reduced to a reduced size that is visible in its entirety in the display area, and is displayed at a fixed position above the center of the display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-64 (D), the performance control CPU 120 displays the second half of the title characters "BONUS" of the title characters "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" of the jackpot title in an enlarged size. After that, as shown in Figure 11-64 (E), the second half of the title character "BONUS" is gradually reduced to a reduced size that makes it visible in its entirety in the display area, and then moved to a fixed position near the center of the display area. Display it at the bottom (below the first half of the title "BIG").

In this embodiment, when starting a jackpot game state where the jackpot type is 6 rounds, "REG BONUS" is displayed as the title character, and when starting a jackpot game state where the jackpot type is 10 rounds, Display "BIG BONUS" as the title text.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-64 (E) to (G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire title character "BIG BONUS" in a fixed position, and then gradually enlarges the title character "BIG BONUS". Then, as shown in FIG. 11-64(H), the jackpot effect is started and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the background of the jackpot game state.

When the production control CPU 120 starts the jackpot production, first, as shown in FIG. Display the hitting promotion image (small).

The right-hitting promotion image (small) is composed of a message "Right-hitting" (small) that urges an operation to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, and an arrow image (small) indicating the right direction, and is used for performance control. As shown in FIGS. 11-64 (H) and (I), the CPU 120 displays a right-hand hitting promotion image (small) from the upper right of the display area over a period from the start of the jackpot performance until the end of the jackpot game state. Display it at the position.

The right-handed hitting promotion image (large) is a message that prompts the user to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, and the message "Right-handed hitting" (large), which is larger than the right-handed hitting promotion image (small), It is an arrow that indicates a direction and is composed of an arrow image (large) that is larger in size than the arrow image (small), and the production control CPU 120 is configured to detect the jackpot as shown in FIGS. 11-64 (H) and (I). A right-handed hitting promotion image (large) is repeatedly displayed in a manner of moving from the left side to the right side of the display area only for the first certain period of time after the start of the medium performance until the end of the jackpot game state.

In addition, when the jackpot game state is controlled, after the title character is displayed in the jackpot start performance, it is switched to the jackpot middle performance, and the operation method for the jackpot game state (operation method for launching the game ball toward the right game area 2R) ) A right-handed hitting promoting image (small) and a right-handed hitting promoting image (large) are displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 is operated on the main board 11 side at a timing a predetermined time before the timing at which control is performed that is advantageous by operating the game ball in an operation method that launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R. Switch to the jackpot performance and display a right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and a right-handed hitting promotion image (large). For this reason, it is advantageous to operate the game ball in an operation method that launches the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R after a predetermined period of time has passed since the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (large) were displayed. Control will be implemented.

In addition, after the title character is displayed in the jackpot start performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the title in the title display part of the super reach performance when the jackpot start performance is ended, the title character is erased, and the next performance is switched. To erase the title characters of a jackpot start performance and switch to the next performance in a shorter time than when the title characters are erased during the end period.

In particular, after the title character is displayed in the jackpot start performance, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the mid-jackpot performance in one frame (minimum unit of image update), and displays a right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and a right-handed hitting promotion image. (Large) is displayed. In the title display part of the super reach performance, the title end period is set instead of one frame, and the title characters are erased over a certain amount of time. , and when displaying an image promoting right-handed hitting (small) and an image promoting right-handed hitting (large), if the title character is similarly configured to be erased over a certain amount of time, the title character will be erased. During some period of time, there is a risk that the operation method will be used to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, but if you launch the gaming ball toward the right gaming area 2R at this timing, the game ball may still be launched toward the right gaming area 2R. Since the control that is advantageous by operating with the operating method of launching the ball toward the area 2R has not started, the game ball will be wasted. On the other hand, after the title character is displayed in the jackpot start performance, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the mid-jackpot performance in one frame (minimum unit of image update), and displays the right-hitting promotion image (small) and the right-hitting promotion image (small). Since the promotion image (large) is displayed, it is possible to suppress the generation of useless game balls.

[About the display of the number of remaining spins until play time]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by jackpot in a low accuracy state, (1) time saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low accuracy control is performed. The time saving state B is controlled to be performed 1100 times (in this embodiment, the play time is performed 1100 times).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the remaining number of times to reach rescue time saving (hereinafter referred to as the remaining number of times until play time) 131SG005Z, which is the remaining variable display number until the image display device 5 is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). (See Figure 11-1) can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(A), the performance control CPU 120 executes the normal reach performance, low base weak reach performance A and B performance, low base strong reach performance A to C performance, and low base strongest reach performance in the normal state. If the game is not running, the number of remaining play times is displayed at the top left of the display area. The remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is displayed as "XXX times remaining" (XXX is a numerical value from 0 to 900 depending on the remaining number of times). At this time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900, the number of times remaining until play time 131SG005Z is displayed in characters of the same font size.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(B), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z even during the execution of the normal reach performance in which the decorative pattern (large) is in the ready-to-reach mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (C), when the normal reach performance develops into the low base weak reach performances A and B, the performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance during execution of the low base weak reach performances A and B. Continue to display the remaining number of times until the time 131SG005Z. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 11-65(D) and (E), when a loss is reported as a result of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 controls the low base weak reach A. , The remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z continues to be displayed even after the B effect ends.

In addition, the configuration is such that a jackpot can be announced as a result of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and when a jackpot is announced as a result of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the low base weak reach A and B The remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z is continuously displayed until the performance ends, and the remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z is erased at the end of the low base weak reach A and B performances. Incidentally, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z may be erased at the time when content that confirms a jackpot is displayed as a result of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (F), the performance control CPU 120 is configured to control the performance when the normal reach performance, low base weak reach A, B performance develops into low base strong reach A to C performance, and low base strongest reach performance. Then, with the start of the low base strong reach performance A to C and the low base strongest reach performance, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is erased. At this time, the production control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z at the timing when the selection production starts when the production progresses from the normal reach production, and when the production progresses from the low base weak reach production A and B. , If it is a low base strong reach effect A to C, during the prologue display period of the title display part, the remaining number of play times 131SG005Z will be erased along with the pending display and active display, and if it is a low base strongest reach effect, the title will be displayed. At the start of the part, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is erased.

In addition, when developing from the low base weak reach effects A and B, the hold display and activation will occur at the timing when the falling effect starts (timing shown in Figure 11-60 (D)) as the operation promotion effect B is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is erased along with the display. As a result, regardless of whether it develops into a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, the timing for erasing the stay display, active display, and number of remaining times until play time 131SG005Z can be made the same. .

Thereafter, when a failure is reported as a result of the low base strong reach performance A to C and the low base strongest reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the low base reach performance as shown in FIGS. 11-65 (G) and (H). After the strong base reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance are finished, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is displayed again. On the other hand, when a jackpot is announced as a result of the low base strong reach A to C performances or the low base strongest reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the next time as shown in FIGS. 11-65(I)(J). , the remaining number of play times 131SG005Z remains erased until the normal state is reached.

In addition, if operation promotion performance A is configured to develop into low base strong reach performances A to C and low base strongest reach performance according to the operation of the push button 31B, during execution of operation promotion performance A, the play time It is sufficient to continue displaying the remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z and erase the remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z with the start of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect. In such a configuration, in the operation promotion performance A, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is displayed, while the subsequent operation promotion performances in the low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance In C and D, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is not displayed.

[About play time start performance]
The game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time saving state B (play time) when variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled by jackpot in a low probability state. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-66(C), the game control microcomputer 100 lights up the right-handed lamp 131SG132 and sends a right-handed LED lighting notification command, and then the performance control CPU 120 As shown in Figures 11-66 (A) and (B), when the variable display stops when the remaining number of play times is 0, and the right-hand hit LED lighting notification command is received, Figure 11-66 (C) As shown in , a right-hitting promotion image (small) is displayed that prompts an operation to hit a game ball toward the right game area 2R. The timing of lighting up the right-handed playing lamp 131SG132 and the timing of displaying the right-handed playing promotion image (small) are almost the same time, but the game control microcomputer 100 lights up the right-handed playing lamp 131SG132 and then displays the right-handed playing promotion image (small). The LED lighting notification command is sent, and the performance control CPU 120 accordingly displays the right-handed hitting promotion image (small), so the right-handed hitting lamp 131SG132 lights up before the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) is displayed. becomes.

When the game control microcomputer 100 starts the time saving state B (play time), it keeps the right-handed lamp 131SG132 lit until the time saving state B (play time) ends. In addition, the right-hitting promotion image (small) is composed of a message "right-handed hitting" (small) that urges an operation to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, and an arrow image (small) indicating the right direction. As shown in FIGS. 11-66 (C) to (H), the performance control CPU 120 displays the right-handed hitting promotion image when the time-saving state B (play time) starts, until the time-saving state B (play time) ends. (Small) is displayed in a position closer to the upper right of the display area.

When the variable display stops when the remaining number of times until the play time is 0 and the performance control CPU 120 receives a game state designation command that designates the time saving state B (play time), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance changes from FIG. 11-66 (D) to As shown in (G), a play time start effect is executed.

The play time start effect includes a title start period from when a part of the title characters "Enter play time" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed at a fixed position, and a title character "Enter play time". The title display period includes a title display period in which the title characters "Run in" are displayed at a fixed position, and a title end period until the display of the title characters "Enter in play time" which had been displayed in the fixed position disappears and the display switches to play time production.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title character "6" during the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the play time start performance, and the title display period, title display period, and title end period of the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance. The title character ``Enter play time'' is displayed in the same manner as when displaying ``Catch Bakushu with people!''.

Specifically, during the title start period, the performance control CPU 120 enlarges the title characters "Enter play time" to an enlarged size such that only some of the characters are visible in the display area, as shown in FIG. 11-66 (D). Display it in . At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display area to be displayed in such a manner that the entire display area is completely filled with a part of the title characters "Enter play time". Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-66(D) and (E), the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the title character "Enter play time" so that all characters of the title character "Enter play time" are displayed in the display area. The title characters ``Enter play time'', which have been reduced in size and become visible, are made to stand still in a fixed position.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "entering play time" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period, the performance control CPU 120 causes the title characters "Enter play time" to remain displayed at a fixed position as shown in FIGS. 11-66(E) and (F).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period, the production control CPU 120 replaces the title characters "Enter play time" displayed in the reduced size at the regular position as shown in FIGS. Expand the display area until the display area is completely filled by a part of "Rush". In this case, instead of being enlarged and displayed in the opposite manner to the case where the title character "Enter play time" is displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, the title character "Enter play time" is displayed in a reduced size during the title start period. In a manner different from the reverse aspect, the title character "Enter play time" is enlarged until the display area is entirely filled with a part of the title character "Enter play time". In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title character takes during the process of shrinking the title character "Yu-time rush" in the title start period is the same as the trajectory that each part of the title character takes as the title character "Yu-time rush" expands during the title end period. is different. For this reason, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Enter play time" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-66(H), the background of the play time effect is switched to and the play time effect is started.

During the play time start performance, the production control CPU 120 displays a right-handed promotion image (large) that urges an operation to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, in addition to the right-handed promotion image (small), and An image to warn people against getting addicted (message "Beware of getting addicted!") is displayed at the bottom of the display area.

The right-handed hitting promotion image (large) is a message that prompts the user to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, and the message "Right-handed hitting" (large), which is larger than the right-handed hitting promotion image (small), It is an arrow indicating a direction and is composed of an arrow image (large) which is larger in size than the arrow image (small), and the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. A right-handed hitting promotion image (large) is repeatedly displayed in a manner of moving from the left side to the right side of the display area over the period in which the play time start effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the time saving state B, and when the variable display result is off, it selects the variation pattern PA1-4 with a special figure variation time of 500 ms. A variable display is performed, and the time saving state B is controlled, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern PB1-18 with a special figure variation time of 500 ms + 15000 ms is selected to perform a variable display, and the production control CPU 120 is configured to execute the play time start effect during the period in which the variable display based on these variable patterns is performed when the time saving state B control starts, but the game control microcomputer 100 In the first variable display controlled to , that is, after controlling to time saving state B, in the variable display based on the game ball winning in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole, the variable display result is a loss. In this case, the time saving B start variation pattern which has a longer variation time than the variation pattern PA1-4 and which has a variable time corresponding to the play time start effect is selected and variable display is performed, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the time reduction state. In the first variable display controlled by B, the play time start effect may be executed during the period when the variable display according to the time saving B start variation pattern is being performed. In addition, in such a configuration, when the variable display result is a jackpot in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state B, the game control microcomputer 100 changes the special figure variation time to the variation pattern PB1-18 of 500ms+15000ms. In addition to performing a variable display, the performance control CPU 120 may stop the decorative symbol (large) in a jackpot mode without executing the play time start performance.

[About title characters, etc. 1]
Figure 11-67 shows the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the explanatory characters of the explanatory text display performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion performance (small), and the operation promotion performance (small). It is a figure which shows one form of the relationship of the operation promotion character (large) in large).

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the title characters of the super reach effect are displayed in a stationary state during the title display period, and the background image at that time is a still image (low base strong reach B, C effect, low Strongest base reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) or action image (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A performance). In addition, the number of characters in the title character of the super reach effect is 7 to 13 characters, and the display time of the title character of the super reach effect (after all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed, at least part of the character string is The time until it disappears) is LR, the font size of the title characters of the super reach effect is FR, and the display area size in which the title characters of the super reach effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the explanatory characters are displayed in a moving state, and the background image at that time is a moving image. In addition, the number of explanatory characters is 3 to 6 characters, and the display time of the explanatory character (one explanatory character out of three explanatory characters) (all the character strings that make up the explanatory character are displayed) The time from when at least part of the character string is no longer displayed) is LS, the font size of the explanatory character is FS, and the explanatory character (one explanatory character out of three explanatory characters) is displayed. The display area size is ES.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed in a moving state, and the background image at that time is a moving image. In addition, the number of characters in the title character of the jackpot start effect is 8 characters, and the display time of the title character of the jackpot start effect (after all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed, at least a part of the character string is not displayed) The time until) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is FB, and the display area size in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is EB.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed in a moving state, and the background image at that time is a moving image. In addition, the number of characters for the operation promotion characters (small) is 3 characters, and the display time of the operation promotion characters (small) (operation promotion characters (small) are displayed without push button 31B being operated) period) is L1P, the font size of the operation promotion characters (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed is E1P.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed in a moving state, and the background image at that time is a moving image. In addition, the number of characters for the operation promotion characters (large) is 3 characters, and the display time of the operation promotion characters (large) (the operation of the push button 31B is enabled when the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed without the push button 31B being operated). period) is L2P, the font size of the operation promotion characters (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed is E2P.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display times of the title character of the super reach effect, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), and the operation promotion letter (large), Figure 11-67 (B) As shown, the display time LB of the title character of the jackpot start performance is longer than the display time LR, LS, L1P, and L2P of the title character, explanation character, operation promotion character (small), and operation promotion character (large) of the super reach performance. The display time LR of the title character of the super reach effect is longer than the display time LS, L1P, L2P of the explanation character, operation promotion character (small), operation promotion character (large), and the operation promotion character (small), The display times LS and L1P of the operation promotion characters (large) are set longer than the display time LS of the explanatory characters. In addition, the display times LR, LB, L1P, and L2P of the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), and the operation promotion letter (large) all constitute the explanatory text display effect. The display time is set longer than the display time required for all three explanatory characters to be displayed. Further, these display time relationships hold true regardless of the type of super reach performance.

In this form, when comparing the font sizes of the title text, explanatory text, title text of the jackpot start performance, operation promotion text (small), and operation promotion text (large) of the super reach effect, Figure 11-67 (C) As shown, the font size F2P of the operation promotion text (large) is larger than the font size FR, FS, FB, F1P of the title text of the super reach effect, the explanation text, the title character of the jackpot start effect, and the operation promotion text (small). Also has a large font size. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation promotion characters (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the operation promotion character ( The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the character (large).

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the font sizes FR and F1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, and operation promotion characters (small) of the super reach performance. In addition, the title characters "BIG BONUS" for the jackpot start effect will first display the first half "BIG" at the top of the regular position, then the second half "BONUS" will be displayed at the bottom of the regular position, and then the title characters "BIG BONUS" The display is gradually enlarged, and when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the characters that make up the title characters "BIG BONUS" becomes the smallest. In such a configuration, when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the regular position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the regular position, the size of the title character of the jackpot start effect is the same as the title character of the super reach effect, and the description The size of the characters is larger than that of the operation promotion characters (small). Furthermore, when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the regular position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the regular position, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is Super Reach. The size is larger than the largest size of the characters constituting the title character, explanatory character, operation promotion character (small), and operation promotion character (large) of the performance.

Furthermore, the font size FR of the title characters of the super reach effect is larger than the font sizes FS and F1P of the explanatory characters and operation promotion characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest size of the characters that make up the title text of the super reach effect is larger than the size of the largest size of the letters that make up the explanatory text and operation promotion text (small). .

Further, the font size FS of the explanatory characters is larger than the font size F1P of the operation promotion characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters constituting the explanatory characters is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the operation promotion characters (small).

Furthermore, these font size relationships and character size relationships hold true regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title text, explanatory text, title text of the jackpot start production, operation promotion text (small), and operation promotion text (large) of the super reach effect, Figure 11-67 (D) As shown in , the display area size E2P of the operation promotion text (large) is the same as the display area size ER, ES, EB of the title text of the super reach effect, the explanation text, the title text of the jackpot start effect, and the operation promotion text (small). , E1P. Furthermore, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, and E1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, and operation promotion characters (small) of the super reach performance. Furthermore, the display area size ES of the explanatory characters is larger than the display area size E1P of the operation promotion characters (small). Further, the relationship between these display area sizes holds true regardless of the type of super reach effect.

[About title characters etc. 2]
Figure 11-68 shows the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion performance (small), and the operation promotion characters (large) in the operation promotion performance (large). ), the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of times characters configuring the remaining number of times until the play time.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters of the super reach effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the character strings are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters of the super reach effect is FR, and the display area size in which the title characters of the super reach effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title character of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed until at least part of the character string is no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is FB, and the display area size in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is EB.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the operation prompting character (small) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L1P. , the font size of the operation promotion characters (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed is E1P.

As shown in Figure 11-68(A), the display time of the operation prompting character (large) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting character (large) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L2P. , the font size of the operation promotion characters (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed is E2P.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title character of the play time start effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed until at least part of the character string is no longer displayed) ) is LY, the font size of the title characters of the play time start effect is FY, and the display area size in which the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed is EY.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the font size of the characters for the number of times remaining until play time is FZ, and the display area size in which the characters for the number of times remaining until play time are displayed is EZ.

In this form, the font size of the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), the operation promotion letter (large), the title letter of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of characters until the play time is changed. When compared, as shown in Figure 11-68 (B), the font size F2P of the operation promotion characters (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), The font size is larger than the font sizes FR, FB, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the play time start effect and the remaining number of times until play time characters. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation promotion characters (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), and the title character of the play time start effect. , is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters (remaining XXX times (X is a number from 0 to 900)) that make up the number of remaining times until play time character. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation promotion characters (large) constitutes the remaining number of times until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

In addition, the font size FB of the title character of the jackpot start performance, the title character of the super reach performance, the operation promotion character (small), the title character of the play time start performance, the font size of the remaining number of characters until play time FR, F1P, It is larger in size than FY and FZ. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title character of the jackpot start performance is the title character of the super reach performance, the operation promotion character (small), the title character of the play time start performance, and the number of times remaining until play time. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the character. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title character of the jackpot start effect is the number of characters remaining until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

In addition, the font size FY of the title text of the play time start effect is larger than the font size FR, F1P, FZ of the title text of the super reach effect, operation promotion text (small), and remaining number of times until play time. be. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title text of the play time start effect is the same as the size of the letters that make up the title text of the super reach effect, the operation promotion text (small), and the remaining number of characters until play time. The size is larger than the size of the largest font among them. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title character of the play time start effect is the number of characters remaining until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the constituent characters.

Further, the font size FR of the title characters of the super reach effect is larger than the font sizes F1P and FZ of the operation promotion characters (small) and the remaining number of times until play time characters. In addition, the size of the smallest size of the letters that make up the title letters of the super reach effect is the size of the operation promotion letters (small), and the size of the largest size of the letters that make up the number of remaining until play time letters. It is larger in size. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title character of the super reach effect constitutes the number of remaining times until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

Furthermore, the font size F1P of the operation promotion characters (small) is larger than the font size FZ of the remaining number of times until play time characters. Further, the size of the smallest character among the characters constituting the operation promotion characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the remaining number of times until play time characters. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation promotion characters (small) constitutes the remaining number of times until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

Furthermore, these font size relationships and character size relationships hold true regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this form, the display area size of the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), the operation promotion letter (large), the title letter of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of characters until the play time As shown in Figure 11-68 (C), the display area size E2P of the operation promotion characters (large) is different from the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, and the operation promotion character (small). ), the display area size of the title character of the play time start effect, and the display area size of the remaining number of times until play time characters ER, EB, E1P, EY, and EZ. In addition, the display area size EB of the title character of the jackpot start effect is the display area size ER of the title character of the super reach effect, the operation promotion text (small), the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of characters until the play time, The display area size is larger than E1P, EY, and EZ. In addition, the display area size EY of the title text of the play time start effect is larger than the display area size ER, E1P, and EZ of the title text of the super reach effect, operation promotion letters (small), and remaining number of play time letters. It is the area size. Further, the display area size ER of the title characters of the super reach performance is larger than the display area sizes E1P and EZ of the operation promotion characters (small) and the remaining number of times until play time characters. Further, the display area size E1P of the operation promotion characters (small) is larger than the display area size EZ of the remaining number of times until play time characters. Further, the relationship between these display area sizes holds true regardless of the type of super reach effect.

Comparing the display times of the title characters of the super reach effect and the title characters of the play time start effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-68 (D), the display time LY of the title letters of the play time start effect is It is set longer than the display time LR of the title characters of the reach effect. Further, these display time relationships hold true regardless of the type of super reach performance.

Comparing the display formats of the title characters of the super reach effect and the title characters of the play time start effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-68 (E), the low base weak reach effects A, B effects, and the low base strong reach A In the ~C effects, the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center during the title start period, and are erased while moving from the center to the right side of the display area during the title end period. On the other hand, in the low base strongest reach performance and the play time start performance, the title characters are displayed in a reduced size from being enlarged during the title start period, and are erased while being enlarged during the title end period.

[About LED placement]
The game effect lamp 9 in this embodiment includes frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

As shown in FIG. 11-69, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 are provided so as to surround the upper position of the image display device 5 of the gaming machine frame 3 and the left side of the gaming area, and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are It is provided so as to surround the right side of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. Furthermore, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4 are arranged at positions corresponding to the logo "POWERFULII" formed on the front surface of the movable body 32. Furthermore, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are provided at positions corresponding to the decorative parts formed in the game area 2L. Further, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are provided at positions near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

Frame LEDL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are full-color LEDs consisting of RGB (Red, Green, Blue) light emitting elements, and logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit monochromatic red light. The decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are red LEDs, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are white LEDs capable of emitting monochromatic white light.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 11-70 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 transmits brightness data for lighting/blinking/turning off one or more of the plurality of LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Output to the LED driver (also called lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/blinking/lights out performed by the performance control CPU 120 on lamps such as LEDs will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a brightness data table in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data table includes an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used during super reach, and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed, and a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed. The brightness data table for the jackpot background used during the round of the jackpot game state, the brightness data table for the ending background used in the ending state in which the ending performance to notify the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the brightness data table for the ending background used during the round of the low probability high base state (time saving and a time-saving background brightness data table used in the state).

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of game states, such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot game state, an ending state, and a time saving state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on the background brightness data table. That is, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs brightness data based on the background brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-70, the priority when used is increased in the order of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table.

For example, if a super reach effect develops while outputting brightness data based on a normal background brightness data table in a normal state, the effect control CPU 120 outputs an SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach effect. It is used preferentially over the normal background brightness data table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the SP reach brightness data table. As a result, if the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table and a super reach effect develops, the super reach effect will be supported based on the SP reach brightness data table. The game effect lamp 9 is lamp controlled in this manner. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but after the super reach effect ends, When the normal state returns, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the normal background is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a jackpot and enters the fanfare state, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the fanfare background is output to the LED driver. is output to.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control, and controls the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state under control. However, when a super reach effect develops, the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach effect is used preferentially than the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. do. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the lamp control time measurement using the background brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, but the background brightness Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the super reach effect ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

For example, if an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table during a super reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 outputs the error brightness data table corresponding to the error to SP It is used preferentially over the reach brightness data table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach effect based on the brightness data table for SP reach, the game is played in a manner corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. The effect lamp 9 is lamp controlled. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but once the error is cleared, the super reach effect will resume. When returning to the medium gaming state, brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the super reach performance that is being controlled, and controls the LED driver using the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach performance. However, when an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to the error is used preferentially over the SP reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, but the SP reach The brightness data included in the brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, so the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table should not be output to the LED driver. It has become. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the SP ready-to-reach brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

[Lighting mode of game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting brightness data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms related to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9 include "unlit,""substantiallyunlit,""lit," and "blinking." Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness is 0. The term "substantially off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is on but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, when RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED is "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED lights up in white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the LED in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

When the R (Red) data defined as the brightness data of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "0", the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (R data) of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "1", the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 in which the data of R is "1" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

When the W (white) data defined as the brightness data of the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "0", the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are "extinguished". Furthermore, when the brightness data (data of W) of the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "1", the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 in which the data of W is "1" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" refers to constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting, in which a plurality of side-by-side lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in order, and wave lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is turned on. This includes haze lighting, which is dimly lit while changing the brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode in which the game effect lamps 9 are in a mode other than "lights out" or "on" as described above, and the brightness of each lamp when lit is a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. This includes an aspect in which the mode is alternately switched between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and turning off or almost turning off, and specifically, "blinking" includes cases where the brightness data is one of "2" to "F", This includes switching over time between cases where the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is hazy lighting, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. The two differ from each other in that blinking is that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and turning off or almost turning off.

[Explanation regarding game effect lamp]
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11-71 to 12-36.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub fluctuation time according to a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. The display control unit 123 controls the image data (video data, The display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the animation data). The display control unit 123 sends extended commands (for example, extended command BXXX, etc. (where “X” is an arbitrary (alphanumeric characters)) and transmits the extended command to the production control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 123.

FIG. 11-71 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 11-71, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs display control on the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, an expansion for specifying the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance is performed. A command (B421) is sent to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table (weak reach common title (parent)) corresponding to the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123.

The parent table contains information that specifies which lamps (lighting locations) are the targets of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamps 9, and which are referenced during lamp control, corresponding to the lamps that are the targets of lamp control. The information that specifies the child table for which lamp control is performed and the information that specifies the maximum time that lamp control is performed are stored. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 11-74, the lamp control targets are frame LEDL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD_A_LWU_1_B421), logo LEDLL1 to LL4 (XD_A_LLOGO_B421), decoration LEDS1 to LS5 (XD_A_LSLMP_B421), Tacker lamp LA1 ~LA4 (XD_A_LATAK_B421) is specified. In addition, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and the logo LEDLL1 to Child table: XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to LL4, 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and child table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5. 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control using this child table, and child table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and lamp control using this child table is specified. 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for this to occur.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp specified in the parent table using the specified child table, for example, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time. If so, the counter is decremented by 1 every 10 ms to measure the 600,000 ms (10 minutes). That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is counted. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives another extended command before timing a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes) after receiving the extended command, the CPU 120 for effect control stops the lamp control that is currently being executed, and restarts the lamp control. The lamp control of the target lamp is performed using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the extended command received. Although it is not assumed that 600,000 ms is required for the production display (production scene), the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the production display (production scene). Therefore, even if the production control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can continue for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table contains information specifying a grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and lamp control for each lamp (lit location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the execution time is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: Table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table perform ramp control execution time: 500ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table perform lamp control execution time: 230ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table Lamp control is performed by An execution time of 600,000 ms is specified in the order in which the lamp control using these grandchild tables is executed.

Furthermore, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: This Execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: 500ms, execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230ms, execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600000ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these grandchild tables is executed.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the grandchild table: 2 and this Execution time for ramp control using grandchild table: 500ms, execution time for ramp control using grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230ms, execution time for ramp control using grandchild table: X_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600000ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these grandchild tables is executed.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: 2 and Execution time for ramp control using this grandchild table: 500ms, execution time for ramp control using grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230ms, execution time for ramp control using grandchild table: 600000 ms is specified in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, when controlling a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, the production control CPU 120 uses, for example, the first specified grandchild table to control the target lamp. After performing lamp control for the target lamp and measuring the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, the process of performing lamp control for the target lamp using the specified grandchild table is performed using all specified grandchild tables. are to be performed in the specified order. For example, for the child table shown in Figure 11-75, lamp control is performed using the grandchild table: Perform ramp control using table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, then perform ramp control using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 until 230 ms is measured, then perform ramp control using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 600000 ms is measured. . Although it is not assumed that 600,000 ms is required for the production display (production scene), the maximum time for lamp control using the grandchild table specified at the end is 600000ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the production display (production scene). By setting, even if the production control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can be continued for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

In addition, in the child table, when the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are the targets of lamp control, the child tables corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are set as shown in FIG. 11-75, for example. One grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 may be specified, or two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 and XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 may be specified, as shown in Figure 11-75. Then, when one grandchild table is specified as a grandchild table corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the production control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to set the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame The same lamp control is performed for both LEDLWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, if two grandchild tables are specified as grandchild tables corresponding to frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the production control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to frame the frame. Lamp control is performed for LEDLWL1 to LWL12, and lamp control for frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 is performed using the other grandchild table. Therefore, if one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, common lamp control is performed for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12.

The grandchild table specifies the brightness data to be referenced during lamp control and the execution time for performing lamp control for each lamp (lit location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9. information is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x00 corresponds to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1). 0000, 0x000000, lamp according to this brightness data Execution time for control: 100ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x 000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 , 0x000000, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x5AA5AA , 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time: 40 ms for performing lamp control using these brightness data is specified in the order in which lamp control using these brightness data is performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), brightness data: 0x0000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 100ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, this Execution time for lamp control using brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms , brightness data: 0xAAAA, and execution time for performing lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these brightness data is performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD___LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), brightness data: 0x00000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 100ms, brightness data: 0x00000, this Execution time for lamp control using brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms , brightness data: 0x66666, and execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD___LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 100ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, Execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, Execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, Based on this brightness data An execution time for lamp control: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, and an execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these brightness data is performed.

In the luminance data of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) of the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 are the values of frame LEDLWL1 The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frames LEDLWL2 and LWR2, which correspond to numbers 3 and 4. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data indicate the RGB values of the frames LEDLWL3 and LWR3, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 are the values of the frames LEDLWL4 and LWR4. This indicates the RGB value, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of the frame LEDLWL5 and LWR5, and the data corresponding to No. 5 and 6 The values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the frames LEDLWL6 and LWR6, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 are the values of the frames LEDLWL7, It shows the RGB values of LWR7, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to No. 7 and No. 8 show the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8 and LWR8.

Also, like the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-81, when different grandchild tables are specified in the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1) and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 ( XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 ), the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWL1, and the lower 1 digit of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicates the RGB value of frame LEDLWL1. The values of the 3rd to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL2, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th digits indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL3, The values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 The value of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicates the RGB value of frame LEDLWL6, and the values of numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWL5. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the number indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL7, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL8. This indicates the RGB value, and in the luminance data of frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 2 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWR2. Yes, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWR3, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 The value of indicates the RGB value of frame LEDLWR4, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWR5, and the values of number 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWR5. The values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR6, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 are the values of the frame LEDLWR6. It shows the RGB values of LEDLWR7, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 show the RGB values of frame LEDLWR8.

In addition, in the brightness data of logo LEDLL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value of the lower fourth digit indicates the R (Red) value of logo LEDLL1, and the value of the lower third digit indicates the value of R (Red) of logo LEDLL1. The value of R of logo LEDLL2 is shown, the value of the second lower digit shows the value of R of logo LEDLL3, and the value of the fourth lower digit shows the value of R of logo LEDLL4.

In addition, in the luminance data of the decorative LEDs 1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) of the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value of the lower 4th digit indicates the value of W (White) of the decorative LED LS1, and the value of the lower 3rd digit The value of W of the decoration LEDLS2 is shown, the value of the second lower digit shows the value of W of the decoration LEDLS3, and the value of the fourth lower digit shows the value of W of the decoration LEDLS4.

In the brightness data of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 are the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA1. The lower 1st to 3rd digit values of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA2, and the lower 4 values of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the attacker lamp LA2. The values in the 1st to 6th digits indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA3, and the values in the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th digits indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA4. It is.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. The frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements such as "R", "G", and "B", but the luminance data for each element is Corresponds to the current value output for. Specifically, the brightness data has current values divided into 16 levels from 0 to F. When the brightness data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0). The current value reaches its maximum value. For example, when luminance data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the luminance data of "A" flows to the "R" element, and "1" is output to the "G" element. When brightness data is output, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "F" element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows through the "G" element.

The frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 can emit light in various colors by flowing currents corresponding to the luminance data to each RGB element. Furthermore, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 can be lit in colors corresponding to each effect or character by emitting light based on brightness data. As an example, data "F00" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in red. Further, data "F0F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in reddish-purple color. In addition, the data "FF0" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in yellow.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit light in red with a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by flowing a current corresponding to the brightness data to the R (Red) element, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are By uniformly flowing current corresponding to the luminance data to the three elements R, G, and B, it is possible to emit white light with a luminance corresponding to the luminance data.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, when performing lamp control on a target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, for example, the production control CPU 120 outputs the initially specified brightness data to the LED driver. After measuring the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, the process of outputting the next specified brightness data to the LED driver is performed for all the specified brightness data in the specified order. There is. For example, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 is LE until the first 100ms is measured. to D driver Output brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 to the LED driver until the next 120ms is counted, then brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0 until the next 120ms is counted. x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 , Output 0x000000 to the LED driver, then output brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver, and then output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA until the next 40ms is counted. , Output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver. Based on the received brightness data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can perform lamp control on each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the production control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a constant cycle (for example, 10 ms cycle), Performs ramp control based on tables, child tables, and grandchild tables.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the child table. On the other hand, while outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the drawings. FIG. 11-72 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 11-72, in child table: 500ms is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed in the third, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified, 230ms is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed in the third, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 is specified, 600000 ms is specified as the time for the fourth lamp control to be performed, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the brightness data (RGB data) is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499 388, 0x4995AA" is specified to be executed at 100ms intervals. For convenience of explanation, the luminance data for the first 100 ms will be referred to as data 1, the luminance data for the second 100 ms will be referred to as data 2, the luminance data for the third 100 ms will be referred to as data 3, and the luminance data for the fourth 100 ms will be referred to as data 4. .

When performing lamp control for the second designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: The luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on :XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until reaching 500 ms, but after outputting data 1 to data 4, the time is still 500 ms. If the luminance data has not been reached, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order starting from the first data 1. When the time measurement reaches 500ms, the production control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 at that point, and outputs the brightness data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 specified by the child table. Start.

In addition, when performing lamp control for the fourth designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: Until the time measurement reaches 600000 ms, the luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on : If the time has not reached 600000 ms, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from the first data 1. When the time measurement reaches 600000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 at that time. At this time, since the next grandchild table is not specified in the child table, the output of luminance data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: In this case, the time measurement never reaches 600,000 ms, and by receiving the next extended command from the display control unit 123 before the time measurement reaches 600,000 ms, the parent table, child table, etc. specified by the newly received extended command are displayed. Output of luminance data based on the grandchild table will start.

As shown in the parent table shown in Figure 11-74, 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum lamp control time by the child table, and the 10-minute data in such a parent table is used for troubleshooting purposes. Responsible for That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the main board 11, but if some malfunction occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production Even if the control CPU 120 does not receive the production control command from the main board 11, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so different lamp control is performed one after another from the point where the problem occurs. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Also, as in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, 600000ms (10 minutes) is specified as the lamp control execution time by the grandchild table specified at the end, and the 10 minute data in such a child table is , when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, the ramp control by the grandchild table specified at the beginning of the child table will be performed again because the timer of the parent table still remains. play the role of prevention.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, 600000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that refers to the last specified luminance data. With this configuration, 10 minutes in the luminance data When the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, so lamp control is performed again using the brightness data specified at the beginning of the grandchild table. This will play a role in preventing things from being put away. In this way, by setting the luminance data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with one fixed light emission, which prevents the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. Can be done. Furthermore, by specifying luminance data for 600000ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. can.

[About the brightness data table used for super reach effect 1]
FIG. 11-73 is a diagram showing a brightness data table used for the super reach effect.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 when executing the low base weak reach A performance Also, when executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title display part uses a common weak reach common title that defines the luminance mode of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects as a brightness data table. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is carried out using.

In addition, when executing the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 executes a title color change performance in the title display part, and when changing the title characters to red, the low base weak reach A Whether it is the title display part of the production or the title display part of the low base weak reach B production, there is a common brightness data table that defines the lighting mode when changing the title character to red in the title color change production. When controlling the game effect lamp 9 using title common chance up red, executing a title color change effect in the title display part, and changing the title letters to gold, display the title with a low base weak reach A effect. Whether it is a part or a title display part of a low base weak reach B production, a brightness data table is used to define the lighting mode when title letters are changed to gold in a title color change production. Common title common chance increase. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using money.

The execution time of the introduction part is different between the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and as shown in Figure 11-73, when executing the low base weak reach A performance, the brightness data table is When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach type weak reach A introduction which has defined the light emitting mode peculiar to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, and executing the low base weak reach B effect, the introduction In the part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the weak reach system weak reach B introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 In the title display part, when executing the reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, the low base strong reach A effect is displayed as a brightness data table in the title display part. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common strong reach common title that defines the light emitting mode of the title display part of the ~C performance.

The execution time of the introduction part is different for the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance, and as shown in Figure 11-73, when performing the low base strong reach A performance, In the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach type strong reach A introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect as a brightness data table, and the low base strong reach B effect. When executing, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system strong reach B introduction which defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect as a brightness data table. In the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach type strong reach C introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect as a brightness data table.

As shown in FIG. 11-73, when executing the low base strongest reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 uses the title display part and the introduction part as a brightness data table from the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance to the introduction part. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction which defines a series of light emission modes up to.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the high base reach A performance, the high base reach B performance, the high base reach C performance, and the high base reach D performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 The title is displayed when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, when executing the high base reach C effect, and when executing the high base reach D effect. In this part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach common title that defines the light emission mode of the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance, but as shown in Figure 11-73, high base reach A performance When executing, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the high base reach system reach A introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach A effect as a brightness data table, and When executing the base reach B effect, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the high base reach type reach B introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach B effect as a brightness data table. When executing the high base reach C effect, the introduction part uses the high base reach type reach C introduction that defines the lighting mode unique to the introduction part of the high base reach C effect as a brightness data table. 9, when performing the high base reach D effect, the introduction part uses the high base reach type reach D introduction which defines the light emitting mode unique to the introduction part of the high base reach D effect as a brightness data table. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed.

In this way, both when executing the low base weak reach A effect and when executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title display part uses the common weak reach common title as the brightness data table to improve the game effect. Since the lamp 9 is controlled, the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved, but in the introduction part, there are separate cases when executing the low base weak reach A effect and when executing the low base weak reach B effect. Since the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the introduction of weak reach system weak reach A and the introduction of weak reach system weak reach B, the respective performance contents are changed in the introduction part of low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance. It becomes possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have different light emitting modes depending on the situation, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the introduction part up to the introduction of the performance result in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common weak reach common title is used as a brightness data table in the title display part, both when executing the low base weak reach A effect and when executing the low base weak reach B effect. However, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title starts from when a part of the title characters are displayed until it is displayed at the fixed position. A display control unit includes a weak reach title start that defines a light emission pattern specific to a period, and a weak reach title display that defines a light emission pattern that is unique after a title display period in which title characters are displayed in a fixed position. 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, by transmitting an extended command that specifies the start of a weak reach title, the performance control CPU 120 can display the brightness data table: The display control unit 123 controls the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the weak reach title start, and the display control unit 123 displays the title in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects. When starting the display control of the display period, by transmitting an extended command that specifies the weak reach title display, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach title display to display the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and Lamp control may be performed for the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, one of the brightness data table: weak reach title start or weak reach title display. A common brightness data table may be used for the first and second brightness data tables, and separate brightness data tables with individual contents may be set for the other.

In addition, when executing the low base weak reach A and B effects, when executing the title color change effect in the title display part, even if it is the low base weak reach A effect, it is the low base weak reach B effect. Also, since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the common title common chance up red (title common chance up money) as the brightness data table, the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved.

Also, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, the brightness data table is common in the title display part. Since the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system common title of , the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved. When executing the B effect and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, game effects are achieved by introducing separate strong reach type strong reach A, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, and strong reach type strong reach C introduction. Since the lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 is set in different light emission modes according to the content of each performance in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect in the introduction part up to the introduction of the performance result in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the title display part is The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common strong reach common title as a brightness data table, but in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the prologue display period and title characters are A strong reach title start with a unique light emitting pattern during the title start period from when a part is displayed until it is displayed in a fixed position, and a unique light emitting pattern after the title display period when the title characters are displayed in a fixed position. A strong reach title display with a defined pattern, and an extension that specifies the start of a strong reach title when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. By transmitting the command, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: Strong reach title start, and displays the display control unit 123. However, when starting the display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performances, by transmitting an extended command that specifies the strong reach title display, the performance control CPU 120 Luminance data table: The lamp control of frames LEDL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 may be performed using a strong reach type title display. In addition, in such a configuration, the brightness data table: Strong reach title is set depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance. A common brightness data table may be used for one of the start and strong reach title displays, and separate brightness data tables may be set with individual contents for the other.

In addition, among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the strong reach prologue has a unique lighting pattern during the prologue display period, and part of the title characters are displayed before being displayed in a fixed position. It is equipped with a strong reach title start that has a unique light emitting pattern for the title start period up to and a strong reach title display that has a unique light emitting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, by transmitting an extended command specifying the strong reach prologue, the effect control CPU 120 controls the brightness. Data table: Lamp control of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed using the strong reach system prologue, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. When starting display control for the title start period, by transmitting an extended command that specifies the start of a strong reach title, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: start of a strong reach title to display frames LEDLWL1 to When the display control unit 123 performs lamp control of the LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C effects, By sending an extended command that specifies strong reach title display, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach title display to display frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. Lamp control may also be performed. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance, the brightness data table: strong reach system prologue A common brightness data table may be used for at least one of , strong reach title start, and strong reach title display, and the remaining tables may be separate brightness data tables in which individual contents are set.

In addition, among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the strong reach prologue has a unique lighting pattern during the prologue display period, and part of the title characters are displayed before being displayed in a fixed position. A strong reach title display that defines a unique light emission pattern after the title start period up to, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. , by sending an extended command that specifies the strong reach prologue, the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach prologue to adjust the lamps of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. When the display control unit 123 starts the display control of the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command specifying the strong reach title display. The performance control CPU 120 may control the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance, the brightness data table: strong reach system prologue , a common brightness data table may be used for one of the strong reach title displays, and a separate brightness data table in which individual contents are set for the other.

Also, when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, when executing the high base reach C effect, and when executing the high base reach D effect, In the title display part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common high base reach common title as a brightness data table, so the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved, while in the introduction part, the high base reach A production , high base reach B effect, high base reach C effect, and high base reach D effect. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by introducing system reach B, high base reach system reach C, and high base reach system reach D, high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C In the introduction part of the high base reach D performance, it is possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have a different light emission mode according to the content of each performance, increasing the performance effect in the introduction part until the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high base reach D effect is executed when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, and when executing the high base reach C effect. In this case, the title display part is configured to control the game effect lamp 9 using a common high base reach common title as a brightness data table, but the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects is Among them, a high base reach title start that has a unique light emitting pattern during the title start period from when a part of the title text is displayed until it is displayed in a fixed position, and a title display where the title text is displayed in a fixed position. A high base reach title display that has a unique light emission pattern after the period is provided, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the high base reach title display By sending an extended command that specifies the start of a series title, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: High base reach series title start to set the lamps of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command specifying the high base reach title display. The performance control CPU 120 may perform lamp control of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: high base reach type title display. In addition, in such a configuration, the brightness data is adjusted depending on whether it is a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance. Table: A common brightness data table may be used for one of the high base reach title start and high base reach title display, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other.

In addition, when executing a low-based strongest reach effect whose execution time for the title display part does not share with other super reach effects, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect can be used as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. Since the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction which defines a series of light emission modes from to the introduction part, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common weak reach common title is used as a brightness data table in the title display part, both when executing the low base weak reach A effect and when executing the low base weak reach B effect. However, when executing the low base weak reach A effect, the luminance mode peculiar to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect is used as the brightness data table of the title display part. When controlling the game effect lamp 9 using the determined weak reach type weak reach A title and executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title of the low base weak reach B effect is used as the brightness data table of the title display part. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed using a weak reach type weak reach B title that defines a light emitting mode specific to the display part, and thereby a low base weak reach A effect and a low base weak reach B effect. In the title display part, it is possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have different light emitting modes according to the content of each performance, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the title display part in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the title display part is The game effect lamp 9 is configured to control the game effect lamp 9 using a common strong reach common title as a brightness data table, but when executing the low base strong reach A effect, the low base is used as the brightness data table of the title display part. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using a strong reach type strong reach A title that has a lighting mode specific to the title display part of the strong reach A performance, and executing a low base strong reach B performance, the title display part Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system strong reach B title that defines the light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect as a brightness data table, and the low base strong reach C effect is executed. In this case, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach type strong reach C title that defines a light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect as a luminance data table of the title display part. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in a different manner in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance according to the content of each performance. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect of the title display part in super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high base reach D performance is executed when the high base reach A performance is executed, when the high base reach B performance is executed, and when the high base reach C performance is executed. Even when performing a high base reach A effect, the title display part is configured to control the game effect lamp 9 using a common high base reach common title as a brightness data table. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the high base reach type reach A title that defines the light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach A performance as the brightness data table of the display part, and the high base reach B performance is executed. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the high base reach system reach B title which defines the light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach B performance as the brightness data table of the title display part, and When executing the reach C effect, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the high base reach type reach C title that defines the light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach C effect as the brightness data table of the title display part. When performing a high base reach D effect, a high base reach type reach D title that has a luminance mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach D effect is used as the brightness data table of the title display part to improve the game effect. The lamp 9 may be controlled, so that the title display part of the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance can be controlled according to the content of each performance. This makes it possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have different light emitting modes, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the title display part in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect is defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. Although the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strongest reach system strongest reach title, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table of the low base strongest reach effect is Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strongest reach system strongest reach title that has a lighting mode specific to the title display part, and a lighting mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect is determined as the brightness data table for the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled by using the strongest reach system.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base weak reach A and B effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the common weak reach common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the introduction The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the introduction of weak reach system weak reach A and the introduction of weak reach system weak reach B as the part brightness data table, but when executing the low base weak reach A effect, , In the title display part and the introduction part, a series of light emission modes from the title display part of low base weak reach A to the introduction part are defined as a brightness data table. Using the weak reach system weak reach A title introduction, the game effect lamp 9 is When performing lamp control and executing the low base weak reach B effect, a series of light emitting modes from the title display part of low base weak reach B to the introduction part are defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled by using the weak reach type weak reach B title introduction, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base strong reach A to C effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the common strong reach common title as the brightness data table of the title display part. As part of the brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, and strong reach type strong reach C introduction. When executing Reach A performance, a strong reach type strong reach A title that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. When controlling the game effect lamp 9 using the introduction and executing the low base strong reach B effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, it is introduced from the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect as a brightness data table. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using a strong reach type strong reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes up to the part, and executing a low base strong reach C effect, in the title display part and the introduction part. , Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system strong reach C title introduction, which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect as a brightness data table. When executing the strong reach D effect, a series of light emitting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach D effect is defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using the title introduction, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when performing high base reach effects A to D, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table of the title display part. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, and high base reach type reach D introduction as part brightness data table. Regarding the configuration, when executing the high base reach A performance, in the title display part and the introduction part, a high base reach A performance that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part as a brightness data table. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using base reach type reach A title introduction and executing high base reach B effect, the title of high base reach B effect is displayed as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the high base reach system reach B title introduction which defines a series of light emission modes from the display part to the introduction part, and execute the high base reach C effect, the title display part and In the introduction part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the high base reach system reach C title introduction which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the high base reach C performance to the introduction part as a brightness data table, When executing the high base reach D effect, a series of light emitting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach D effect are defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using the title introduction, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

[About the brightness data table used for super reach effect 2]
Below, the setting contents of the brightness data table used for the super reach effect will be explained. As mentioned above, the luminance data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the luminance data table explained below, some of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table In some cases, only the following tables are shown and other tables are omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects]
FIG. 11-74 shows the brightness data table: Weak reach used when the display control unit 123 receives extended command: B421 transmitted when controlling the display of the title display part in low base weak reach A and B performances. FIG. 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the series common title, and FIG. 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach series common title, and FIGS. 11-76 to 11- 78 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of weak reach common title.

When receiving the extended command B421, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table of the weak reach common title based on the extended command B421. In the parent table of the weak reach common title, as shown in Figure 11-74, it is set to perform lamp control by referring to the child table: Therefore, when the production control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, it refers to the child table: conduct.

In the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, as shown in FIG. 11-75, grandchild tables and execution times of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are set in the reference order.

The production control CPU 120 first performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 (FIG. 11-76) which is initially set in the child table: As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are turned off for 340 ms, and then the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are turned on in blue for 160 ms.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, and executes the grandchild table: Please refer to the lamp control conduct. As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are lit in blue-based colors, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and executes the grandchild table: Please refer to the lamp control conduct. As a result, some of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are turned off, and the rest are turned on in blue, and the parts that are turned off and the parts that are turned on change every 30 ms or 20 ms.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 230ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3, and executes the grandchild table: Please refer to the lamp control conduct. As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are lit in blue-based colors, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 receives a new extended command (B400 or B40F) that is sent when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. Switch to lamp control using the brightness data table based on the extended commands. As a result, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 continue to light up in a blue color until a new extension command is received, and the brightness continues to change every 100ms, and at the same time, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 continue to change in brightness every 100ms. By doing so, the light emission mode is switched to the one based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table of common weak reach titles has child tables that also refer to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. In the child table, grandchild tables etc. to be referred to are set in order of execution, and in these grandchild tables, brightness data etc. to be referred to are set in order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 is set in the parent table. Refer to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table and use the same procedure as above to set the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. Performs lamp control.

As a result, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 change from the off state to red until 500ms have passed, and then turn on in red until 500ms have passed, and the brightness changes every 100ms, and then go from red to almost off until 230ms have passed. After that, it lights up in red again, and then it continues to light up in red until a new extension command is received, and the brightness changes every 100ms.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from the off state to white until 500ms have elapsed, then remain lit in white until 500ms have elapsed, and change the brightness every 100ms, and then go from white to almost off until 230ms have elapsed. After that, it lights up in white again, and then it continues to light up in white until a new extension command is received, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

In addition, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 change from the off state to blue until 500ms elapse, then turn on in a blue color until 500ms elapse, and the brightness changes every 100ms, and then change from blue to almost blue until 230ms elapse. After going through the off state, it turns on again in blue, and then continues to turn on in blue color until a new extended command is received, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (A), in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the period of 500 s from the start is the title start period, and after that, the period of 2200 ms is the title display period, After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: common title for weak reach systems, so that the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward the fixed position. During the title start period (period from the start of the title display part until 500ms elapse), the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 change from off to blue, and the logo LEDs L1 to LL4 turn off. The state changes to red, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from the off state to white (lamp control by the grandchild table (1) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75). In addition, during the title display period in which the title characters remain stationary at a fixed position and the title end period in which the title characters move toward the right from the fixed position (the period from the start of the title display period to the end of the title display part), the frame LEDLWL1 ～LWL12, frame LEDLWR2～LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1～LA4 are lit in blue color until 500ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100ms (Lamps according to grandchild table (2) specified by child table in Figure 11-75) Control), then after 230 ms have passed, the lamp goes from blue to almost off and then turns on again in blue (lamp control by the grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then turns on again in the blue color system. However, the brightness continues to change every 100 ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75). In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red until 500ms elapse, and the brightness changes every 100ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then until 230ms elapse. The lamp goes from red to almost off, then turns red again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then turns red again, and the brightness changes every 100ms. The state continues (ramp control by the grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white until 500ms elapse, and the brightness changes every 100ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then until 230ms elapse. The lamp goes from white to almost off, and then turns white again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then turns white again, and the brightness changes every 100ms. The state continues (ramp control by the grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75).

In addition, after 3000 ms have passed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) that is sent when starting the display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. As a result, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach system common title is completed, and the lamp control is switched to the lamp control based on the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, it performs lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title based on the extended command B421, thereby controlling the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2. ~LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are used during the title start period when the title character moves from the left side of the display area toward the regular position, and when the title character moves from the regular position to the right side. The light emitting color and light emitting mode change depending on the end period of the moving title.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (red)]
FIG. 11-79 shows a luminance data table: title used when the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B511 transmitted when performing display control of a title color change effect that changes title characters from white to red. FIG. 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of common chance up red, and FIG. 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: title common chance up red, and FIGS. -83 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: title common chance up red grandchild table.

The display control unit 123 controls the timing at which title characters are changed (title display part The extension command 511 is transmitted at a timing when 1300 ms has passed after the start.

When receiving the extended command B511, the production control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-79) of the title common chance up red based on the extended command 511, and the child table (FIG. 11-79) specified by the parent table. -80), grandchild table specified in the child table (Figures 11-81 to 83), frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table (Figures 11-81 to 83). ~LS5, performs lamp control of attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

As a result, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 blink in white at 40ms intervals until 200ms have passed, and then turn on in red until 1200ms have passed, and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals. changes, and then gradually turns off from red in 280 ms, and remains off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 turn off until 200ms have passed, then turn on in red until 1200ms have passed, and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals, then gradually turn off from red in 280ms, and the new expansion The light remains off until a command is received.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white at 40ms intervals until 200ms have elapsed, then remain lit white until 1200ms have elapsed, and change their brightness at 20ms intervals, and then gradually change from white to white at 280ms. The light goes out and remains off until a new extension command is received.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (B), in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the period of 500 s from the start is the title start period, and after that, the period of 2200 ms is the title display period, After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. In addition, when performing a title color change effect that changes from white to red, the title character is displayed in a manner that appears to glow for 200ms at the timing of 800ms after the start of the title display period, and then the title character changes to red. , and after another 1200 ms has elapsed, the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, the extension command B511 is received at the timing when the title color change effect is executed, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red, so that the title characters shine. During the period in which it is displayed in a manner that looks like this (the period until 200 ms has passed after receiving the extended command B511), the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 blink in white, and the logo LEDs L1 to LL4 blink in white. The light goes out, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash in white (lamp control by the grandchild table (5) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-80). In addition, until the title characters change to red and the title end period begins (a period from 200 ms after receiving extended command B511 to 1200 ms), frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, Attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in red and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and brightness changes at 20ms intervals, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white. Then, the brightness changes at intervals of 20 ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (6) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-80). In addition, during the title end period (period after 1400 ms has elapsed after receiving the extended command B511) when the title characters move from the regular position to the right and disappear, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 gradually turns off from red, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 gradually turn off from red, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 gradually turn off from white (Lamps by grandchild table (7) specified by child table in Figure 11-80) control).

In addition, after 3000 ms have passed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) that is transmitted in conjunction with starting the display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. As a result, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red is completed, and it is switched to the lamp control based on the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (gold)]
FIG. 11-84 shows a luminance data table: title used when the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B512, which is transmitted when performing display control of a title color change effect that changes title characters from white to gold. FIG. 11-85 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the common chance up gold, and FIG. 11-85 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: title common chance up gold, and FIGS. -88 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of title common chance up money.

The display control unit 123 controls the timing at which title characters are changed (title display part The extended command 512 is transmitted at a timing when 1300 ms has passed after the start.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B512, it specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-84) of title common chance up money based on the extended command 512, and the child table (FIG. 11-84) specified in the parent table. -85), grandchild table specified in the child table (Figures 11-86 to 88), frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 with reference to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table ~LS5, performs lamp control of attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

As a result, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 flash in white at intervals of 40ms until 200ms have elapsed, and then turn on in yellow until 1200ms have elapsed, and the brightness increases at intervals of 20ms. changes, and then gradually turns off from yellow in 280 ms, and remains off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 turn off until 200ms have passed, then turn on in red until 1200ms have passed, and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals, then gradually turn off from red in 280ms, and the new expansion The light remains off until a command is received.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white at 40ms intervals until 200ms have elapsed, then remain lit white until 1200ms have elapsed, and change their brightness at 20ms intervals, and then gradually change from white to white at 280ms. The light goes out and remains off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (B), in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the period of 500 s from the start is the title start period, and after that, the period of 2200 ms is the title display period, After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. In addition, when executing a title color change effect that changes from white to gold, the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow for 200 ms at the timing of 800 ms after the start of the title display period, and then the title characters change to gold. , and after another 1200 ms has elapsed, the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, the extended command B512 is received at the timing of executing the title color change effect, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: title common chance up money, so that the title characters shine. During the period in which the frame is displayed in a manner that looks like this (the period until 200 ms has passed after receiving the extended command B512), the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 blink in white, and the logo LEDs L1 to LL4 blink in white. The light goes out, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash in white (lamp control by the grandchild table (8) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-85). In addition, until the title characters change to gold and the title ends (period from 200ms after receiving extended command B512 to 1200ms), frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, Attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in yellow and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and brightness changes at 20ms intervals, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white. Then, the brightness changes at intervals of 20 ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (9) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-85). In addition, during the title end period (period after 1400 ms has passed after receiving the extended command B512) when the title characters move from the regular position to the right side and disappear, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 gradually turns off from yellow, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 turn off from red and gradually turns off, and decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 gradually turn off from white (Lamps by grandchild table (10) specified by child table in Figure 11-85) control).

In addition, after 3000 ms have passed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) that is transmitted in conjunction with starting the display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. As a result, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up money is completed, and the lamp control is switched to the lamp control based on the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects.

[Modified example of brightness data table used in title color change effect]
In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title to frame the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B productions, regardless of whether or not title change production is performed. If you control the lamps of LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and do not perform a title change effect, use the brightness data table as is: Using the weak reach common title, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 ~LWR12, when controlling the lamps of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 and performing a title change effect, the title common chance up red or By receiving an extended command that specifies title common chance up money, the color of the title text changes.Brightness data table: Frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 using title common chance up red or title common chance up money. ~LWR12, the configuration was to perform lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

On the other hand, in this modification, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the brightness data table is set with the brightness data when title change effects are not performed: Weak reach common title (white) , In the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, a brightness data table with brightness data set when performing a title change performance in which the title characters change to red: Weak reach system common title (red) and title The display control unit 123 includes a brightness data table in which brightness data is set when performing a title change effect in which the characters change to gold: Weak reach common title (gold), and the display control unit 123 controls the low base weak reach A and B effects. When starting the display control of the title display part, if the title change effect is not performed, the effect control CPU 120 can change the brightness data by sending an extended command that specifies the weak reach common title (white). Table: Lamp control of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed using the weak reach system common title (white), and the display control unit 123 displays the titles of low base weak reach A and B effects. When starting the display control of the display part, if you want to perform a title change effect that changes the title characters to red, by sending an extended command that specifies a weak reach common title (red), the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title (red) to control the frames LEDL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and the display control unit 123 controls the low base weak reach A, When starting the display control of the title display part of the B effect, if you want to perform a title change effect that changes the title characters to gold, by sending an extended command that specifies the weak reach common title (gold), The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: Weak reach common title (gold).

As a result, the performance control CPU 120 changes the title characters to gold when performing a title change performance that changes the title characters to red when not performing the title change performance in the title display part of the base weak reach A and B performances. It is possible to control the lamps of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 in a light emitting manner according to each situation when performing a title change effect.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of low base weak reach A production]
FIG. 11-89 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B400 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A production: Weak reach system Weak reach FIG. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for introducing A, and FIG. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table for introducing brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A, and FIGS. 11-91 to 11 -95 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach type weak reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B400, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-89) for introducing the weak reach type weak reach A based on the extended command B400, and the child table (FIG. 11-89) specified in the parent table ( 11-90), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-91 to 95), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-90 includes an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production, a grandchild table with the luminescent color and luminescence mode according to the production scene. are set, and furthermore, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-91 to 11-95, brightness data that is the light emission color and light emission mode according to the characters etc. appearing in the scene of the performance is set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect]
FIG. 11-96 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B40F that is sent when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base weak reach B performance: weak reach system weak reach FIG. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for introducing B, and FIG. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table for introducing brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B, and FIG. 11-99 to FIG. -103 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of weak reach type weak reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B40F, it specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-96) for introducing the weak reach type weak reach B based on the extension command B40F, and the child table ( 11-97), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-98 to 103), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-97 includes the execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B production, the luminous color according to the scene of the production, and the grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. are set, and furthermore, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-98 to 11-103, luminance data that is the luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters etc. appearing in the scene of the performance is set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects]
FIG. 11-104 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B517 transmitted when controlling the display of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects: strong reach FIG. 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the series common title, and FIG. 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title. 109 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of the strong reach common title.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B517, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-105) of the strong reach common title based on the extension command B517, and the child table (Fig. 11-105) specified in the parent table. -106), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Figures 11-107 to 109), and the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table ~LS5, performs lamp control of attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in Figure 11-106, the scenes of the production such as the prologue display period, title start period, title display period, title end period, etc. that constitute the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production are switched. A grandchild table is set for the execution time according to the time, the luminous color and the light emission mode according to the scene of the production, and furthermore, the grandchild table shown in Figures 11-107 to 109 includes characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production. Luminance data that corresponds to the luminous color and luminous mode are set.

As a result, frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are used to display the scene of the production in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production, characters appearing, etc. The color and mode of emitted light change accordingly.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of low base strong reach A production]
FIG. 11-110 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B500 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A effect: strong reach system strong reach FIG. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of A introduction, and FIG. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, and FIG. 11-112 to FIG. -117 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of strong reach type strong reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B500, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-110) for introducing the strong reach type strong reach A based on the extended command B500, and the child table (FIG. 11-110) specified in the parent table ( 11-111), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-112 to 117), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-111 includes the execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, the luminous color according to the production scene, and the grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. Further, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-112 to 117, brightness data for the luminous color and luminous mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the performance scene are set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect]
FIG. 11-118 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B504 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base strong reach B effect: strong reach system strong reach FIG. 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of B introduction, and FIG. 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and FIG. 11-120 to FIG. -124 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of strong reach type strong reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B504, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-118) for introducing the strong reach type strong reach B based on the extended command B504, and the child table (FIG. 11-118) specified in the parent table ( 11-119), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-120 to 124), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-119 includes the execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the luminous color according to the scene of the production, and the grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. Furthermore, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-120 to 11-11-11-120, brightness data for the luminous color and luminous mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the performance scene are set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect]
When the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B505 that is sent when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base strong reach C performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a strong reach type strong reach based on the extended command B505. Specify the parent table (not shown) for introducing C, and refer to the child table (not shown) specified in the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table. Lamp control is performed for the frames LEDL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table of strong reach type strong reach C introduction has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production, and a luminescent color and luminous mode according to the production scene. A grandchild table is set up, and the grandchild table that introduces the strong reach type strong reach C will have a luminous color and a lighting mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production. Brightness data is set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in low base strongest reach performance]
FIG. 11-125 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B600 transmitted when controlling the display of the low-based strongest reach effect: the parent of the strongest reach title introduction of the strongest reach system. FIG. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the table, and FIG. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, and FIGS. 11-127 to 11-135 are Brightness data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table for the introduction of the strongest reach system strongest reach title. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B600, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-126) for introducing the strongest reach title based on the extended command B600, and the child table (FIG. 11-126) specified in the parent table ( 11-127), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-128 to 135), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-126 contains the execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes from the title display part of the low base strongest reach production to the end of the introduction part, the luminous color according to the scene of the production, the luminescence color, etc. A grandchild table is set as a mode, and further, in the grandchild table shown in FIGS. 11-127 to 135, luminescence colors and luminance data as a light emission mode are set according to characters appearing in the scene of the production. .

As a result, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach production, the characters appearing, etc. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of high base reach A to D effects]
FIG. 11-136 shows the brightness data table: High base reach used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B605 transmitted when controlling the display of the title display part in high base reach A to D productions. FIG. 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the series common title, and FIG. 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high base reach common title, and -140 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of the high base reach common title.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B605, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-136) of the high base reach common title based on the extension command B605, and the child table (Figure 11-136) specified in the parent table. 11-137), grandchild table specified in the child table (Figures 11-138 to 140), frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table Performs lamp control for LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-137 shows the execution according to the time when the scenes of the production, such as the title start period, title display period, and title end period, which constitute the title display part in the high base reach performances A to D, change. A grandchild table is set that has a luminous color and a luminous mode according to the time and scene of the production, and the grandchild table shown in Figures 11-138 to 140 has a luminous color that corresponds to the characters, etc. that appear in the scene of the production. , brightness data that becomes the light emission mode is set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are used for the production scenes, appearing characters, etc. in the title display part of high base reach A to D productions. At the same time, the luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach A performance]
FIG. 11-141 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B606 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the high base reach A performance: high base reach type reach A FIG. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the introduction, and FIG. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high base reach system reach A introduction, and FIGS. 145 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B606, it specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-141) for introducing the high base reach system reach A based on the extension command B606, and the child table ( 11-142), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-143 to 145), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-142 includes a grandchild table that has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the high base reach A production, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a luminous mode. In addition, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-143 to 145, brightness data for the luminous color and luminous mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the scene of the performance are set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production, characters appearing, etc. in the introduction part of the high base reach A production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach B effect]
FIG. 11-146 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B607 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the high base reach B performance: high base reach type reach B FIG. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of introduction, and FIG. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: high base reach system reach B introduction. Note that the child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and the grandchild tables are all omitted.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B607, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-146) for introducing the high base reach system reach B based on the extension command B607, and the child table (FIG. 11-146) specified in the parent table ( 11-147), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDS1 to LS5 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table (not shown). , performs lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-147 includes a grandchild table that has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the high base reach B production, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a luminous mode. In addition, the grandchild table of the high base reach system Reach B introduction is set with luminance data that becomes the luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters, etc. that appear in the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach B production. has been done.

As a result, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production, characters appearing, etc. in the introduction part of the high base reach B production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach C effect]
FIG. 11-148 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B608 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the high base reach C performance: high base reach system reach C FIG. 11-149 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of introduction, and FIG. 11-149 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: high base reach system reach C introduction. Note that the child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and the grandchild tables are all omitted.

When receiving the extended command B608, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-148) for introducing high base reach type reach C based on the extended command B608, and the child table (FIG. 11-148) specified in the parent table ( 11-149), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDS1 to LS5 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table (not shown). , performs lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-148 includes a grandchild table that has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the high base reach C production, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a luminous mode. In addition, the grandchild table of high base reach type reach C introduction is set with luminance data that becomes the luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach C production. has been done.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production, characters appearing, etc. in the introduction part of the high base reach C production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach D effect]
FIG. 11-150 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B609 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the high base reach D performance: high base reach type reach D FIG. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of introduction, and FIG. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: high base reach system reach D introduction. Note that the child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and the grandchild tables are all omitted.

When receiving the extended command B609, the production control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-150) for introducing high base reach system reach D based on the extended command B609, and the child table (FIG. 11-150) specified in the parent table ( 11-151), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDS1 to LS5 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table (not shown). , performs lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-150 includes a grandchild table that has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the high base reach D production, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a luminous mode. In addition, the grandchild table of the high base reach type reach D introduction is set with luminance data that becomes the luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach D production. has been done.

As a result, frame LEDs WL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production, the characters appearing, etc. in the introduction part of the high base reach D production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Effect 1]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a ready-to-reach mode. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Then, a decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode before the title display part in the super reach effect, and in the title display part, title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed using the display position of the decorative pattern in the ready-to-reach mode. let By doing this, when a decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-reach mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect using the display position of the decorative pattern, the title characters can also be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title can be displayed suitably.

In addition, since the expectation level of jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that became a reach mode is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player can select either ornament. This draws attention to whether or not the design is in a reach mode, and it is possible to draw more attention to the title characters.

In addition, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the super reach performance, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in reach mode is reduced to a smaller size decorative pattern (small), The title characters corresponding to the super reach performance are displayed using the display position of the reduced decorative pattern (small). By doing this, the decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a reduced size to attract the player's gaze, and the display position of the reduced decorative pattern (small) is used to display the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By displaying the title characters, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title characters.

In addition, in the title display part of the super reach effect, at the timing when the decorative pattern that has become a reach mode is displayed, the title character corresponding to the super reach effect will be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern that has become a reach mode. This makes it easier to draw attention to the title text.

In addition, the super reach performance includes low base weak reach A and B performances, and low base strong reach A to C performances that have higher jackpot expectations than low base weak reach A and B performances, and low base weak reach A. , The title characters corresponding to the B effect and the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects appear in a state where they overlap with one of the decorative symbols in reach mode (the left decorative symbol). Therefore, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

In addition, the super reach effect includes the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach effects A to C. Since it appears overlapping the pattern (decorative pattern on both sides), the title character corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach effects A to C, and the title letters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect are the same as those of the decorative pattern that has become a reach mode. After appearing in a state overlapping one of the decorative patterns (the decorative pattern on the left side) or both decorative patterns (the decorative patterns on both sides), it is displayed in the fixed position, and even during the period when it is displayed in the fixed position, it is in reach mode. Since the title character is displayed overlapping a part of the decorative pattern on both sides, it is easy to draw attention to the title character even after the title character is displayed in a fixed position.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the reach mode. . The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. Then, when an odd number of decorative symbols is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the display position of the odd number of decorative symbols in the reach mode is used in the title display part. If the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed, and an even number of decorative symbols are displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title display will be In the part, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed using the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern that is in the reach mode, and before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects. When odd-numbered decorative patterns are displayed in reach mode, in the title display part, title characters corresponding to low base strong reach A to C effects are used to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbols that are in reach mode. If an even numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in a low base strong reach A to C production, the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern in a reach mode in the title display part. Title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances are displayed as if used. By doing this, when the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-reach mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol caused the ready-to-reach mode. To display title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances using the display position of the decorative pattern in the reach mode in the title display part of the strong reach A to C performances. In this way, the title characters can be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

In addition, since the expectation level of jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that became a reach mode is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player can select either ornament. This draws attention to whether or not the design is in a reach mode, and the title characters can also draw more attention.

[Effect 3]
In this embodiment, after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the reach mode, the performance control CPU 120 controls the low base weak reach A and B performances, the low base strong reach A to C performances, and the low base strongest reach. It is possible to perform the performance. Low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the production result is announced. It is composed of both. Then, when an odd number of decorative symbols is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the display position of the odd number of decorative symbols in the reach mode is used in the title display part. If the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed, and an even number of decorative symbols are displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title display will be In the part, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed using the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern that is in the reach mode, and before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects. When odd-numbered decorative patterns are displayed in reach mode, in the title display part, title characters corresponding to low base strong reach A to C effects are used to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbols that are in reach mode. If an even numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in a low base strong reach A to C production, the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern in a reach mode in the title display part. If the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach effects A to C are displayed as shown in the table below, and an odd number of decorative symbols are displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect, then in the title display part , the title character corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect is displayed using the display position of the odd numbered decorative pattern that is in the reach mode, and the even numbered decorative pattern is in the reach mode before the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect. When displayed, in the title display part, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed so as to use the display positions of even-numbered decorative symbols in the reach mode. By doing this, when the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-reach mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol caused the ready-to-reach mode. Strong reach A to C production, low base weak reach A to B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base using the display position of the decorative pattern that became a reach mode in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production By displaying the title characters corresponding to the strongest reach effect, the title characters can also be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title can be displayed suitably.

In addition, since the expectation level of jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that became a reach mode is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player can select either ornament. This draws attention to whether or not the design is in a reach mode, and it is possible to draw more attention to the title characters.

[Effect 4]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a ready-to-reach mode. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Then, a decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode before the title display part in the super reach effect, and in the title display part, title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed using the display position of the decorative pattern in the ready-to-reach mode. let By doing this, when a decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-reach mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect using the display position of the decorative pattern, the title characters can also be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title can be displayed suitably.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach B performance and the low base strong reach B performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach B performance. The low base weak reach B performance and the low base strong reach B performance are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, in the low base weak reach B production, the ally character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Boingo" are used, and the ally character "Yumemu" announces that there will be a jackpot, and in the low base strong reach B production, Allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" are used, and the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" notify that the jackpot will be won. In the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the display starts with the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" placed in the front and the enemy character "Robo" in the back, and the low base weak In the introduction part of Reach B production, the ally character "Mumemu" is arranged so that the enemy character "Boingo" is not on the front side and the enemy character "Boingo" is on the back side (the ally character "Mumemu" and the enemy character "Boingo" are on the left and right) Start displaying in a facing manner). By doing this, for the low base weak reach B performance where the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high, the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" who will be notified of the jackpot will be on the front side, and the enemy character "Robo" will be on the front side. By starting from an arrangement where ``'' is on the back side, the player can empathize with the game, and it becomes easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

In addition, ally characters are characters that are given benefits when they win in battle, and enemy characters are characters that are not given benefits when they win in battle. ” and “Nana” are displayed in the front position with their backs turned, the enemy character “Robo” is displayed in the back position with their backs facing you, and the ally characters “Jam” and “Nana” and the enemy character “Robo” are displayed in the back position. '', and the low base strong reach B effect, which has relatively high expectations, has the player facing the same direction as the ally characters ``Jam'' and ``Nana'', so the player It becomes easier to make the player empathize with the player, and it becomes easier to make the player realize that the player has a high expectation of winning the jackpot.

Also, in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed in a position that includes the display area where the title characters were displayed in the title display part. Therefore, when the title characters disappear, the player who was paying attention to the title characters naturally starts to look at the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo."

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 is configured to control the low base weak reach A, B production, the low base weak reach A, B production, which has a higher jackpot expectation, and the low base weak reach A, B production, which has a longer production time. It is possible to perform strong base reach A to C effects. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. Also, dialogue subtitles are used for both the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances. In the low base weak reach A and B productions, the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part, and in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part continue to be displayed, while the low base In the strong reach A to C effects, title characters are displayed without dialogue subtitles in the title display part. By doing this, the low base strong reach A to C productions that have a relatively high expectation of a jackpot and a long execution time are displayed so that the title characters and dialogue subtitles do not overlap as much as possible, and the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high. In the case of low base weak reach A and B productions with low intensity and short execution time, even if the display of dialogue subtitles and title characters overlap, by finishing the display of title characters first, attention will also be paid to dialogue subtitles. This makes it possible to suitably provide the title characters and dialogue subtitles to the player, and as a result, it is possible to suitably display the title.

In addition, if title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B productions, in the subsequent introduction part, the dialogue subtitles that were displayed at the same time as the title characters will be displayed until the display ends. Since the scene does not change, you can draw attention to the title text and then the dialogue subtitles.

In addition, when title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, but the audio corresponding to the title characters is not output. It becomes easier to hear the audio that corresponds to dialogue subtitles.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D. The low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the title display for the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D is composed of multiple characters (``Catch the Bakushu with 6 people!'', ``Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B ~ D)''). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach effect A to D, the display of title characters is started at an enlarged size where only part of the multiple characters is visible, and from the enlarged size The display size is gradually reduced and the title characters are displayed at a reduced size where all the multiple characters can be seen.By doing this, the title display for the strongest low base reach effect and the high base reach effect A to D is displayed. In the part, multiple characters are displayed at an enlarged size where only part of them can be seen, and then gradually become smaller and displayed at a reduced size where all characters can be seen, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the title characters. can.

In addition, before the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect is started, the movable body 32 is moved so as to overlap with the front side of the image display device 5, and after the movable body 32 is operated, the movable body 32 is moved to the initial stage. A background dedicated to the falling effect is displayed during the period during which the falling effect is executed until returning to the position, and when the movable body 32 returns to the initial position, all of the plurality of characters forming the title character are not visible. , and starts displaying title characters in an enlarged size that fills the display area and makes the background invisible, and then displays title characters in a reduced size and a background dedicated to displaying the title. By doing so, it is possible to create an impact with the display method of the title characters, and at the same time, the background can be switched without any discomfort, and the title characters can be suitably shown to the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of high base reach A to D performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach systems), and high base reach A is controlled. ~In the introduction part of the D production, use the brightness data table for the introduction part (introducing high base reach type reach A, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the brightness data table for title display (the brightness data table composed of the brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach system strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the introduction part (luminance data composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect) The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction), and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results The title can be suitably displayed as follows.

[Effect 8]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D. The low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the title display for the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D is composed of multiple characters (``Catch the Bakushu with 6 people!'', ``Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B ~ D)''). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and high base reach A to D performance, the title display part is ended by expanding and displaying multiple characters from the state where multiple characters are displayed, Display the background at the start of the introduction part.By doing this, the player is paying attention to the title characters in the title display part, and using the title characters appropriately, the background corresponding to the next introduction part is displayed. You can switch between the two without feeling any discomfort.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of high base reach A to D performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach systems), and high base reach A is controlled. ~In the introduction part of the D production, use the brightness data table for the introduction part (introducing high base reach type reach A, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the brightness data table for title display (luminance data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach system strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the introduction part (luminance data composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect) The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction), and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results The title can be suitably displayed as follows.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach performances A and B, and low base strong reach performances A to C. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. Also, the execution time of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances (T1-1 to 2) is different from the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances (T2-1 to 3). , in both title display parts, the title start period from when the title character starts displaying until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the display ends from the display at the fixed position. It consists of a title end period until the end of the title. In addition, both in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances and in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. To display title characters so that the period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the title display period displayed at the fixed position can be made the longest. By doing this, you can draw attention to the type of title characters. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the title start period until it is displayed at the regular position will be displayed from the regular position display. By setting the time period until the end of the title to be longer than the title end period, it is possible to influence which title characters are displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period is the same. By doing this, you can make the title display part easier to understand.

[Effect 10]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance both in a normal state and in a variable probability state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Also, the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance in the normal state (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) is different from the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the super reach performance in the variable probability state. , in both title display parts, the title start period from when the title character starts displaying until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the display ends from the display at the fixed position. It consists of the title end period until the end of the title. In both the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the title display part of the super reach performance in the variable probability state, the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is the title end period. Display the title character so that it is longer than . By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the variable probability state, the title display part can be displayed by making the title display period displayed at the fixed position the longest. It can draw attention to the type of characters. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the variable state, the title start period until it is displayed in the fixed position is changed from the display in the fixed position to the end of the display. By setting the time period to be longer than the title end period, it is possible to influence which title characters are displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state, the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period can be made the same. , the title display part can be made easier to understand.

In addition, the execution time (T4) of the title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is longer than the execution time of the title display part (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the super reach effect in the normal state. Since the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance executed in a variable probability state is relatively short, it is possible to proceed with the game in a variable probability state at a good tempo. Since the execution time of the part is relatively long, it can be thoroughly stimulated.

In addition, regardless of the type of super reach performance executed in the variable probability state, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the low base weak reach performances A and B, which have lower jackpot expectations among the super reach performances executed in the normal state. Even if the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance is high and the probability is variable, and the execution time of the title display part is relatively short, the expectation of a jackpot can be made just by executing the super reach performance.

In addition, the execution time of the super reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same regardless of the type of super reach effect executed in the variable probability state, but among the super reach effect executed in the normal state, The expected jackpot is higher than the low base weak reach A and B performances, which have a low jackpot expectation, and the execution time of the super reach performance and the execution time of the title display part, regardless of the type of super reach performance executed in the variable probability state. Even if it is the same, you can expect a big hit just by executing the super reach effect.

Also, among the super reach performances executed in normal conditions, the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B, is the same as the low base weak reach performances. The execution time of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is set longer than the execution time of the title display part in the AB performance, and has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performances A to C. It is set longer than the execution time of the title display part in A to C effects. By doing this, in the normal state, the execution time of the title display part is longer for a super reach performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot, so that it can be more strongly promoted.

Also, among the super reach performances executed in normal conditions, the title display period during which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position in the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B. The execution time is set longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base weak reach AB production, and the title display period in the low base strongest reach production, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C productions. The execution time is set longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base strong reach A to C effects. By doing this, in the normal state, the longer the execution time of the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position, the higher the expectation of a jackpot is, the longer the execution time of the title display period, so it is possible to firmly promote the performance.

[Effect 11]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the title display part includes the title start period from when the title character starts displaying until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the time when the display ends from the display at the fixed position. It consists of a title end period up to. In the title display part, title characters are displayed such that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing so, the type of title character can be drawn to the attention by making the title display period displayed at a fixed position the longest. Further, by setting the title start period until the title is displayed at the fixed position to be longer than the title end period from the display at the fixed position to the end of the display, it is possible to influence which title characters are displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state, the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period can be made the same. , the title display part can be made easier to understand.

[Effect 12]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach performances A to C and low base strongest reach performance. The low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, as shown in Figure 11-43, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect and the low base strong reach effect A to C effects, the title characters are displayed in white, and in red, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the white mode. It is possible to display it in various ways. In the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the low base strong reach performance A to C, the corresponding expectation level suggestion display is displayed, and then the title characters are displayed in a larger size than the expectation level suggestion display. At this time, whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in a common manner. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect and the low base strong reach effect A to C are larger in size than the expectation level suggestion display, and their appearance suggests the level of expectation. Therefore, it attracts the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation level suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the expectation level suggestion first. In addition, since the expectation level suggestion display is performed in a common manner whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, attention can be drawn to the subsequent appearance of the title characters.

[Effect 13]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach B performance and the low base strong reach C performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach B performance. The low base strong reach B and C effects include both a title display part in which the corresponding title characters are displayed and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars) in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, and in the second mode (4 stars) in the title display part of the low base strong reach C production. ) to display the expectation level suggestion display. At this time, the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance and the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance are highlighted in a common manner. By doing this, even when displaying the expectation suggestion display in the first mode in the title display part in the low base strong reach B performance, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the second mode in the title display part in the low base strong reach C production. Even when displaying the expectation level suggestion display, the development cost can be reduced by making the highlighted display a common mode.

In addition, the expectation level suggestion display is composed of multiple star-shaped objects, and in the low base strong reach B production, the expectation level is suggested by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects, In the low base strong reach C performance, the level of expectation is suggested by N+1 (4) objects, and each star-shaped object is highlighted, and even when one object is highlighted, the level of expectation is 0. Even when five objects are highlighted, the highlighting is done in a common manner. By doing this, whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted, the highlighting is done in a common manner. This can reduce development costs.

Furthermore, in the expectation level suggestion display, the time during which one star-shaped object is highlighted is the same as the time during which 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. By doing this, the time for highlighting one star object and the time for highlighting 0.5 star objects can be made the same, reducing development costs. Can be done.

In addition, in the expectation level suggestion display, a common expectation level suggestion sound is output both when one star-shaped object is highlighted and when 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. . By doing this, a common expectation level suggestion sound is output whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. This can reduce development costs.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for strong base systems), and the low base strong reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of the B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, in the low base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common brightness data table (strong base system common title) in the title display part, but in the low base strong reach B performance In the title display part, a brightness data table for displaying the title in the low base strong reach B performance (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance (strong reach type strong reach B title) )) to control the game effect lamp 9 using The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach type strong reach C title) that is configured with brightness data corresponding to the low base strong reach. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using different brightness data tables for title display in the title display part of the B performance and the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the appropriate light emission according to the title display is performed. The game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light depending on the mode, and as a result, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 14]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach performances A to C, low base strongest reach performances, and high base reach performances A to D. For the low base strong reach A to C production, the low base strongest reach production, and the high base reach A to D production, the title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and the introduction part until the production result is announced are all It is also composed of Further, in the title display part of the low base strong reach performance A to C, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach performance A to D, an expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects can be displayed. In the expectation level suggestion display, the first star-shaped object is highlighted, and then the second star-shaped object is highlighted while continuing to highlight the first star-shaped object. After that, the highlighting for the first star-shaped object is ended, and the highlighting for the third star-shaped object is performed. By doing this, in the expectation level suggestion display, the highlighting for the second star-shaped object starts before the highlighting for the first star-shaped object ends, but the highlighting for the third star-shaped object ends. Since the highlighting of the objects does not start until the highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, it becomes easier to recognize the number of objects that indicate the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, in the expectation level suggestion display, an expectation level suggestion sound is output every time a star-shaped object is highlighted, and after the output of the expectation level suggestion sound for the first star-shaped object is finished, the next star-shaped object is highlighted. A sound indicating the expectation level of highlighting for the object is output. By doing so, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object does not overlap with the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object, making it easier to recognize the number of objects that indicate the degree of expectation.

In addition, the expectation level suggestion display is composed of multiple star-shaped objects and the characters "expectation level" indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the level of expectation. '' is carried out in a size that overlaps with the above. By doing so, by highlighting the star-shaped object, it is possible to draw attention to both the multiple star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display and the text indicating that the star-shaped object indicates the level of expectation. .

In addition, in this embodiment, when highlighting some of the star-shaped objects among the plurality of star-shaped objects, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects is changed to text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation. Although this is a superimposed configuration, for all star-shaped objects, the highlighted display for the star-shaped object may be superimposed on the text indicating that the star-shaped object indicates the degree of expectation.

[Effect 15]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach performances A to C, low base strongest reach performances, and high base reach performances A to D. For the low base strong reach A to C production, the low base strongest reach production, and the high base reach A to D production, the title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and the introduction part until the production result is announced are all It is also composed of In addition, it is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not started yet, and multiple hold displays can be displayed in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach effects A to D. It is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display composed of star-shaped objects. Then, in the title display part of the low base strong reach performance A to C, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach performance A to D, the hold display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. By doing this, an expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the low base strongest reach effects, and the high base reach effects A to D. Since the pending display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, it is possible to prevent the pending display from being mistakenly recognized as the expectation level suggesting display.

In particular, the maximum number of active displays corresponding to pending displays and variable displays that have been started will match the maximum number of star objects that make up the expectation suggestion display, but the maximum number of pending displays and active displays will be Even if low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach effects A to D are executed in the displayed situation, the pending display and active display constitute a star-shaped object that constitutes an expectation level suggestion display. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that the maximum number of is displayed.

Moreover, by erasing the hold display when a monochrome display effect in which the display area is displayed in a single color is executed before the start of the title display part, the hold display can be ended without any discomfort.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects and high base reach A to D effects, the brightness data table for title display (strong base common title, high base, high base reach type Common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of low base strong reach A to C effects and high base reach A to D effects, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach A introduction , introduction of strong reach system strong reach B, introduction of strong reach system strong reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D) is used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances and the high base reach A to D performances, the game uses a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. Since the effect lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the brightness data table for title display (luminance data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach system strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the introduction part (luminance data composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect) The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction), and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results The title can be suitably displayed as follows.

[Effect 16]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach performances A to C and high base reach performances A to C. The low base strong reach A to C performances and the high base reach A to C performances are comprised of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. . In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A production/high base reach A production, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of the first number (3) star-shaped objects, and the low base strong reach B production/ In the title display part of the high base reach B performance, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display consisting of a second number (3.5) of star-shaped objects, which is larger than the first number, and a low base strong reach C performance/high In the title display part in the base reach C performance, it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display composed of a third number (4) of star-shaped objects, which is larger than the second number. The difference between the first number (3) and the second number (3.5) is the same as the difference between the second number (3.5) and the third number (4) (0.5 ), and the expected jackpot when the low base strong reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4)/high base reach C performance is executed and the low base strong reach corresponding to the second number (3.5) The difference from the jackpot expectation level when the B performance/high base reach B performance is executed is when the low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed. It is larger than the difference between the jackpot expectation level when the low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance corresponding to the first number (3) is executed. By doing this, the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5), and the second number ( The increase in the number of star objects is the same as when increasing from 3.5) to the third number (4), but the number increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5). The amount of increase in the jackpot expectation is larger when the number increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4) than when the number of star objects increases, so the increase in the number of star objects increases. While it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot more than the number of objects, it does not make the player expect an excessive jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects is small.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance, and the number of title display parts in the low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance is greater than the third number (4). It is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display consisting of a star-shaped object of the fourth number (4.5), and the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) (0.5 ) is smaller than the difference (1) between the first number (3) and the third number (4), and is the lowest base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance corresponding to the fourth number (4.5). The difference between the jackpot expectation level when the is executed and the jackpot expectation level when the low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed is the third number (4). ) corresponding to the low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance when the jackpot expectation level is executed and the low base strong reach B performance corresponding to the first number (3)/high base reach B performance is executed. This is larger than the difference between the expected jackpot and the expected jackpot. By doing this, the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4). The increase in the number of star-shaped objects is smaller when increasing from the first number (4.5) to the fourth number (4.5), but the increase in the number of star objects is smaller than when increasing from the first number (3) to the third number (4). The amount of increase in the jackpot expectation is greater when increasing from (4) to the fourth number (4.5), so the more the number of star-shaped objects increases, the smaller the number of star-shaped objects increased. But you can expect to hit the jackpot.

Also, the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is 0.5, and the difference between the first number (3) and the third number (4) is 1. Yes, the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases by 1 from the first number (3) to become the third number (4). If the number is increased by 0.5 to the fourth number (4.5), it can be expected to be an even bigger hit.

In addition, the jackpot expectation level and the high base reach B corresponding to the second number (3.5) when the high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in a variable probability state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The difference between the jackpot expectation level when the performance is executed is the difference between the jackpot expectation level and the second number (3.5) when the low base strong reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the normal state. ) is larger than the difference from the jackpot expectation level when the low base strong reach B performance corresponding to the above is executed. By doing this, it is possible to make people expect that the variable probability state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, will hit the jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases. can.

[Effect 17]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B performances and low base strong reach A to C performances that have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state. . The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. The title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances is longer than the title display part in the low base weak reach performances A and B. While the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, which have relatively high expectations, is better than the title display part in the low base weak reach performances A and B, which have relatively low expectations. In addition, while the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach performances A and B. It is possible to make the user realize that the level of expectation is higher for the strong base reach performances A to C than for the low base weak reach performances A and B.

In addition, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period), The title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances has no prologue display period and consists only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances does not have a prologue display period. is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. Also, it is possible to make the user realize that the level of expectation is higher for the low base strong reach performances A to C than the low base weak reach performances A and B.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance that has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C performances in the normal state, and the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances is , consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period (title start period, title display period, title end period) in which title characters are displayed, and the title display part in the low base strongest reach production is It consists only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach performance A to C. . By doing this, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, so It is possible to make the user realize that the level of expectation is higher for the strongest base reach performance than for the low base strong reach performances A to C.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the brightness data table for each title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems). Control the game effect lamp 9 using the game effect lamp 9 using The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, it is possible to cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 18]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B performances and low base strong reach A to C performances that have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state. . The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. In addition, in the low base weak reach performances A and B, there are cases where a jackpot is not announced as the performance result, there are cases where a loss is announced as the performance result, and there are cases where it develops into other super reach performances. In the low base strong reach A to C performances, there are cases where a jackpot is announced as a result of the performance, and there are cases where a miss is reported. Then, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach performances A to C, while the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach performances A and B. By doing this, while the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances that may directly notify that there will be a jackpot, it will also directly notify that there will be a jackpot. Since the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances that are not reported, it is possible to prevent the low base weak reach A and B performances from creating an excessive sense of expectation. .

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach performances A and B, it is possible to display the title letters in a golden form that is certain to develop into other super reach performances, so the expectation level suggestion display is Even the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances that is not displayed can draw the attention of the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the brightness data table for each title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems). Control the game effect lamp 9 using the game effect lamp 9 using The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, it is possible to cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 19]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach effects A to C and low base strongest reach. The low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach are composed of both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach may be executed via a selection effect using title characters that correspond to multiple super reach effects, and the low base strong reach effects A to C It is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display together with the title characters in the performance, the title display part of the lowest base strongest reach, and the selected performance. Then, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach, the expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, When displaying the expectation level suggestion display in a selection performance, the expectation level suggestion display constituted by a plurality of star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages. By doing this, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C production and low base strongest reach, the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects will be displayed. However, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the selection performance, the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages, so only the title display part is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance caused by the step-by-step display of the expectation level suggestion display even in the previous selection performance.

In addition, the selection performance is a performance that changes in stages from a super reach performance with a low jackpot expectation level to a super reach performance with a high jackpot expectation level by operating the push button 31B, and it takes a certain amount of time to change one stage in the selection performance. The time, that is, the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach effect, is displayed in one step in the expectation level suggestion display of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect. In some cases, this time is shorter than the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold after being highlighted, and it is possible to give a sense of speed to the gradual change in the selection effect.

In addition, the selection performance is a performance that changes at each stage to a super reach performance that has a higher expectation of jackpot than the current super reach performance, and each time it changes by one stage, it is necessary to change to the next stage. The number of times the push button 31B is operated increases. By doing this, it is possible to irritate the player as the expectation level of the jackpot in the super reach effect increases.

Furthermore, when the low base strong reach performance A to C performance or the low base strongest reach performance is selected as the selection performance, the game starts from the title display part of the super reach performance. By doing this, even if the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strongest reach effects are executed via the selection effects, it will start from the title display part, so which super reach effect will be executed in the end. It is easy for the player to determine whether the

[Effect 20]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title characters of the super reach performance. By doing this, the situation where the title text is displayed in the super reach effect is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the situation where the title text is displayed in the jackpot start effect is the situation where the title text is displayed in the super reach effect. This is a situation after it has already been announced that a jackpot will be won, and by moving the title characters of the jackpot start performance more widely, it is possible to celebrate that the game will be controlled into a jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance in a manner with greater movement than the title characters of the super reach performance, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the title display part of the super reach effect, when displaying title characters, a background dedicated to title display is displayed (low base strong reach B, C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D). The background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to displaying the title in the super reach effect. By doing this, the background of the title characters of the jackpot start effect can be moved more greatly to congratulate the control of the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach performance is a static image, but the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach performance may be a moving image. By displaying the background of the title characters of the start performance in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to title display in the super reach performance, it is possible to congratulate the control to a jackpot game state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 21]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, in operation promotion effects B and D in the introduction part of the super reach effect, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, the operation prompting characters (small) displayed in the introduction part encourage the player to move (operate), and should be moved more than the title characters displayed in the title display part. This allows the player to intuitively prompt the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, in the operation promotion performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, the player is prompted to operate the push button 31B, and operation promotion characters (small) that suggest a more advantageous situation than the operation promotion characters (small) are also used. (Large) can be displayed, and both the operation promotion characters (small) and operation promotion characters (large) are displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, whether the operation promotion characters (small) or operation promotion characters (large) are moved larger than the title characters displayed in the title display part, players can intuitively Actions (operations) can be encouraged.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the operation promotion letters (small) in a manner that moves more than the title letters of the super reach performance, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to perform an operation (operation). In addition, even in such a configuration, both the operation promotion characters (small) and the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, so that the operation promotion characters (small) or operation prompting characters (large), by moving them larger than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, the number of characters (3) of the operation promotion characters (small)) is smaller than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title characters of the super reach effect, so even if you move the operation promotion characters (small)) greatly, the content of the characters will not change. It can be recognized.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B Introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 22]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, in the title display part of the super reach effect, explanatory characters that explain the content of the super reach effect can be displayed. At this time, the explanatory characters are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, by displaying the additionally displayed explanatory characters in a manner that moves more than the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory characters are added in addition to the title characters. can.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the explanatory text in a manner with greater movement than the title text in the super reach effect, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory text is added in addition to the title text. .

Furthermore, since the explanatory text suggests that the super reach performance is advantageous, the fact that the explanatory text is added can draw further attention.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 23]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach performances A and B, and the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. . Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach performances A to C are displayed in a larger size than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach performances A and B. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have relatively high expectations, are better than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach performances A and B, which have relatively low expectations. Since the font size is displayed larger than the title, you can experience that the expectation of jackpot is higher in the low base strong reach A to C effects than the low base weak reach A and B effects just by looking at the title text. It can be recognized.

In addition, the number of characters (10) that make up the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach performances A and B is greater than the number of characters that make up the title characters (7, 8) that correspond to the low base strong reach performances B and C. The display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C performances is larger than the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach performances A and B. By doing this, the display area size of one character for the title character corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects is larger, so the low base strong reach B and C effects are better than the low base weak reach. It is possible to make the player realize that the expectation level of jackpot is higher than that of performances A and B.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the brightness data table for each title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems). Control the game effect lamp 9 using the game effect lamp 9 using The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, it is possible to cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 24]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a ready-to-reach mode. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode before the title display part in a super reach performance, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in a ready-to-reach mode is displayed reduced to a small-sized decorative pattern (small). At this time, at least one of the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed in a size larger than the size of the decorative pattern (small). By doing this, at least one of the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect will be displayed in a larger size than the reduced decorative pattern (small), drawing attention to the title character in the title display part. be able to.

Further, any characters of the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed in a size smaller than the decorative pattern (large) and larger than the decorative pattern (small). By doing this, the decorative pattern (large) when the reach mode is reached can be reliably recognized, and after that, the decorative pattern (large) is reduced and becomes the decorative pattern (small), and the Since each character constituting the title character is displayed in a larger size than the pattern (small), the title character can draw attention to the title display part.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B Introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 25]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, in operation promotion effects B and D in the introduction part of the super reach effect, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the title characters of the jackpot start effect will be displayed, whereas the situation where the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed in the super reach effect is when it is not yet known whether or not it is a jackpot. The situation is after the jackpot has already been announced, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect larger than the operation promotion letters (small), it is possible to celebrate that the jackpot game state is controlled. can.

In addition, the title character of the jackpot start effect consists of "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS", and after "BIG" or "REGULAR" is displayed at the top of the fixed position, "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the regular position, "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the regular position, and then "BIG" or "REGULAR" displayed at the top of the regular position and "BONUS" displayed at the bottom of the regular position gradually expand. Is displayed. "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed in the smallest font size when displayed at the top of the regular position and the bottom of the regular position, and "BIG", "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed in the smallest size. The size of the characters when displayed at the upper and lower fixed positions is larger than the size of the characters constituting the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the characters that make up the title letters of the jackpot start effect are always displayed larger than the letters that make up the operation promotion letters (small), which makes it even more congratulatory that the jackpot game state is controlled. be able to.

In addition, the smallest character of the character string that constitutes the title character of the jackpot start performance is larger than the largest character of the character string that constitutes the operation promotion character (small). By doing this, no matter which character you pay attention to, the title character of the jackpot start effect will be displayed larger than the operation promotion character (small), so you can celebrate the control of the jackpot game state even more. Can be done.

In addition, it is possible to display special promotion characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than the operation promotion characters (small), and the operation promotion characters (large) are larger than the title characters of the jackpot start effect. By displaying it, the player can feel the advantageous situation.

In addition, the smallest character of the character string that makes up the operation promotion character (large) is displayed larger than the largest character of the character string that makes up the title character of the jackpot start effect. Even if the player pays attention to it, the operation promotion letters (large) are displayed larger than the title letters of the jackpot start effect, so the player can feel the advantageous situation.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 26]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. By doing this, the situation where the title text is displayed in the super reach effect is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the situation where the title text is displayed in the jackpot start effect is the situation where the title text is displayed in the super reach effect. This is a situation after a jackpot has already been announced, and it is possible to celebrate that the game will be controlled into a jackpot gaming state by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect larger than the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect. can.

In addition, the super reach performance includes multiple types of super reach performances with different title characters, and the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach performance, so that the jackpot game Being controlled by the state can be a blessing.

In addition, the smallest character of the character strings that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect will be displayed larger than the largest character of the character strings that make up the title letters of any type of super reach effect. Therefore, no matter which character one pays attention to, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance, so that the control to the jackpot game state can be more celebrated.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 27]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach effects A and B, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach effects A and B are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters that are displayed afterwards are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small) to draw attention to the title characters. Can be done.

Further, after the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed, the low base weak reach A and B effects develop, and the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects starts. By doing this, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part in a series of flows, and the title characters that are displayed afterwards are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). It can draw attention to the title characters.

In addition, the smallest character of the character strings that make up the title characters corresponding to low base weak reach (A, B effects) is displayed larger than the largest character of the character strings that make up the operation promotion characters (small). Therefore, no matter which character the user focuses on, the title character can be drawn to the viewer's attention.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 28]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach effects A and B, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, after the low base weak reach A and B performances are notified of a jackpot, the title characters of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. Then, the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation promotion letters (small). Make it larger. By doing this, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the low base weak reach performance A and B is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not it will be a jackpot, whereas the title character in the jackpot start performance is The displayed situation is the situation after the jackpot has already been announced, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start performance larger than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, the jackpot game state is indicated. It is a blessing to be controlled by In addition, by displaying operation promotion letters (small) before the title display part, and displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards larger than the operation promotion letters (small). It is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, after the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed, the low base weak reach A and B effects develop, the title display part for the low base weak reach A and B effects starts, and the low base weak reach A and B effects begin. After the jackpot is announced, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed. By doing this, in a series of steps, the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards are displayed to encourage operation. By displaying it larger than the letters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and then after the low base weak reach A and B effects are announced to be a jackpot. By displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to congratulate the control to the jackpot game state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 29]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. By doing this, the situation where the title text is displayed in the super reach effect is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the situation where the title text is displayed in the jackpot start effect is the situation where the title text is displayed in the super reach effect. This is a situation after a jackpot has already been announced, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect for a longer time than the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect, it is possible to control the game into a jackpot gaming state. can be blessed.

In addition, the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed until at least part of the character strings is no longer displayed is the same as the time from when all the character strings that make up the title letters of the jackpot start effect are no longer displayed. This is longer than the time from when the part is displayed until all of the character string is no longer displayed. By doing this, the time when the title letters of the jackpot start effect, which has the intention of blessing, can be clearly seen is longer than the time when the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect, whose purpose is to incite the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed. By making the length longer, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, after the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are switched to a right-hand hitting promotion image (small) and a right-hand hitting promotion image (large) that suggest the operation method during the jackpot game state. , After a predetermined period of time has passed after switching to the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (large), the operation method suggested by the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (large) (pushing the game ball to the right) An advantageous control is performed by operating with the operating method (operation method of launching the ball toward the gaming area 2R), and the time it takes to switch from the title letters of the jackpot start effect to the right-hand hitting promotion image (small) and the right-hand hitting promotion image (large). is shorter than the time required to finish the title character corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are switched to the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (large) in a short time, and then after a predetermined period of time, the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) Advantageous control is performed by operating in the operating method suggested by the promotion image (large), so changing the operating method from the period when the title character of the jackpot start effect ends may cause disadvantages to the player. You can prevent it from becoming a profit.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 30]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, in operation promotion effects B and D in the introduction part of the super reach effect, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the title characters of the jackpot start effect will be displayed, whereas the situation where the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed in the super reach effect is when it is not yet known whether or not it is a jackpot. The situation is after the jackpot has already been announced, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect for a longer time than the operation promotion letters (small), it is possible to control the jackpot game state. can be blessed.

In addition, the operation promotion text (small) will be displayed until the prompted operation is performed or the time period for which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed, and the time when the title text of the jackpot start effect is displayed is the operation promotion text. After (small) is displayed, the prompted operation is not performed, and the time required for the prompted operation to be valid is longer than the time elapsed. By doing this, after the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed, the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer time than the time they are displayed without the prompted operation, so that the jackpot can be won. You can celebrate being controlled in a gaming state.

Further, the time from when all the character strings constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed until at least part of the character strings is no longer displayed is longer than the time during which the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed. By doing this, the time when the title characters of the jackpot start effect, which has the meaning of blessing, can be clearly seen is longer than the time when the operation promotion characters (small) whose purpose is to encourage the player to operate. This can give players a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, it is possible to display operation promotion letters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than operation promotion letters (small). The operation prompting characters (large) are displayed after the promotion introduction effect is executed. The time period in which the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed is longer than the time period in which the operation promotion character (large) is displayed. By doing this, the time during which the name display of an advantageous state with the intention of blessing is displayed is longer than the time during which the operation promotion letters (large) accompanying the promotion introduction display are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction. can give.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 31]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach effects A and B, operation promotion characters (small) urging the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. Title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters that are displayed afterwards are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion characters (small). can draw attention to.

Further, the time from when all the character strings forming the title characters are displayed until at least part of the character strings is no longer displayed is longer than the time during which the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title display is clearly visible becomes longer than the time during which the promotional text display whose purpose is to encourage the player to take action is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the title text.

In addition, it is possible to display operation promotion letters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than operation promotion letters (small). The operation prompting characters (large) are displayed after the promotion introduction effect is executed. The time period in which the title characters are displayed is longer than the time period in which the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title display is displayed is longer than the time during which the operation promotion characters (large) accompanying the promotion introduction display are displayed, and the title characters can be drawn to attention.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 32]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach effects A and B, operation promotion characters (small) urging the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. Furthermore, after the low base weak reach A and B performances are notified of a jackpot, the title characters of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. Then, the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer time than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed as operation promotion letters ( small) for a longer period of time. By doing this, the situation where the title character is displayed in the low base weak reach performance A and B is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the title character in the jackpot start performance is displayed. The situation that is displayed is the situation after the jackpot has already been announced, and the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer period of time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances. You can congratulate yourself on being controlled into a jackpot gaming state. In addition, the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion letters (small). By displaying this, it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 33]
In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A, B productions and low base strong reach A to C production in the normal state, and high base reach A to C production in the probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. D effect can be executed. Low base weak reach A and B performances, low base strong reach A to C performances, and high base reach A to D performances in variable state are the title display part that displays the corresponding title letters and the time until the performance result is announced. It consists of both an introduction part and. In addition, low base strong reach A to C performances have higher jackpot expectations than low base weak reach A and B performances, and high base reach B to D performances have higher jackpot expectations than high base reach A performances. The high base reach A performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances. Then, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances, high base reach A performance, and high base reach B to D performances, an expectation level suggestion display is displayed, and the title display part of the low base weak reach performances A and B. In this case, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed. By doing this, the low base weak reach performances A and B in the normal state have lower jackpot expectations than the low base strong reach performances A to C in the normal state. A degree suggestion display is displayed, but an expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed in the low base weak reach A and B performances, thereby preventing excessive expectation of a jackpot due to the low base weak reach A and B performances. On the other hand, although the high base reach A performance in the variable probability state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower jackpot expectation than the high base reach B to D performances in the variable probability state, it is more likely to hit the jackpot than the low base weak reach performances A and B in the normal state. Since the level of expectation is high, by displaying an expectation level suggestion display for both high base reach A performance and high base reach B to D performances, it is possible to display expectations in both high base reach A performance and high base reach B to D performance. You can also expect to hit the jackpot.

[Effect 34]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance both in a normal state and in a variable probability state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The title display part of the super reach performance in the variable probability state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state. By doing this, the title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state, and the game in the variable probability state can be played at a good tempo.

In addition, even if the frequency at which super reach effects are executed in a variable probability state is higher than the frequency at which super reach effects are executed in a normal state, the title display part of the super reach effect in a variable probability state is the same as the title display part of the super reach effect in a normal state. By being shorter than the display part, the game can be played with variable probability at a good tempo.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable state, the luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system, high base reach The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the system common title), and in the introduction part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, Introducing weak reach type weak reach B, introducing strong reach type strong reach A, introducing strong reach type strong reach B, introducing strong reach type strong reach C, introducing high base reach type reach A, introducing high base reach type reach B, high base The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the reach type reach C introduction and the high base reach type reach D introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 35]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach performance A to C performance and the low base strongest reach performance that has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performance A to C performance. The low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls the game to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. Then, in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters move from the left side of the display area to the center, and the title display in the low base strongest reach effect. In the part, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are reduced from being enlarged, and when the time saving state B (play time) is controlled, in the play time start performance, the play time start performance is Title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are reduced from being enlarged, similar to the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance. By doing this, when the time saving state B (play time) is controlled, in the play time start effect, the title character of the play time start effect is changed to the title of the low base strongest reach effect with relatively high jackpot expectation. Since it is displayed in the same display mode as the characters, it can be recognized that the time-saving state B (play time) is highly advantageous.

In addition, when the title characters are erased in the play time start effect, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title letters are enlarged and erased, similar to when the title letters are erased in the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect. Make it disappear. By doing this, even when the title characters are erased in the play time start effect, they are erased in the same display mode as when the title letters are erased in the low base strongest reach effect where the expectation of jackpot is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to make the user recognize that the time saving state B (play time) is highly advantageous.

[Effect 36]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls the game to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. When the time saving state B (play time) is controlled, the title characters of the play time start performance are displayed in the play time start performance, and the size of the characters constituting the title characters of the play time start performance is The size is larger than the size of the characters composing the title characters corresponding to the production. By doing this, the title character is displayed in the super reach performance when it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the title character in the play time start performance is displayed in the time-saving state B ( The characters that make up the title letters of the play time start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the title letters that correspond to the super reach effect, so the time-saving state B (play time) is controlled. ) can be blessed to be controlled by.

In addition, the super reach effect includes multiple types of super reach effects with different title characters, and the characters that make up the title letters of the play time start effect are different from the characters that make up the title letters that correspond to any type of super reach effect. It's also big. By doing this, the characters that make up the title letters of the play time start effect are displayed larger than the letters that make up the title letters that correspond to any type of super reach effect, so time saving state B (play time) It is a blessing to be controlled by

Further, the smallest character of the character strings forming the title characters of the play time start effect is larger than the largest character of the character strings forming the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach effect. By doing this, no matter which character you pay attention to, the title character of the play time start effect will be displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, so the time saving state B (play time) will be controlled. We can celebrate our blessings even more.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 37]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls the game to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to time saving state B (play time), the title characters of the play time start performance are displayed in the play time start performance, and the display time of the title characters of the play time start performance corresponds to the super reach performance. It is longer than the display time of title characters. By doing this, the title character is displayed in the super reach performance when it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the title character in the play time start performance is displayed in the time-saving state B ( Since the title character of the play time start effect is displayed longer than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, it is a blessing that the time saving state B (play time) is controlled. can do.

In addition, the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed until at least a part of the character strings are no longer displayed is the time that the character string that makes up the title letters that corresponds to the super reach effect is This is longer than the time from when a part of the character string is displayed until all of the character string is no longer displayed. By doing this, the time when the title letters of the play time start effect, which has the intention of blessing, can be clearly seen is longer than the time when the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect, whose purpose is to incite the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed. The game also lasts a long time, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 38]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls the game to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. Further, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the remaining number of times until the play time is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). The size of the characters composing the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance is larger than the size of the characters composing the remaining number of times until play time characters. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the remaining number of play times until play time, so it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect. .

In addition, the super reach performance includes low base weak reach performances A and B, and low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B. The number of times character is displayed during the execution of the low base weak reach performances A and B, and is not displayed during the execution of the low base strong reach performances A to C. By doing this, in the low base weak reach A and B performances where the expectation of jackpot is low, the remaining number of times until play time is displayed, so it is possible to make you aware of the number of times until time saving state B (play time) On the other hand, in the low base strong reach A to C performances where the expectation of a jackpot is high, attention can be drawn to the contents of the performance by not displaying the characters of the number of times remaining until play time. In addition, in the time-saving state B (play time), since it is easier to win a jackpot which is more advantageous than in the normal state, the player's feeling of regret can be alleviated when the number of times remaining until the time-saving state B (play time) is small.

In addition, if the selection effect develops to the low base strong reach A to C effects without going through the low base weak reach effects A and B, the number of remaining times until play time will not be displayed even while the selection effect is being executed. By doing so, the number of remaining times until play time will not interfere with the selection performance in which the super reach performance that is higher than the low base strong reach A to C performance is determined by the number of characters remaining until play time, and the number of times remaining until time saving state B (play time). If there are few players, the player's sense of regret can be alleviated.

In addition, when it is announced that there will be a jackpot in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the character will not be displayed again for the remaining number of times until the play time and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and the low base strong reach A to C performances will be controlled. When it is reported that the player is out of the game, the number of remaining times until the play time is displayed again after the low base strong reach performances A to C are finished. By doing this, when it is announced that there will be a jackpot with the low base strong reach A to C effect, the remaining number of times until the play time will not be displayed again, and the number of times until the time saving state B (play time) will be reduced. To alleviate a player's sense of regret when the number of remaining games is small. In addition, if it is announced that you will lose in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the characters remaining until the play time will be displayed again after the low base strong reach effects A to C are finished, so the time saving state B ( If there are only a few times left until play time, it can be relieved quickly.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 39]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls the game to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. Further, in operation promotion effects A to D executed at timings related to the super reach effect, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the remaining number of times until the play time is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). The size of the characters constituting the operation promotion characters (small) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the remaining number of times until play time characters. By doing this, the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed larger than the letters that make up the number of remaining times until play time, so you can draw attention to the operation promotion letters (small) and effectively It is possible to prompt the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, when performing the low base strong reach performances A to C of the super reach performances, if the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed in the operation promotion performance A that is executed before the title display part, the play time The characters for the number of times remaining until play time are displayed at the same time, but when displaying the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion effect D that is executed at the end of the introduction part, the characters for the number of times remaining until play time are not displayed. . By doing this, before the development of the low base strong reach A to C effect, the promotion text display operation promotion text (small) and the number of remaining times until the play time remain displayed at the same time, the time is saved. It is possible to make the player aware of the number of times until B (play time), and by not displaying the remaining number of times until play time in the operation promotion letters (small) in the introduction part, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot will be announced. It can draw attention.

In addition, when performing the low base strong reach A to C effects, the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part is more advantageous than the operation promotion text (small) and the operation promotion text (small). Of the operation promotion letters (large) that are suggested, only the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed, while in the operation promotion effect D executed at the end of the introduction part, the operation promotion letters (small) are also displayed (large). ) can also be displayed, and when the operation promotion letters (large) are displayed in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the remaining number of times until play time letters are not displayed at the same time. By doing so, in addition to whether or not a jackpot will be announced, operation promotion characters (large) are displayed to draw attention to the fact that a more advantageous situation is suggested.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems), and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part of the super reach performance. In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C) is used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 40]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls the game to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. Further, after it is announced that there will be a jackpot due to the super reach effect, title characters of the jackpot start effect corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. Further, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the remaining number of times until the play time is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). Then, before displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the characters remaining for the number of times until play time are erased, and the size of the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start performance is changed to the number of times remaining until play time. larger than the size of the characters that make it up. By doing this, the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed is the situation after the jackpot has already been announced, and the remaining number of characters until play time is unnecessary, so the jackpot start effect is displayed. Before displaying the title characters, the remaining number of play time characters are erased, and the characters that make up the title character of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the remaining number of play time characters. Therefore, you can congratulate yourself on being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, regardless of the number of times remaining until time saving state B (play time), the size of the characters that make up the remaining number of times until play time is the same, and the size of the letters that make up the title letters of the jackpot start effect is the same. The size of the characters is larger than the size of the characters forming the remaining number of times until play time character. By doing this, no matter what number of times remain until time saving state B (play time)), the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect will make up the characters that make up the remaining number of times until play time. Since it is displayed larger than the text, you can congratulate yourself on being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the time saving state B (play time) in the variable display caused by the game ball entering the first starting prize opening and the second starting winning opening in the time saving state B (playing time). A variable display is performed using the time saving B start variation pattern which has a longer variation time than the variation pattern normally used. By doing so, it is possible to execute the play time start performance in the variation period according to the time saving B start variation pattern in the first variation in the time saving state B (play time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems), and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part of the super reach performance. In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C) is used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 41]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, it is possible to change the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach effects A and B from white to red or gold and display them. When changing the title characters from white to red or gold in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the time when the title characters are displayed in red or gold is longer. To display title characters in white for a longer time than they are displayed. By doing this, when changing the title characters from white to red or gold in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, the red or gold color, that is, the changed color Since the title characters are displayed longer than the title characters in the white mode, that is, in the mode before the change, it is possible to reliably recognize that the color has changed from white to red or gold.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, there are cases where the title characters change from white to red or gold, and cases where they do not change from white to white. When changing the color from white to red or gold, when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, the white color is changed to red or gold, a specific sound is output, and the title characters are changed to white. If the mode remains unchanged, when the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, the white mode remains unchanged and the specific sound is output. By doing this, when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from white to red or gold at a specific timing, a specific sound is output, and at the same time, the title characters change from white to red or gold at a specific timing. Since the specific sound is output even when the mode remains unchanged, it is possible to expect that the mode will change to red or gold due to the output of the specific sound.

In addition, when changing the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects from a white aspect to another aspect, a specific sound is also used when changing to a red aspect or a gold aspect. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which type of mode changes when the specific sound is output.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 42]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are changed from white to red, or gold to suggest that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the red color. is possible. In the title display part of low base weak reach A and B productions, in any case where the title characters are changed from white to red or gold, the display becomes common from the white format. The image is displayed in such a manner that the color changes to a red color or a gold color. By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters can be changed from white to red, or from white to gold. , since the display mode is changed to the common display mode and then changed to the red mode or the gold mode, by changing from the white mode to the common display mode, the common display mode changes to the red mode or the gold mode. Until the end, you can expect the game to change to the gold color mode, which has higher jackpot expectations than the red color mode.

Moreover, a common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title characters are made to shine, and when the light is clear, the display mode changes to a red mode or a golden mode. By doing so, the characters constituting the title characters can be illuminated to encourage the characters to change to a red color or a gold color.

[Effect 43]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). Then, the production control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table for the common title display part (common title for the weak reach system) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B production. ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach A effect (weak reach system weak reach A introduction). In the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B performance (weak reach type weak reach B introduction). By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for the two different super reach effects, thereby preventing increases in cost and capacity, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part is different from each other. By using the corresponding brightness data table, it is possible to suitably lengthen the period until notification of whether or not there is a jackpot, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 44]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach performances A and B, and the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. . In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). Then, the production control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table for the common title display part (common title for the weak reach system) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B production. ) to control the game effect lamp 9, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance. , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the common title display part (strong reach system common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance, the brightness data for the low base weak reach A performance is The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the table (weak reach type weak reach A introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect, the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach type weak reach B In the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach A performance (strong reach system strong reach A introduction). 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach B effect (strong reach type strong reach B introduction), and the low base strong reach B effect is controlled. In the introduction part of the reach C performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C performance (strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part can be shared for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby reducing cost and capacity. By preventing the increase in luminance data tables and using luminance data tables corresponding to each introduction part, it is possible to suitably increase the period until it is announced whether or not it is a jackpot, and as a result, a suitable title can be created. Can be displayed.

[Effect 45]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to control the low base weak reach A, B performances, the low base strong reach A to C performances that have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the low base strong reach A to C performances. It is possible to perform a low-base strongest reach performance that has a higher jackpot expectation than the performance. Low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the production result is announced. It consists of each. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). Then, the production control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table for the common title display part (common title for the weak reach system) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B production. ) to control the game effect lamp 9, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance. , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the common title display part (strong reach system common title), and in the title display part for the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the low base strongest reach effect is controlled. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table (strongest reach title for the strongest reach system), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance, the brightness data table for the low base weak reach A performance (weak reach system weak title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9. In the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach type weak reach B introduction). The effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach A performance (strong reach type strong reach A introduction), and the low base strong reach A performance is controlled. In the introduction part of the base strong reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach B effect (strong reach system strong reach B introduction), and the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect. In , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C effect (strong reach system strong reach C introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the low base strongest reach effect is controlled. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table (strongest reach system, strongest reach introduced). By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part can be shared for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby reducing cost and capacity. By preventing the increase in luminance data tables and using luminance data tables corresponding to each introduction part, it is possible to suitably increase the period until it is announced whether or not it is a jackpot, and as a result, a suitable title can be created. Can be displayed. Furthermore, the low-based strongest reach effect, which is the most expected, is provided with dedicated brightness data tables for the title display part and the introduction part, respectively, to increase interest, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Effect 46]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are changed from white to red, or gold to suggest that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the red color. is possible. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). Then, when the color of the title characters is not changed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 creates a brightness data table in which brightness data for when the title change performance is not performed: When controlling the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach system common title (white) and changing the color of the title letters to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, use the title change effect. Brightness data table with brightness data set when performing: Control the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach common title (red) or the weak reach common title (gold) to perform low base weak reach A and B effects Regardless of whether or not the color of the title characters is changed in the introduction part, the game effect lamp is set using the brightness data table for the common introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction). Control 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, whether the title characters are not changed to red or gold or changed to the second mode, the luminance data corresponding to the introduction part can be used. By using a common table, we can prevent an increase in cost and capacity, and by using brightness data tables corresponding to each title display part, we can change the color of the title character from red or gold to red or gold. In the case where the title is changed to , each can be suitably produced, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 47]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). In addition, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects is the title start period from when the title characters start displaying until they are displayed in the fixed position, and the title after the title characters are displayed in the fixed position. In the title start period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the performance control CPU 120 creates a brightness data table (which defines a light emitting pattern specific to the title start period), including a display period and a title end period. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach title start), and during the title display period and title end period, a brightness data table (weak reach title display) that defines a unique light emission pattern after the title display period is used. to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period from when the title character starts displaying until it is displayed at the regular position in the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title character are displayed at the regular position. By using the brightness data tables corresponding to the title display period and the title end period after the title is displayed, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part, an advantageous state can be obtained during the period in which title characters are displayed. It is possible to suitably lengthen the period until it is announced whether or not the title is displayed, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

In addition, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, a brightness data table corresponding to the title start period, or a brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period. By making one of them a common brightness data table and the other a separate brightness data table with individual contents, the brightness data table corresponds to the title start period, or the title display period and title end period. By using a common brightness data table for one side, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using a brightness data table that corresponds to each of the other brightness data tables, it is possible to determine whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect. Depending on whether the title is a presentation or not, the presentation can be performed appropriately, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

Next, other embodiments for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

The gaming machine of form 48 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A gaming value imparting means capable of imparting gaming value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the obsolete processing shown in FIG. 12-17);
Game stop control that can be controlled to a game stop state in which the progress of the game is stopped when a predetermined condition (for example, MY counter value reaches 98194) based on the game value given by the game value giving means is satisfied. means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the game stop processing shown in FIG. 12-17);
A special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player (for example, a time saving state or a variable probability state), and a non-advantageous state that is different from the advantageous state and is less advantageous to the player than the special state. a special state (for example, a normal state); a state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIGS. 12-20);
A bonus information display means (for example, a figure shown in FIG. As shown in 12-54, a part where the performance control CPU 120 displays the value of the prize ball counter as a second symbol confirmation period performance),
During the special period after the end of the advantageous state, a special notification performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-51 and 12-53, (a part that displays that the performance control CPU 120 will be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state as an ending performance for 20 seconds after the end of the jackpot game);
Equipped with
The grant information display means is capable of displaying the grant information display during the special period if the predetermined condition is satisfied while being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in FIGS. 12-52 and 12-52). As shown in 56, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 during the jackpot game, the performance control CPU 120 displays the value of the prize ball counter as a game stop performance after the jackpot game ends),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the marketability of a gaming machine that can be controlled to a gaming stop state.

The gaming machine of form 49 is
The provision information display means is
The award information display can be displayed when the game is controlled to be in the game stop state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-57 and 12-58, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a game stop effect). part),
When the gaming machine is controlled to be in the stopped state, in addition to the provided information display, a call promotion display is displayed that prompts the player to call the employee of the gaming parlor where the gaming machine is installed (for example, modification 005SG-1 As shown in FIG. 12-60, as a game stop effect, after displaying the value of the prize ball counter, in addition to the value of the prize ball counter, an employee of the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed is called. (The part that displays the instructions to
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the player's interest in gaming by making the player recognize information regarding the gaming value that has been given until the game is controlled to be in the stopped state, and it is also possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game. By prompting the player to call an employee of the gaming parlor, the employee of the gaming parlor can easily deal with the gaming machine that has been controlled to be in the gaming stop state.

The gaming machine of form 50 is
Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a game effect lamp 9),
The advantageous period is defined as when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the MY counter value reaches 98194) and when a special condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in a time saving state or a variable probability state, a jackpot game It is a period that ends when variable display is executed 100 times without being controlled by the state,
The grant information display is a first grant information display that is displayed over a first period when the advantageous period ends based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-52, Based on the value reaching 98194, the prize ball counter value is displayed for 15 seconds as the first game stop effect) and when the advantageous period ends based on the establishment of the special condition. A second award information display that is displayed over a second period shorter than the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part in which the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a production during the second symbol confirmation period for 10 seconds based on the execution of the variable display of times),
When the second provision information display is displayed, the light emitting means emits light in a predetermined pattern over the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-50, in the production during the second symbol confirmation period) is the part where the game effect lamp flashes at the cycle T1 for 10 seconds),
When the first added information display is displayed, after the light emitting means emits light in the predetermined pattern over the second period, the light emitting means continues to emit light in the predetermined pattern until the first period elapses. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-52, in the game stop effect, after the game effect lamp 9 flashes at cycle T1 for 10 seconds as the first game stop effect, the pachinko the part where the game effect lamp 9 continues to blink in the cycle T1 of the game machine 1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing the light emitting means to emit light in a common predetermined pattern when the first given information display is displayed and when the second given information display is displayed, the data for causing the light emitting means to emit light is provided. can be used when the first grant information display is displayed and when the second grant information is displayed, so when the first grant information display is displayed and when the second grant information is displayed. This makes it possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine while varying the display period of each grant information display.

The gaming machine of form 51 is
A gaming machine that allows games to be played by flowing gaming media down a first route (for example, left gaming area 2L) or a second route different from the first route (for example, right gaming area 2R),
The advantageous period is a period that ends when the predetermined condition is met and when a special condition different from the predetermined condition is met (for example, the consecutive winnings state is a period that ends when the MY counter value reaches 98194 and when the time is shortened). (The part that ends when the variable display is executed 100 times without being controlled by the jackpot game state in the state or probability change state),
The non-special state is a state in which it is more advantageous for the player to let the game media flow down the first route than to let the game media flow down the second route (for example, in the normal state, the game ball is moved to the left). A part where the game state is more advantageous for the player by launching the game ball toward the gaming area 2L than by launching the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R),
First route down promotion performance execution means capable of executing a first route down promotion performance that encourages the game medium to flow down the first route (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a left-handed play promotion display process shown in FIG. 12-38). (part to execute)
The grant information display means displays the grant information in different manners depending on when the advantageous period ends based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions for the first period and when the advantageous period ends based on the establishment of the special conditions for the first period. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-54 (C) and 12-57 (F), when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect. and the case where the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a performance during the second symbol confirmation period due to the variable display being executed 100 times without being controlled by the jackpot game state in the time saving state or variable probability state. (parts with different display formats),
The first route flow promotion effect execution means includes:
When the advantageous period ends based on the establishment of the special condition, the first route flow promotion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. If the variable display is executed 100 times without being affected, the part where the left-handed hitting promotion display is displayed when the control is returned to the normal state),
When the advantageous period ends based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the first route flow promotion effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-57 and 12-58, the MY counter value reaches 98194). (If the left-handed hitting promotion display is not displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the attached information display can be suitably displayed depending on the situation. Furthermore, it is possible to appropriately execute the first route flow promotion effect depending on the state to which the screen transitions after the added information is displayed.

The gaming machine of form 52 is
The advantageous period is a state in which it is more advantageous for the player to let the game media flow down the second route than to let the game media go down the first route (for example, a jackpot game state, a time saving state, a variable probability state). In a consecutive game state including a part where the game state is more advantageous for the player by launching the game ball towards the right gaming area 2R than by launching the gaming ball towards the left gaming area 2L),
The award information display is a first award information display that is displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-52, based on the MY counter value reaching 98194, A part where the prize ball counter value is displayed for 15 seconds as a stop effect) and a second grant information display that is displayed based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, a time saving state as shown in FIG. 12-50) (The part where the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a production during the second symbol confirmation period based on the fact that variable display has been executed 100 times without being controlled by the jackpot game state in the probability change state). including,
A second route down promotion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a right-hand hit promotion display process shown in FIG. 12-38 (part to execute)
The second route flow promotion effect execution means is capable of executing the second route flow promotion effect when the second imparted information display is displayed, while the first imparted information display is displayed. When the execution of the second route flow promotion effect is restricted (for example, as shown in Figures 12-50, 12-52, 12-54, 12-57, and 12-58, the second symbol is confirmed) When the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a performance during the period, a right-handed hitting promotion display is displayed, while when the prize ball counter value is displayed as the first game stop performance, a right-handed hitting promotion display is displayed. is not displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the second grant information display is displayed, the game is controlled to be stopped, so when the second grant information display is displayed, the execution of the second route flow promotion effect is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game media from flowing down to the second path when the game is stopped.

The gaming machine of form 53 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display based on the establishment of an execution condition (for example, winning of a game ball in a first starting winning hole or a second starting winning hole),
The award information display is a first award information display that is displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-52, based on the MY counter value reaching 98194, A part where the prize ball counter value is displayed for 15 seconds as a stop effect) and a second grant information display that is displayed based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, a time saving state as shown in FIG. 12-50) (The part where the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a production during the second symbol confirmation period based on the fact that variable display has been executed 100 times without being controlled by the jackpot game state in the probability change state). including,
A storage means (for example, game control data holding area 005SG150 shown in FIG. 12-12) that can store information regarding variable display that has not yet been executed as a reserved storage;
Special suggestion performance execution means (for example, production (a part in which the control CPU 120 executes the revival notification effect shown in FIG. 12-61 as modification 005SG-2);
Equipped with
The special suggestion performance execution means is
The special suggestion effect can be executed in connection with the display of the second added information display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-61(D), the revival notification effect can be executed during the second symbol confirmation period effect). part),
The special suggestion effect is not executed in connection with the display of the first added information display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-61(D), the part where the revival notification effect is not executed in the game stop effect);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first grant information is displayed, the game is controlled to be in a stopped state, so by not performing the special suggestion performance in connection with the display of the first grant information display, the game is not controlled to be in an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in gaming due to this.

The gaming machine of form 54 is
The special state includes a first special state (for example, time saving state) and a second special state (for example, variable probability state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first special state,
The grant information display means is capable of displaying the grant information display in a common manner when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first special state and when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second special state. (For example, as shown in Figures 12-57(E) to 12-57(H), there is a case where the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is in the time saving state, and a case where the gaming state is in the variable probability state. (The part where the game stop effect is executed in the same manner as when the MY counter value reaches 98194 at a certain time),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the data used to display the attached information can be shared between the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first special state and the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second special state. Manufacturing costs for gaming machines can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 55 is
The non-special state is a state in which the size of the gaming value given is smaller than the advantageous period including the special state (for example, in the normal state, the game ball is placed only in the first starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10). While it is possible to win a prize, the consecutive game states including the jackpot game state, time saving state, and variable probability state are game balls that are paid out more than in the normal state because the game ball can enter the big winning hole and the second starting winning hole. the part with the most number),
The grant information display means does not display the grant information display when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-57(A) to 12-57(B)). , in the first game stop effect when the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the normal state, the part where the prize ball counter value is not displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the amount of gaming value awarded in a non-special state is smaller than that in an advantageous period including a special state, by not displaying the award information display when a predetermined condition is met in a non-special state, Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of form 56 is
A game stop notification performance execution means (for example, a game stop notification performance shown in FIG. 12-38 by the performance control CPU 120) that can execute a game stop notification performance (for example, a game stop performance) that notifies that the game is controlled to be in the game stop state. (a part that executes processing),
The special state includes a first special state (for example, time saving state) and a second special state (for example, variable probability state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first special state,
The game stop notification performance execution means executes the game stop notification performance in a common manner when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first special state and when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second special state. (For example, as shown in Figures 12-57 (E) to 12-57 (H), when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is in the time saving state, and when the gaming state is (The part where the game stop effect is executed in the same manner as when the MY counter value reaches 98194 while in a variable probability state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the data used to execute the game stop notification effect can be shared between when the predetermined condition is met in the first special state and when the predetermined condition is met in the second special state. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 57 is
The game stop notification performance execution means is capable of executing the game stop notification performance in different manners depending on when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the special state and when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-special state. (For example, as shown in Figures 12-57(A) to 12-57(H), when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming status is normal, and when the gaming status is short-time or probability change (The part where the game stop effect is executed in a different manner depending on the case where the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the state is in the state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the game stop notification effect can be suitably executed depending on the state in which the predetermined condition is met, the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 58 is
The special state includes a first special state (for example, time saving state) and a second special state (for example, variable probability state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first special state,
A game stop suggestion effect (for example, the game stop state is controlled based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied before the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the MY counter value reaches 95001). , game stop suggestion performance) (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the game stop suggestion performance process shown in FIG. 12-38);
The game stop suggestion performance execution means executes the game stop suggestion performance in a common manner when the specific condition is satisfied in the first special state and when the specific condition is satisfied in the second special state. (For example, as shown in Figures 12-55 (D) to 12-55 (F), when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the gaming state is the time saving state, and when the gaming state is (The part where the game stop suggestion effect is executed in the same manner as when the MY counter value reaches 95001 while in a variable probability state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the data used to execute the game stop suggestion effect can be shared between the case where the specific condition is met in the first special state and the case where the specific condition is met in the second special state. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 59 is
The game stop suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing the game stop suggestion performance in different manners depending on when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the special state and when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-special state. (For example, as shown in Figures 12-55 (A) to 12-55 (F), when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the gaming status is normal, and when the gaming status is short-time or probability change (The part where the game stop suggestion effect is executed in a different manner depending on when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the state is in the state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute the game stop suggestion performance depending on the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 60 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display based on the establishment of an execution condition (for example, winning of a game ball in a first starting winning hole or a second starting winning hole),
A storage means (for example, game control data holding area 005SG150 shown in FIG. 12) that can store information regarding variable display that has not yet been executed as a reserved storage;
A special notification effect that notifies that the pending memory stored in the storage means includes a pending memory according to the variable display that is controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, the pending display is "V" as a look-ahead preview effect) 12-38);
Equipped with
The special notification performance execution means is configured such that during a predetermined period before the predetermined condition is satisfied, the holding memories stored in the storage means include a plurality of holding memories corresponding to the variable display controlled to be in the advantageous state. If so, restrict the execution of the special notification effect (for example, as shown in Figure 12-40 (B), the MY counter value is 95001 or more (95001 to 98194) and there are two or more pending memories that will be a jackpot. In this case, the determination ratio of the display pattern γ in which the pending display is displayed in the shape of a "V" is set to 0%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest due to being controlled to a game stop state before being controlled to an advantageous state multiple times even though the special notification effect has been executed.

The gaming machine of form 61 is
An advantageous state suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, a preview effect) that suggests that the advantageous state will be controlled during execution of the variable display is provided (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is configured as shown in FIG. 43), after executing the preview effect determination process shown in FIG. 12-38, the variable display effect process shown in FIG.
The advantageous state suggesting performance includes a first advantageous state suggesting performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-45, a preview performance of performance pattern a second advantageous state suggesting performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-45, a preview performance of performance pattern Z),
The advantageous state suggestion performance execution means limits the execution of the second advantageous state suggestion performance during a specific period before the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, if the MY counter value is 95001 to 98194, the performance pattern The part where the determination ratio of Z is set to 0%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for example, even though the second advantageous state suggestion effect is executed during the variable display, the game is not executed before the control is made into the advantageous state due to the predetermined condition being satisfied during the variable display. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the occurrence of an event such as being subjected to stop state control.

The gaming machine of form 62 is
The predetermined conditions include a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition,
The game stop control means is
When controlled to the non-special state, it is possible to control the game to the stopped state by assuming that the first predetermined condition is satisfied that the gaming value given by the gaming value giving means has reached a specific value. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-55(A) to 12-55(C), based on the MY counter value reaching 98194 when the gaming state is the normal state, the the part where the game is stopped),
If the second predetermined condition is satisfied that the gaming value awarded by the gaming value granting means reaches the specific value in the advantageous state within the advantageous period, the game stops state after the advantageous state ends. controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-56, if the MY counter value reaches 98194 during a jackpot game, the game in Pachinko game 1 is stopped after the jackpot game ends),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game stop state can be suitably controlled depending on which predetermined condition, the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition, is satisfied.

The gaming machine of form 63 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals output from a gaming device (for example, payout control board 21TM037 or card unit 21TM050) capable of executing processing related to gaming media,
The payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a game medium providing means capable of providing game media based on the signal output from the gaming device (for example, when the PRDY signal is in the ON state and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state). (a portion that drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the ball is in the ON state and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 125) of rental balls to the player);
The game media providing means limits the provision of game media based on the signal output from the gaming device when the game is controlled to be in the game stop state (for example, as a modified example 005SG-5, as shown in FIG. 12-64). As shown in , when the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1, by stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11, even if the player operates the ball lending switch 21TM062, new game balls cannot be purchased. (part that prevents lending from being executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the game is controlled to be in the stopped state, it is possible to perform appropriate control regarding the provision of game media based on the signal output from the game device.

The gaming machine of form 64 is
A first process related to the provision of game media based on the signal output from the gaming device (for example, a part in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the prize ball lending control process shown in FIG. 12-34), and a process related to the game media. It is possible to execute a specific process that includes at least a second process related to a return operation for returning the storage medium in which information is stored (for example, a part in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the prepaid card unit control process shown in FIG. 12-34). specific processing execution means (for example, a part where the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the payout control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12-34),
The specific processing execution means limits the execution of the first processing but does not limit the execution of the second processing in the game stop state (for example, as shown in modification 005SG-5, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the game is stopped, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped so that new game balls are not lent out, while the prepaid card is returned to the player by operating the return switch 21TM063. is the executable part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent troubles from occurring due to the storage medium not being returned when the game is stopped.

The gaming machine of form 65 is
comprising a gaming media-related display display means (for example, a frequency display LED 21TM060) capable of displaying a gaming media-related display (for example, a display of the balance of a prepaid card) related to the number of game media that can be given by the game media giving means;
The game media related display is displayed in different manners when the game is controlled to be in the game stop state and when it is not controlled to be in the game stop state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-62 as variation example 005SG-3). As shown, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where games can be played, the number display LED 21TM060 displays a numerical value corresponding to the balance of the prepaid card, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game is stopped, the number display LED 21TM060 displays a value corresponding to the balance of the prepaid card. (the part that displays the indication that it has become disabled),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize whether or not the game is controlled to be stopped by the aspect of the game medium related display displayed on the game medium related display display means.

The form 66 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals output from a gaming device (for example, payout control board 21TM037 or card unit 21TM050) capable of executing processing related to gaming media,
A game medium providing means (for example, a payout control board 21TM037) capable of providing game media based on a signal output from the gaming device has a PRDY signal in an ON state and both a BRDY signal and a BRQ signal in an ON state. drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the state, and pay out a predetermined number (for example, 125 balls) to the player;
A first process related to the provision of game media based on the signal output from the gaming device (for example, a part in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the prize ball lending control process shown in FIG. 12-34), and a process related to the game media. It is possible to execute a specific process that includes at least a second process related to a return operation of returning a storage medium in which information is stored (for example, a part in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the prepaid card unit control process shown in FIG. 12-34). specific processing execution means (for example, a part where the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the payout control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12-34),
The specific processing execution means is capable of executing the specific processing when the game is controlled to be in the stopped state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-34, the payout control CPU 21TM371 is (a part that can execute each process including the payout control timer interrupt process even when the game is stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to return the storage medium even when the game is controlled to be in the stopped state, it is possible to prevent troubles caused by the storage medium not being returned in the game stopped state. Further, since no complicated processing is required in the game stop state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unintended malfunctions in specific processing.

The gaming machine of form 67 is
When the game is controlled to be in the stopped state and the grant information display is displayed, a return operation related display regarding the storage medium return operation can be displayed (for example, FIG. 12-53, FIG. 12- 57. As shown in Figure 12-58, when the jackpot game state is controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state, there is a part that prompts you not to forget to take out your prepaid card as an ending effect, and a part where the first game stop is displayed. When the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a performance, a part where a prompt not to forget to take out the prepaid card is displayed as a second game stop performance),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles such as a player forgetting to return the storage medium and leaving the gaming machine when the game is controlled to be in a stopped state.

Form 68 gaming machine is
The return operation related display includes a first situation when the advantageous state is controlled to the special state (for example, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state) and a first situation when the game is stopped. and a second situation when the grant information display is displayed (for example, when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect),
The aspect of the return operation-related display displayed in the first situation and the aspect of the return operation-related display displayed in the second situation are at least partly in common (for example, in FIG. 12-53 , as shown in FIGS. 12-57 and 12-58, when the jackpot game state is controlled to the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect, (The part where a message reminding you not to forget to take out your prepaid card is displayed in the same manner)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the return operation related display displayed in the first situation and the return operation related display displayed in the second situation share at least part of the data for displaying these return operation related displays. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Form 69 gaming machine is
Equipped with information display means (for example, display monitor 21TM029) capable of displaying information (for example, winning ratio and continuous ratio) regarding the gaming value granted by the gaming value granting means,
The information display means performs display in different modes depending on whether it is controlled to be in the game stop state or not to be controlled to be in the game stop state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-63 as modification 005SG-4). As shown, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a playable state (playable state), the display monitor 21TM029 displays various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios, while the pachinko game machine 1 stops playing. (in the case where the game is stopped), the display monitor 21TM029 displays a display that is different from the winning information and indicates that the game is no longer possible),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably recognize whether or not the game is controlled to be stopped by the display mode displayed on the information display means.

The gaming machine of form 70 is
an operating means (for example, clear switch 92) that can be operated when power is turned on to the gaming machine;
Initialization processing execution means that can execute the initialization processing of the gaming machine based on the operation of the operating means when the power is turned on to the gaming machine (for example, the steps in the gaming control main processing by the CPU 103 shown in FIGS. 12-16) a part that executes S8 initialization processing),
Equipped with
The initialization processing execution means includes:
Executing the initialization process based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the gaming machine is controlled to be in the gaming stop state, and that the operating means is operated when the gaming machine is powered on thereafter. (For example, after the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped when the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the pachinko game can be controlled to a state where the game is possible with the operation of the clear switch 92.) (a part in which initialization processing is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes playable);
The power supply to the game machine is stopped while the game machine is controlled to be in the game stop state, and the game machine can be controlled to be in the game stop state based on the fact that the operating means is not operated when the power is turned on to the game machine. (For example, after the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped when the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off without operating the clear switch 92.) is input, the recovery process is executed and the pachinko machine 1 recovers while the game is stopped).
The power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the gaming machine is controlled to be in the gaming stopped state, and then the gaming machine is controlled to be in the gaming stopping state based on the fact that the operating means is not operated when the gaming machine is powered on. It is further provided with an error notification means that can issue an error notification when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 12-65 as a modified example 005SG-6. When turning on the power to the pachinko game machine 1 again (starting the pachinko game machine 1 by hot start) without starting the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 of the pachinko game machine 1 after the startup shows that the pachinko game machine 1 is still playing. (a part that executes an error notification that the pachinko game machine 1 is in a stopped state and prompts the user to turn on the power to the pachinko game machine 1 while operating the clear switch 92),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, it is possible to make the employees of the gaming parlor where the gaming machine is set aware of the fact that the gaming machine is in a stopped state through an error notification. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game will be left in a stopped state from the time the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 71 is
A specific signal output means (for example, information output circuit 112) capable of outputting a specific signal (for example, a security signal) to the outside,
The game stop state includes a first game stop state and a second game stop state different from the first game stop state,
The game stop control means is
The first game stop state can be controlled based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition based on the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the pachinko game machine 1 (the part where playing is stopped),
controllable to the second game stop state based on the establishment of a condition different from the predetermined condition (for example, a portion where the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to the occurrence of a game stop error);
The specific signal output means is capable of outputting the specific signal in a common output mode when controlled to the first game stop state and when controlled to the second game stop state (for example, As shown in Figure 12-29, in both the case where the MY counter value reaches 98194 and the case where a game stop error occurs, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped (until the power is turned off). (the part where the security signal is output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific signal is output in a common output mode when the game machine is controlled to the first game stop state and when it is controlled to the second game stop state, so that the game machine stops playing the game. This makes it easier for employees of the game parlor where the game machine is installed to understand that the game machine is under control.

The gaming machine of form 72 is
Multiple errors including a first error (for example, starting port 2 abnormal winning error) and a second error that is more important than the first error (for example, radio wave error, magnet error, game ball guide lid activation error). Equipped with an error determination means capable of determining the occurrence (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, a portion where the CPU 103 executes main-side error processing),
The game stop control means is capable of controlling the second game stop state in connection with the determination of the occurrence of the second error (for example, the game stop state is stopped due to the occurrence of a radio wave error, a magnet error, a game ball guiding lid operation error, etc.). is stopped),
The specific signal output means
The specific signal can be output when the occurrence of the first error is determined and when the occurrence of the second error is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part where the information output circuit 112 outputs a security signal when an error, radio wave error, magnet error, or game ball guide lid operation error occurs),
The specific signal can be output for different periods depending on when it is determined that the first error has occurred and when it is determined that the second error has occurred (for example, when the occurrence of the starting port 2 abnormal winning error has occurred). In the event of an occurrence, a security signal will be output for 4 minutes, but if a radio wave error, magnet error, or game ball guidance lid activation error occurs, the security signal will be output until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped ( until the power is turned OFF), the part where the security signal is output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, an employee of the gaming parlor where the gaming machine is installed can determine whether an error occurring in the gaming machine is a first error or a second error based on the output period of a specific signal. This makes it possible for employees of the gaming parlor where the gaming machines are installed to take appropriate measures against errors that occur.

The gaming machine of form 73 is
Setting means capable of setting the ratio of controlling to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in modification 005SG-7, a plurality of setting values can be set by operating a specific setting means, and which setting value is set) (a part that changes the percentage of the variable display result becoming a jackpot depending on whether the result is a jackpot),
The game stop state further includes a third game stop state different from the first game stop state and the second game stop state,
The game stop control means can control the third game stop state based on conditions different from the first game stop state and the second game stop state (for example, as shown in modification 005SG-7). , a part where the CPU 103 stops playing on the pachinko game machine 1 by setting the pachinko game machine 1 in a state where settings can be changed),
The third game stop state is a state related to settings by the setting means,
The specific signal output means is capable of outputting the specific signal over a period different from the first game stop state and the second game stop state when the third game stop state is controlled. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-67(C), the information output circuit 112 outputs a security signal for 5 seconds after the setting value can be changed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the game machine is controlled to be in any of the game stop states, whether or not the game stop state is the third game stop state related to the setting by the setting means is determined by the game machine where the game machine is installed. Since it becomes possible for an employee or the like to discriminate based on the output period of the specific signal, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the third game stop state will be mistaken for the first game stop state or the second game stop state.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings. In the following, the front side of Fig. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear, back) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side are This will be explained as a standard. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "005SGS1", "Normal reach" is referred to as "N reach", "Super reach" is referred to as "SP reach", etc. It is sometimes abbreviated as.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner. The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, display areas (first pending memory display area 5D, second pending memory display area 5U) are provided for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending. ing.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first reservation display device 25A and a second reservation display device 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first reservation display device 25A displays the first reservation storage number based on the number of LEDs lit. The second hold display device 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting prize opening, a predetermined number of prizes (for example, three) are awarded based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A provided in the winning ball device 6A. As soon as the ball is paid out, the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between the closed state and the open state by the first solenoid 81 (see FIG. 12-2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B has, for example, a movable piece that can move forward and backward above the second starting prize opening, and when the first solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable piece moves forward, thereby causing the tip of the movable piece to move forward and backward. covers the upper part of the second starting winning opening, and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening in a closed state (it is also said that the second starting winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, when the first solenoid 81 is in the on state, the variable winning ball device 6B allows the movable piece to retreat from above the second starting winning hole, thereby opening the game ball into the second starting winning hole. (It is also said that the second starting prize opening is in the open state.) When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number of prizes (for example, three) are awarded based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A provided in the winning ball device 6A. As soon as the ball is paid out, the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes a movable piece.

Predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12-1, three locations on the lower left of the gaming area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 10, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the general winning switch 25 (see FIG. 12-2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded as prize balls. paid out.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a second solenoid 82 (see FIG. 12-2), and has a special area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning opening door. Form a big winning opening.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the second solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door 711 (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening (the first state), the game ball cannot enter (pass through) the big prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the second solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole (second state), and the game ball is activated. It will be easier to enter the grand prize opening.

When a game ball enters the big prize opening, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls is paid out as a prize ball. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

Although the details will be described later, in addition to the above-mentioned first count switch 23, a second count switch 24 capable of detecting game balls is also provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 of this embodiment. The second count switch 24 controls the gaming state to a probability variable state (high probability high base state) described later after the jackpot gaming state by detecting a game ball that has entered the jackpot in the jackpot gaming state described later. This is a switch for

A normal symbol display device 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12-1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display device 25C is provided below the normal symbol display device 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display device 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in. Further, on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, the above-mentioned first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, first count switch 23, second count switch 24, and general winning switch 25 detect An out switch 26 for further detecting game balls is provided, and the game balls detected by the out switch 26 are discharged outside the pachinko game machine 1 (see FIG. 12-4).

The gaming area in this embodiment is an area formed on the left side of the image display device 5, and as the gaming balls flow down, these gaming balls enter the area formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A. 1. A left gaming area 2L where you can win from the starting winning opening, and an area formed on the right side of the image display device 5, and as the gaming balls flow down, these gaming balls are formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. It is composed of a second starting winning opening, a right gaming area 2R where you can enter the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 and pass through the passage gate 41.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 12-1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 12-2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 12-2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a regular symbol game by the regular symbol display device 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to open the variable prize winning ball device 6B (the second starting prize opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but the starting winning is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is maintained until the earlier of the timing when the open period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). Continued. The opening period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 or 4 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, the time saving state may be controlled depending on the jackpot type.

In the time saving state and the probability variable state, control (time saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) than in the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state and the variable probability state are states in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, so they are advantageous states for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state.

Here, in the normal state in this embodiment, when the player mainly shoots game balls toward the left gaming area 2L, some of these game balls enter the general winning hole 10 or the starting winning hole and win prizes. This is a game state in which the payout of balls and the variable display of the first special symbol are executed. In addition, in the normal state, when the player shoots a game ball toward the right game area 2R, it is possible for the gate switch 21 to detect a part of the game ball (a part of the game ball can pass through the gate 41). ), but the probability of hitting a normal figure based on the gate switch 21 detecting the game ball is lower than in the time saving state (low probability high base state) or variable probability state (high probability high base state), and This is a gaming state in which the opening period of the second starting prize opening when a winning symbol occurs is set shorter than in the time saving state or the variable probability state. Further, since the normal state is not a jackpot game state, the jackpot is never opened. From the above, the normal state is a gaming state in which it is more advantageous for the player to drive a game ball toward the left gaming area 2L than to drive a gaming ball toward the right gaming area 2R.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state and variable probability state in this embodiment, when the player launches game balls toward the left gaming area 2L, some of these game balls enter the general winning hole 10 or the starting winning hole. This is a game state in which the payout of prize balls and the variable display of the first special symbol are executed, but when the player launches game balls toward the right game area 2R, some of these game balls are detected by the gate switch 21. This is a gaming state in which it is possible to play the ball (part of the game ball can pass through the gate 41). Here, the time saving state and variable probability state are games in which the probability of winning a regular symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the opening period of the second starting prize opening when a winning symbol occurs is set longer than in the normal state. state. In other words, the time saving state and the variable probability state are game states in which it is easier for the game ball to win in the second starting prize opening than in the normal state.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, if the variable display result of the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the second special symbol) when the game ball enters the second starting winning hole becomes a jackpot, the first starting winning hole will be entered. The rate at which the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol) when a game ball enters the mouth is controlled to a jackpot game state in which the number of rounds is greater than when the variable display result is a jackpot, and during the jackpot game The rate at which game balls pass through the second count switch 24 (the rate at which the game ball is controlled to be in a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game) is set high. In other words, the time saving state and the variable probability state are game states in which it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game ball towards the right gaming area 2R than towards the left gaming area 2L.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-1, since the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the right game area 2R, in the jackpot game state, the game balls flowing down the right game area 2R are placed in the left game area 2L. It is easier to win a prize in the grand prize opening than with a game ball flowing down. In other words, the jackpot gaming state is a gaming state in which it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R than to launch the gaming ball toward the left gaming area 2L.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (as described later, a jackpot in which a part of the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 during the jackpot game), A "non-probable jackpot (normal jackpot)" in which odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed all together and the jackpot is not controlled to a variable state after the end of the jackpot game state (as described later, a game during a jackpot game) If some of the balls are a jackpot (not detected by the second count switch 24), even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). '') may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (suspension display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspension display) to a different mode than usual may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 12-2, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, an information output circuit 112, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a certain period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation display device). 25A, the second reservation display device 25B, the general figure reservation display device 25C, etc., and an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball is A detection signal indicating that a switch has been turned on by passing through or entering is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 outputs a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the first solenoid 81, second solenoid 82, and third solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the first solenoid for a normal electric accessory. 81, the second solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, and the third solenoid 83 for the regulating member 712. Note that the information output circuit 112 outputs various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-4, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It also has a function to display various winning information. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4, the main board 11 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is installed in the center of the main board 11. is arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is open. This is the front when viewed visually, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, the main board 11 (gaming control microcomputer 100) controls each winning opening (big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter also referred to as "entering area"). The number of entering game balls is tallied, and various winning information such as continuous ratio and hand ratio based on the tally is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. By displaying this winning information, the game center You can check various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation. In other words, the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1 usually designs the game board surface so that the game ball enters the general winning hole at a predetermined frequency (so as to pass the test). In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether the game ball enters the general winning hole at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is checked what kind of adjustments have been made and whether the game balls are entering the general prize opening as often as designed as a result of the adjustments. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the main board 11 includes a magnetic sensor 005SG060 that can detect magnetism, a radio wave sensor 005SG070 that can detect radio waves, a big winning opening door sensor 005SG091 that can detect the opening of the big winning opening door, and an upper tray filled with game balls. A full tank sensor 005SG093 that can detect when the ball is empty and a ball out sensor 005SG094 that can detect when the supply ball runs out are connected.

FIG. 12-3 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 12-3, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port, etc. constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a payout control CPU21TM371, a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Further, the I/O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the bulb out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number counting switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number counting switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-3, the payout control board 21TM037 includes a gaming machine frame open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and a gaming machine frame opening sensor that allows the front surface of the gaming board 2 to be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 comprising a door frame open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the frame is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine if an error has occurred. Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the microcomputer for payout control 21TM370 is capable of distinguishing and recognizing the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor that includes a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that game balls are jammed, that is, so-called ball biting. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 detects that the detection signal from the bulb out switch 21TM187 indicates the bulb is out, and the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank. , the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets a low level to the firing board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball firing from the batted ball firing device. Outputs a full tank signal. A firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one input side of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the ejection board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the ejection motor 21TM094) A signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting and outputting (sending and receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 check the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to do this, signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at fixed intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) to confirm the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and sends a signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, it transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) notifying that to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can communicate with each other at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data between. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and A ball request signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, it sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by differentiating a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and uses the set received ACK signal to play the game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (such as a ball borrowed, full tank, or out of ball error) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is changed. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The specific exchange of signals by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail in FIGS. 12-32 and 12-35.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of rented balls to the terminal boards (an external terminal board for the frame and an external terminal board for the board) via the output port 21TM372b. )21TM160. Note that a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but its illustration is omitted in FIG. 12-3.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, a signal for instructing lighting/extinguishment is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out of ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. Note that a detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Furthermore, the drive signal from the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Note that a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is not shown in FIG. 12-3.

A card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine is equipped with a card unit control microcomputer. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connection stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball rental LED 21TM061, a ball rental switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

A ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are provided from the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050 in response to the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending possible display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko activation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 12-9-2.

When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball rental switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on, upon receiving a payout command signal from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power is supplied from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided on the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. This will be prevented.

In this embodiment, the frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball rental LED 21TM061, the ball rental switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are installed at predetermined positions in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, at the top of the batted ball supply tray (upper tray)). . Therefore, by moving the line of sight downward from the gaming area during the game, the player can check whether or not the game ball can be borrowed or not by looking at the lighting conditions of the frequency display LED 21TM060 and the ball rental possible LED 21TM061. It is possible to recognize the remaining balance (prepaid card balance) for the transaction. Furthermore, the player can borrow game balls by operating the ball lending switch 21TM062, and by operating the return switch 21TM063, the player can transfer the prepaid card containing the number of prize balls won and the remaining amount to the card. It can be received from unit 21TM050.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) uses performance control commands (specifying game progress, etc.) in accordance with the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. A command to notify) is supplied to the production control board 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 12-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 12-4(A) is just an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-5(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be set arbitrarily according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 12-4 (B), determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot" (predetermined result). ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be used when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-5(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8FXXH is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Further, the symbol confirmation command is also a command for notifying the symbol confirmation period. For example, as shown in Figure 12-5(B), command 8F00H is the first symbol confirmation command that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds, and command 8F01H is the first symbol confirmation command that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. This is a second symbol confirmation command that specifies that. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time-saving control is not performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a gaming state in which time-saving control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state). The command 9502H is used as a second gaming state designation command corresponding to the time saving control and the probability variable control (high probability high base state, time saving state), and the third gaming state specification corresponding to the gaming state where time saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state, variable probability state). Command. Command 96XXH is an error notification command that notifies that an error has occurred. In the error notification command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the error that has occurred.

The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command that designates display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the jackpot start specification command and the jackpot end specification command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start specification command and the jackpot end specification command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result specification command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, sudden probability) and a small hit as a determination result at the time of winning. It is. In addition, the command C6XXH specifies a fluctuation category that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is a command. In addition, the command C700H is executed based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not in a jackpot game, is in a non-gaming state where the variable display of special symbols is not being executed, and there is no pending memory. This is a performance control command that specifies execution of a customer waiting demonstration (customer waiting demonstration performance) on the display device 5.

Command D100H is a V winning notification command that notifies that the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 and it has been decided that the gaming state will be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game (occurrence of V winning).

Command D3XXH is a prize ball that notifies the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of game balls by the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, first count switch 23, general winning switch 25, etc. This is a number notification command.

The command E0XXH monitors the difference between the number of prize balls paid out after the pachinko gaming machine 1 was activated with the operation of the clear switch 92 and the number of game balls detected by the out switch 26 (net increase in the number of prize balls). This is a MY counter value notification command for notifying the MY counter value for. As shown in Figure 12-8(D), E000H is the first MY counter value notification command that indicates that the MY counter value is 0 to 90000, and E001H is the first MY counter value notification command that indicates that the MY counter value is 90001 to 95000. E002H is a third MY counter value notification command indicating that the MY counter value is 95001 to 98194. Command F000H is a game stop notification command that notifies the game to be stopped based on the fact that the MY counter value has reached the default value of 98194.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 12-5(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passing notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of variable display times for which probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 12-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 12-6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, Numerical data indicating each of the random numbers MR4 for determining the general figure display result is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65535". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number used to determine the jackpot type as one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C" when the variable display result is "jackpot". For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "299".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "23".

The random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is a random number used to determine the initial value of the random number MR4, and ranges from "3" to "23", for example.

FIG. 12-7 shows a variation pattern in this example. In this example, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is adjusted to correspond to the cases where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, two types of variation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach variation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of super reach variation patterns are provided. Alternatively, only one type may be provided.

Among these fluctuation patterns, for the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the small hit fluctuation pattern, after the same special symbol fluctuation time as the losing fluctuation pattern, a blessing effect is uniformly executed to celebrate that the variable display result is a jackpot. An additional 15 seconds of special figure display time is provided.

Here, for the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the loss fluctuation pattern in this example, the period until the variable display result is announced is configured in common, and it is variable depending on the length of the period until the variable display result is announced. This prevents the player from recognizing in advance whether the displayed result is a jackpot or a loss.

Note that in this embodiment, as will be described later. Since the determination ratio of each variation pattern is set so that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the probability of jackpot is higher, so the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern are especially The longer the figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the specified type may be determined.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored.

FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the special symbols of the variable display to be executed, the display results of the variable display, the number of reserved memories, the gaming state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 12-8, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), and the variable display result is a jackpot. When the number of reserved special figures to be displayed is one or less and the variable display result is a loss, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state). , When the number of special symbols pending memory for variable display is 2 to 3 and the variable display result is a failure, select the failure variation pattern determination table B and change the gaming state to a time saving state or a variable probability state (low probability state). (high base state or highly accurate high base state) and the variable display result is a failure, the failure variation pattern determination table C is selected.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, out of 1 to 997 that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take, 1 to 20 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern PB1-1, and 21 to 370 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern PB1-1. is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern PB1-2, and 371 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern PB1-3.

In the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, out of 1 to 997 that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out variation pattern PA1-1, and 501 to 900 are assigned to the out-of-reach variation pattern PA1-1. 901 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern PA2-1 that is off the normal reach, 901 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern PA2-2 that is off the super reach α, and 971 to 977 are the variation pattern PA2 that is off the super reach β. -3 is assigned.

In the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table B, out of 1 to 997 that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out variation pattern PA1-2, and 501 to 900 are assigned to the out-of-reach variation pattern PA1-2. 901 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern PA2-1 that is off the normal reach, 901 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern PA2-2 that is off the super reach α, and 971 to 977 are the variation pattern PA2 that is off the super reach β. -3 is assigned.

In the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table C, out of 1 to 997 that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, 1 to 997 are assigned to non-reach and out-of-reach variation patterns PA1-3.

FIG. 12-9 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the second special figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table determines the variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot gaming state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table, the disturbance for special figure display result determination is determined depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "miss".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data to be assigned. In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as a "jackpot" special figure display result than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). is assigned to. As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/200 in this example), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/100 in this example). ). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability that the control is determined to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes higher.

That is, when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in FIG. 12-9(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot A to jackpot C). In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to use the jackpot symbol.

FIGS. 12-9(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Among these, in Figure 12-9 (B), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when In addition, in FIG. 12-9(C), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects the jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result will be used as a jackpot symbol. This is the table that is referenced to determine the In this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-9(B) and (C), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) has jackpot A and jackpot B. , a jackpot B and a jackpot C are provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol).

Here, the jackpot types in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 12-8(E). In this embodiment, jackpot A to jackpot C are set as the jackpot types.

Of these jackpots A to jackpot C, jackpot A and jackpot B are jackpots that are repeatedly executed four times (so-called 4 rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state that is advantageous to the player. C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot A to jackpot C, time saving control is executed over a maximum of 100 variable displays, and the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 in the first round. Probability change control is executed over a maximum of 100 variable displays on the condition that

In addition, jackpot A is a jackpot type in which the jackpot is opened with the opening pattern KP-1 in the first round, and the jackpot is opened with the opening pattern KP-3 in the second and subsequent rounds. B and jackpot C are jackpot types in which the jackpot is opened with the opening pattern KP-2 in the first round, and the jackpot is opened with the opening pattern KP-3 in the second and subsequent rounds.

Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 in this embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIG. 12-10, a big winning hole is formed at the upper end of the special variable winning ball device 7. As mentioned above, when the second solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door 711 (for special electric accessories) is in the OFF state, the grand prize opening door closes the grand prize opening (the first state), the game ball cannot enter (pass through) the big prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the second solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole (second state), and the game ball is activated. It will be easier to enter the grand prize opening.

As shown in FIG. 12-10, a game ball channel 750 is formed in the special variable winning ball device 7, through which the game ball that has entered the big winning opening can flow down. The game ball flow path 750 includes a main path 740 (region along the solid line in FIG. 12-10) through which the game balls that have passed through the grand prize opening can pass, and a branch path 741 (FIG. 12-10) that branches downward from the main path 740. 10 along the dotted line). A regulating member 712 is provided at the upper end of the branch path 741 and is movable back and forth in the front and rear directions by driving a third solenoid. The regulating member 712 protrudes into the game ball flow path 750 when the third solenoid 83 is in the off state, thereby inhibiting the game ball from entering the branch path 741, and when the third solenoid 83 is in the on state, In some cases, the game ball is allowed to enter the branch path 741 by retreating from the game ball flow path 750.

A second count switch 24 is provided downstream of the branch path 741, and the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 by passing through the second count switch 24. In addition, after the game balls flowing down the main path 740 and the game balls flowing down the branch path 741 are finally guided to the back side of the game board 2 via a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2, It is detected by the out switch 26.

Here, as shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the above-mentioned opening pattern KP-1 is such that the second solenoid 82 is in an OFF state from timing T1 to timing T2 of the round game, and from timing T2 to timing T2. This is an opening pattern in which the second solenoid 82 is in the ON state from timing T3 to the opening state (second state) from timing T2 to timing T3. Further, the above-mentioned open pattern KP-1 is an open pattern in which the third solenoid 83 is in the on state from the start timing T1 to the timing T2 of the round game, and the third solenoid 83 is in the off state from the timing T2 to the timing T3. There is also. In other words, in the opening pattern KP-1, during the period when the big winning hole is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the big winning hole is prevented from entering the branch path 741 by the regulating member 712. This is an open pattern that does not allow passage through the 2-count switch 24.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 12-11(B), the above-mentioned opening pattern KP-2 is a second opening pattern from the start timing T1 of the round game to the timing T4 (T4: timing between timing T2 and timing T3). This is an opening pattern in which the solenoid 82 is in the on state and the second solenoid 82 is in the off state from the timing T4, so that the big winning hole is in the open state (second state) from the timing T1 to the timing T4. Further, the above-mentioned open pattern KP-2 is an open pattern in which the third solenoid 83 is in the on state from the start timing T1 to the timing T2 of the round game, and the third solenoid 83 is in the off state from the timing T2 to the timing T3. There is also. In other words, in the opening pattern KP-2, the grand prize opening is in an open state from timing T1 to timing T4, and the game ball that has entered the grand prize opening enters the branch path 741 from timing T1 to timing T2. This is a solution pattern that can pass through the second count switch 24.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-11(C), the above-mentioned opening pattern KP-3 is such that the second solenoid 82 is in an OFF state from timing T1 to timing T2 of the round game, and from timing T2 to timing T3. The second solenoid 82 is in the ON state, and the opening pattern is such that the big winning opening is in the open state (second state) from timing T2 to timing T3. Note that in the open pattern KP-3, the third solenoid is in the off state and never turns on. In other words, in the opening pattern KP-3, during the period when the big winning hole is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the big winning hole is prevented from entering the branching path 741 by the regulating member 712. This is an open pattern that does not allow passage through the 2-count switch 24.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 12-9(D), jackpot A is caused by the game ball hitting the second count switch 24 even if the player launches the game ball toward the right gaming area toward 2R during the jackpot game. By not passing, time-saving control is executed for up to 100 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game, while jackpot type (substantially non-probable variable) in which probability variable control is not executed (controlled to time-saving state). It's a jackpot). In addition, for jackpot B and jackpot C, if the player launches the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R during the jackpot game, the game ball will pass through the second count switch 24 with an extremely high probability (almost 100%). This is a jackpot type (substantial variable probability jackpot) in which time saving control and variable probability control are executed (controlled to variable probability state) for a maximum of 100 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, if the variable display result of the first special symbol in the normal state is a jackpot, the player can open the jackpot by launching a game ball toward the right gaming area 2R from the start of the jackpot game. When a game ball enters a prize, the prize ball is paid out, and after the end of the jackpot game, the game state is controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state, and the player can move the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R. The variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed by continuing the launch. Here, as shown in Figure 12-9 (C), if the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type will be either jackpot B or jackpot C, which are substantial variable jackpots. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state will be controlled to a variable probability state with an extremely high probability. As mentioned above, the time-saving state, variable probability state, and jackpot game in which the player mainly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state. A state in which the state repeats is called a continuous state.

In addition, in this example, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more jackpot types may be provided. , two or less types may be provided.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 12-2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a certain period of time (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as the special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 005SG150 as shown in FIG. It is being The data holding area 005SG150 for game control shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 005SG153, a game control counter setting section 005SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 005SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 005SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 005SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for variable display result determination, a random number MR2 for winning type determination, a random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 005SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 005SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 005SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passage (approach) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for variable display result determination, a random number MR2 for winning type determination, a random number MR3 for fluctuating pattern determination, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 005SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage unit 005SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the standard figure reservation storage unit 005SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the standard figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 005SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 005SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 005SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 005SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 005SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 005SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 005SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 005SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 005SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 005SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 12-2 stores various data tables used to control the effect operation in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The special pattern variable display performance control pattern corresponds to multiple types of variation patterns, and corresponds to the period from when the special pattern starts changing in the special pattern game until the finalized special pattern that becomes the special pattern display result is derived and displayed. From data indicating the control contents of various performance operations, such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, reach performance, re-lottery performance, etc., or various performance display operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols. It is configured. The preview performance control pattern is made up of, for example, data indicating the control content of the performance operation that is the preview performance that is executed in response to a plurality of preview patterns prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1.

The special figure variable display performance control pattern may include a plurality of types of ready-to-win performance control patterns in which the performance mode in each ready-to-win performance is different, for example, for each variable pattern for executing the ready-to-win performance.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 12-2 has an area for storing various data used for controlling performance operations, for example, for performance control as shown in FIG. 12-13(A). A data holding area 005SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 005SG190 shown in FIG. 12-13(A) includes a production control flag setting section 005SG191, a production control timer setting section 005SG192, a production control counter setting section 005SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 005SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting unit 005SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 005SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 005SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 005SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 005SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting section 005SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 005SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 005SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 005SG194A as shown in FIG. 12-13(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 005SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 005SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 005SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command and the number of pending memories. Three commands called notification commands (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) are sent as one set from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 005SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 005SG194A of this embodiment, there is a storage area for setting a pending display flag indicating a display mode of a pending display to be displayed on the image display device 5 in a pre-read preview effect to be described later. It is reserved for each buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" for the 1st special figure pending memory and for each buffer number "2-0" to "2-4" for the 2nd special figure pending memory.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the production control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 005SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 005SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 005SG194A shown in Figure 12-12(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 12-12(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it is determined whether or not the start winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation category designation command, and the pending storage number notification command are received. If the determination is made and these commands have been received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the free area of the start winning reception command buffer 005SG194A as a reserved memory of each special symbol.

(display monitor)
Next, the display on the display monitor 21TM029 in this embodiment will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 12-14(A), the display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display section 21TM029A, a second display section 21TM029B, a third display section 21TM029C, and a fourth display section 21TM029D. The first display section 21TM029A to the fourth display section 21TM29D are each composed of seven segments formed by seven segments forming a figure "8" and a dot arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display section 21TM029A to fourth display section 21TM29D can be lit or blinked in red.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 21TM029 in the embodiment is executed using the area other than the test target in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 when testing the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The display monitor 21TM029 displays the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls out in all game states, as shown in Figures 12-14 (B) and 12-14 (C). Base L, which is the real-time value during measurement; Base 1, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls of the first out in all game states; Base 2 is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6,000 pitches out for the second time, and the normal state for every 6000 pitches for the third out (low probability low base state) in all game states. Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 are displayed as percentages on the display monitor 21TM029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 21TM029, in order to display the abbreviation "bL." for the base L, "b" is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A, and "L." is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. " is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 21TM029C and the fourth display section 21TM029D. When displaying base 1 on the display monitor 21TM029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and "1." is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B in order to display "b1.", which is the abbreviation of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 21TM029C and the fourth display section 21TM029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 21TM029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and "2." is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B in order to display "b2.", which is the abbreviation of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 21TM029C and the fourth display section 21TM029D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 21TM029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 21TM029C and the fourth display section 21TM029D.

In the display monitor 21TM029 of this embodiment, control is executed to sequentially display these bases L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 under the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display on the display monitor 21TM029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at 5 second intervals.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of the main board 11, game control main processing)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 12-16 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 12-16, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied. The recovery conditions can be satisfied when the clear signal is off (step S3; Yes), backup data exists (step S4; Yes), and the backup RAM is normal (step S5; Yes). If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3, step S4, step S5; Yes), after executing the recovery process (step S6) and sending the command at the time of recovery (step S7), the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 is performed. At the same time, a random number circuit setting process (step S10b) is executed. Through the recovery process in step S6, a work area is set based on the storage contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

In the recovery process (step S6) of this embodiment, the state of the game stop flag in the backup data is checked, and it is determined whether the game stop flag was set at the time of the power outage. The game stop flag is a flag indicating that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to be in a game stop state. If the game stop flag was set at the time of the power outage (if the game on the pachinko game machine 1 was stopped at the time of the power outage), the MY counter value (described later) is restored from the backup data and the power is restored. If the game stop flag was not set at the time of the power outage (if it was possible to play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of the power outage), the MY counter value, which will be described later, is not restored from the backup data. Set "0" as the MY counter value.

In the setting process of step S10b, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 12-30 and 12-31). Further, communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

In addition, if the recovery condition is not satisfied (No in step S3, step S4, or step S5), after executing the initialization process (step S8) and sending the initialization designation command (step S9), A setting process for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 is executed (step S10a), and a random number circuit setting process (step S10b) is executed. The initialization process in step S8 includes a clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process. In particular, the initialization process (step 8) of this embodiment includes the process of clearing the game stop flag and setting the MY counter value to "0", regardless of the contents of the backup data. In other words, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs while the pachinko game machine 1 is in a gaming stop state, and the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 with the operation of the clear switch 92, the pachinko game machine 1 It is designed to start up in a state where it is possible to play (the gaming state is the normal state).

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S10b), the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). (step S11), and permits the interrupt (step S12). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIGS. 12-17. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12-17 is started, the CPU 103 first performs a power-off detection process (step S20) that determines whether or not the power supply has been cut off, and a process that determines whether or not to stop the game. A game stop start process (step S20a) is executed to monitor. Then, it is determined whether a game stop flag, which will be described later, is set (step S20b).

If the game stop flag is set (step S20b; No), the value of the special symbol process flag is specified (step S20c), and the value of the specified special symbol process flag is used in the jackpot opening pre-processing and jackpot opening process. , it is determined whether the value corresponds to any of the jackpot release post-processing (step S20d).

If the game stop flag is not set (step S20b; No) or if the value of the specified special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to any of the jackpot release pre-processing, jackpot release process, or jackpot release post-processing ( Step S20d; Yes), the CPU 103 executes predetermined switch processing to control the gate switch 21, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, first count switch 23, and It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the 2-count switch 24, the general winning switch 25, and the out switch 26 (step S21). Next, a prize ball process is performed in which settings are made to pay out prize balls when a game ball is detected at the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, first count switch 23, and general winning switch 25. Step S21a), based on the fact that a game ball is detected at the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24, the general winning switch 25, and the out switch 26, the base value is determined. (See FIG. 12-14(C)) Winning information display control processing (Step S21b) to display the calculated base value on the display monitor 21TM029 as shown in FIG. 12-15 (Step S21c) Execute. Further, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the production control command to be transmitted in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

In addition, if the value of the specified special symbol process flag is not a value corresponding to any of the jackpot release pre-processing, jackpot release processing, or jackpot release post-processing, the following steps are taken to stop the game in the pachinko game machine 1: The game stop process (step S20e) is executed, and the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Power-off detection processing)
FIG. 12-18 is a flowchart showing the power interruption detection process. In the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power board (not shown) has decreased to a predetermined value or less is input (005SGS081). If there is no power-off signal input (005SGS081; N), the process ends; if there is a power-off signal input (005SGS081; Y), the backup data including the information stored in the RAM 122 is specified ( 005SGS082), and stores the identified backup data in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (005SGS083). After creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (005SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, the data to be backed up includes the game stop flag, special symbol process flag value, MY counter value, first special symbol retention memory, second special symbol retention memory, regular symbol retention memory, variable special symbol designation buffer value, and time saving. It includes a flag, probability change flag, time saving number counter value, jackpot flag, etc.

FIG. 12-19 is a flowchart showing the game stop monitoring process. In the game stop monitoring process, the CPU 103 first determines whether any of the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, first count switch 23, general winning switch 25, and out switch 26 has been turned on in the switch processing. It is determined whether or not (005SGS051). If any of the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, first count switch 23, general winning switch 25, and out switch 26 is in the on state in the switch process (005SGS051; Y), it is in the on state. A value corresponding to the switch that has become is added to the MY counter value (005SGS052).

After executing 005SGS052, or when none of the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, first count switch 23, general winning switch 25, and out switch 26 are turned on in the switch process (005SGS051 ;N), the CPU 103 determines whether the out switch 26 is turned on in the switch process (005SGS053). When the out switch 26 is turned on in the switch process, if the MY counter value is not 0 (005SGS054; N), the MY counter value is decremented by 1 (005SGS055).

After execution of 005SGS055, if the out switch 26 is not turned on in the switch process (005SGS053; N) or if the MY counter value is 0 (005SGS054; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the MY counter value (005SGS056). ), it is determined whether the MY counter value is 98194 or more (005SGS057). If the MY counter value is not 98194 or more (005SGS057; N), the game stop monitoring process ends, and if the MY counter value is 98194 or more (005SGS057; Y), the game stop flag is set and the game stop monitoring process ends. (005SGS058).

In this embodiment, the game at the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped (the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to a game stop state) on the condition that the MY counter value reaches 98194. Here, the reason for stopping the game in the pachinko game machine 1 on the condition that the MY counter value reaches 98194 will be explained in detail. First, in conventional pachinko machines, jackpots are drawn with a predetermined probability.Although the probability is extremely low, a lucky player can reach the designed value by hitting the jackpot many times a day. There was a possibility of winning more prize balls (for example, 100,000 balls). For this reason, in order to prevent pachinko gaming machines from excessively arousing the gambling spirit of players, the conventional jackpot probability, consecutive winnings continuation rate (the gaming state changes to the jackpot gaming state without passing through the normal state), and It is not enough to limit the number of prize balls that can be won in one jackpot game; A system is needed to limit the number of pitches.

For the above reasons, in this embodiment, a MY counter value is provided, and the game at the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped on the condition that the MY counter value reaches 98194. In addition, "98194", which is the MY counter value for stopping the game in the pachinko game machine 1, is used to detect excessive winnings in the jackpot during a jackpot game (more game balls than expected enter the jackpot during a jackpot game). Even if we take into account prize balls from other winning slots (also referred to as over winnings), the jackpot game can be executed until the last round without the MY counter value reaching ``100000'' to give the player the maximum prize. This is the number that allows the ball to be paid out.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 12-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 12-17 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is controlled from the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 12-17 after the special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the board 12.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the presentation content (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is "lost", when the control is in the time saving state or variable probability state, and if the finished variable display is the 100th variable display in the time saving state or variable probability state, the gaming state is also changed. Updated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening processing includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a jackpot based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from an open state to a closed state. Also included is a process of setting for transmitting a V winning notification command to the production control board 12 based on the detection of a game ball by the second count switch 24. The V winning prize notification command set for transmission is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 12-17). Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 12-21 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 12-20. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (005SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (005SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (005SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 005SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 005SGS102 (005SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 005SG155 is set to "1" (005SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 005SGS101 (005SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol reservation memories has reached the upper limit at 005SGS102 (005SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (005SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (005SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (005SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 005SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 005SGS105 (005SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 005SG155 is set to "2" (S106) .

After executing either of the processes of 005SGS103 and 005SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (005SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (005SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 005SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 005SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the winning type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 005SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (005SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (005SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 005SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 005SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the hit type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a “big hit” or “small hit”. is used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 005SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 005SGS110, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (005SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12-4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of 005SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random value determination process (005SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. (005SGS113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12-17 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of 005SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (005SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (Y in 005SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (005SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in 005SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (005SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Random numerical value judgment process when winning a prize)
FIG. 12-22(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 005SGS 112 of FIG. 12-21 as the winning random value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is treated as a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state by special symbol normal processing. A determination will be made. In the variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value determination process of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole). Accordingly, it is determined whether or not it is determined that a jackpot symbol or a small prize symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is determined whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot", and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-read notice (pending display performance) as described later. become.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 12-22, the CPU 103 identifies the current gaming state (005SGS121), and selects and sets the display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-9(A) (005SGS122). . After that, whether or not the starting opening buffer value and the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted at 005SGS109 in FIG. 12-21 are within a predetermined jackpot determination range in the gaming state specified at 005SGS121. (005SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 005SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 calculates the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing a point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in 005SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be no jackpot during variable display (005SGS123;N), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the miss is performed (005SGS128 ). Further, it is determined whether the time saving flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (005SGS129). If the time saving flag is not set (005SGS129; N), select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and proceed to 005SGS138 (005SGS130), and if the time saving flag is set (005SGS129; Y), select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure. Select the variation pattern determination table C and proceed to 005SGS138.

In addition, if it is determined in 005SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that it will be a jackpot during variable display (005SGS123; Y), the jackpot type extracted in 005SGS109 in Figure 12-21 Select the jackpot type determination table (see Figures 12-9 (B) and 12-9 (C)) according to the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determination and the starting opening buffer value, and determine the jackpot type ( 005SGS132), executes transmission settings for a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type (005SGS133), selects a jackpot variation pattern judgment table, and proceeds to 005SGS138.

In the process of 005SGS138, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each step and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used to determine the fluctuation category according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3. Determine (005SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-22 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. We have created a variable category, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", and a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach). It is sufficient if it can be determined based on the numerical value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 005SGS138 to the production control board 12 (005SGS132), and then the winning random value determination process is ended.

Note that the command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12-17.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 12-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 12-20 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 12-23, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (005SGS161). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 005SGS161, it is sufficient to read the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation memory number in 005SGS161 is other than "0" (005SGS161;N), as reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit in correspondence with reservation number "1", A random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (005SGS162). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the processing of 005SGS162, the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (005SGS163).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (005SGS164), the process moves to 005SGS169.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in 005SGS161 (005SGS161; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (005SGS165). The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of 005SGS165, the game control counter setting section reads the first pending memory count value stored in the first pending memory counter, and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. . In this way, the process of 005SGS165 is executed when it is determined in 005SGS161 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" or not. Determine whether As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation memory number in 005SGS165 is other than "0" (005SGS165;N), as reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit in correspondence with reservation number "1", The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (005SGS166). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the processing of 005SGS166, the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (005SGS167).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (005SGS168), the process moves to 005SGS169.

In 005SGS169, the display result determination shown in Figure 12-9 (A) is used as a table used to determine whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or "miss". Select and set the table. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" or a "miss".

If it is determined at 005SGS170 that it is a "jackpot" (005SGS170; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (005SGS172). At this time, the jackpot type determination table (see Figures 12-9(B) and 12-9(C)) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of multiple types (005SGS173 ). For example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is 1, select and set the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 12-9 (B), and if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is 2 can be set by selecting the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-9(C). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. , which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined according to which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of "Jackpot C" matches (005SGS174).

Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is stored, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (005SGS175). do. As an example, when the jackpot type is "Jackpot A", the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and when the jackpot type is "Jackpot B", the jackpot type buffer value is set to "1", and when the jackpot type is In the case of "Jackpot C", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "2". After processing 005SGS175, the process advances to 005SGS176. Note that if it is determined in 005SGS170 that it is a "miss" (005SGS170; N), the process proceeds to 005SGS176 without executing the processes in 005SGS172 to 005SGS175.

In 005SGS176, the CPU 103 corresponds to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not) and the result of determining the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot gaming state. Set a confirmed special symbol. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" at 005SGS170, and if the jackpot type at 005SGS174 is "jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is determined as a special symbol. Set to . Further, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "2" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol with 005SGS176, specify the MY counter value (005SGS176a), set the transmission of the MY counter value notification command according to the MY counter value (005SGS176b), and set the value of the special symbol process flag. After updating to "1", which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (005SGS177), the special symbol normal process ends.

In addition, in the processing of 005SGS176b, if the MY counter value is 0 to 90000, the first MY counter value notification command is issued, if the MY counter value is 90001 to 95000, the second MY counter value notification command is issued, and if the MY counter value is 95001 to 98194, the second MY counter value notification command is issued. For example, the settings for sending the third MY counter value notification command may be made. In this way, since only three types of MY counter notification commands are provided in this embodiment, the CPU 103 does not have to execute the transmission of MY counter value notification commands according to each value from 0 to 98194. Therefore, the number of types of commands that the CPU 103 transmits to the production control board 12 can be reduced, and the processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 can grasp the approximate value of the MY counter value at each start timing of the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, a mode is exemplified in which the approximate MY counter values are notified to the production control CPU 120 by the first to third MY counter value notification commands, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 may be notified of a specific MY counter value. For example, in addition to the above-mentioned first to third MY counter value notification commands, the CPU 103 sends a command (E1XXH) that notifies the thousands digit of the MY counter value, and a command that notifies the hundreds digit of the MY counter value. (E2XXH), a command to notify the tens digit of the MY counter value (E3XXH), and a command (E4XXH) to notify the ones digit of the MY counter value, and each command's "XX" (EXT data) The performance control CPU 120 may be able to specify the value of each digit based on the numerical value set as . By doing so, the production control PU 120 receives the first to third MY counter value notification commands, E1XXH, E2XXH, E3XXH, and E4XXH commands, thereby ensuring accurate MY every time variable display is executed. It becomes possible to specify the counter value.

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in 005SGS165 (005SGS165; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (005SGS178), the special symbol normal Finish the process. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (execution of a customer waiting demonstration production) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent to the main board 11. From there, it is determined whether or not it has been transmitted to the production control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, transmission settings are made to send a customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

The MY counter value notification command set to be sent in 005SGS176b and the customer waiting demonstration designation command set to be sent in 005SGS178 are sent to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12-17. Sent.

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 12-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S111 of FIG. 12-20 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first selects one fluctuation pattern determination table from the plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 12-8 according to the variable display result, gaming state, number of pending memories, etc. (005SGS161). Then, a fluctuation pattern is determined using the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted in 005SGS109 of FIG. 12-21 and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table (005SGS162).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start any of the special symbol games. As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (005SGS163).

Following the processing of 005SGS163, settings are made to send various commands for when the special symbol starts changing (005SGS164). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting section sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the 005SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 005SG155 is provided with setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The various commands for which transmission settings have been made are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12-4.

After executing the process of 005SGS164, a special figure variable display time which is a variable display time of a special figure according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (005SGS165). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the period from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. The required time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (005SGS166), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Note that the command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12-12.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 12-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S113 of FIG. 12-20 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the symbol determination period timer indicating that the variable display is stopped is in operation (005SGS201). If the symbol confirmation period timer does not appear during operation (005SGS201; N), the stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed (005SGS202), and the symbol confirmation command is set to be sent (005SGS203), and the jackpot flag is set. It is determined whether or not (005SGS204).

When the jackpot flag is set (005SGS204; Y), if the time-saving flag and probability change flag are set, these time-saving flag and probability change flag are cleared (005SGS205). Furthermore, according to the type of jackpot, the transmission settings are made for any of the winning start 1 designation commands to the winning 3 start designation commands, and the transmission settings for the gaming state designation command indicating the normal state (005SGS207, 005SGS208), according to the selected fluctuation pattern. A value corresponding to "0.5 seconds" is set as the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (005SGS209).

Further, the CPU 103 performs transmission settings for a symbol confirmation command according to the value of the set symbol confirmation period timer (005SGS210), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set (005SGS204; N), it is further determined whether the probability change flag or time saving flag is set (005SGS220, 005SGS221). If the probability variation flag is set (005SGS220; Y), or if the probability variation flag is not set but the time saving flag is not set (005SGS220; N and 005SGS221; Y), the time saving state (high probability high base) is set. The value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of variable display times of the remaining time saving control in the low accuracy high base state) is decremented by 1 (005SGS222).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (005SGS223). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (005SGS223; Y), the set time saving flag and probability change flag are cleared (005SGS224), and the symbol confirmation period timer is set according to "10 seconds". Set the value and proceed to 005SGS227 (005SGS225).

In addition, if both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are not set (005SGS220;N and 005SGS221;N), and if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (005SGS223;N), the symbol confirmation period timer is set. Set a value corresponding to "0.5 seconds" and proceed to 005SGS227 (005SGS226).

In addition, in the process of 005SGS227, the transmission setting of the gaming state designation command according to the state of the time saving flag and the probability change flag is performed, and the process of 005SGS210 described above is executed to end the special symbol stop process.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period timer is operating (005SGS201; Y), the CPU 103 subtracts the value of the symbol confirmation period timer by 1 (005SGS231), and after the value is reduced by 1, the symbol confirmation period timer times out. It is determined whether or not it has been carried out (005SGS232). If the symbol confirmation period timer has not timed out (005SGS232; N), the special symbol stop processing is finished, and if the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out (005SGS232; Y), whether or not the stopped symbol is a missed symbol. (005SGS233).

If the stopped symbol is a missed symbol (005SGS233; Y), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing and the special symbol stop processing is ended (005SGS324), and the stopped symbol is a missed symbol. If not (005SGS233; N), set the jackpot display time timer according to the jackpot type (005SGS236), set the sending of the jackpot start designation command according to the jackpot type (005SGS237), and set the value of the special symbol process flag. is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (005SGS238), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 12-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 12-20 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (005SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (005SGS321;N), the jackpot end display timer is set to "20 seconds" as the display time corresponding to the time to display the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time). A value corresponding to is set (005SGS322), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (005SGS321; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (005SGS323). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (005SGS324). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (005SGS324; Y), the CPU 103 sets a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is being controlled, and displays the maximum variable display number of times the time-saving control is executed on the time-saving number counter. "100" is set. Furthermore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second count switch 24 is turned on during the jackpot game, that is, whether or not a V win has occurred (005SGS327). In addition, whether or not a V winning prize has occurred can be determined by, for example, setting a V winning flag in response to the second count switch 24 being turned on during a jackpot game, and checking whether the V winning flag is set or not. The judgment can be made depending on whether or not the case is true.

If the second count switch 24 is turned on during the jackpot game (005SGS327; Y), the probability change flag is set (005SGS328), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing. Then, the jackpot ending process ends (005SGS329). On the other hand, if the second count switch 24 is not turned on during the jackpot game (005SGS327;N), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process and the jackpot end process is executed. End (005SGS329).

(Game stop processing)
FIG. 12-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S20e of FIG. 12-17 as the game stop process.

In the game stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game stop notification command sent flag indicating that the game stop notification command has been sent to the production control board 12 is set (005SGS331). If the game stop notification command sent flag is set (005SGS331; Y), the game stop process is finished, and if the game stop notification command sent flag is not set (005SGS331; N), the first special symbol The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation display device 25A, the second reservation display device 25B, and the regular symbol reservation display device 25C are all turned off (005SGS332).

Further, the transmission setting of the game stop notification command is performed (005SGS333), and a game stop notification command sent flag is set (005SGS334). Furthermore, the output setting of the security signal based on the game stop (output of the game stop notification command) is executed (005SGS335), and the game stop process is ended. The game stop notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12-17. Further, in the processing of 005SGS335, for example, by outputting a security signal to the information output circuit 112, the security signal may be output from the information output circuit 112 for a predetermined period of time.

As described above, the game is stopped by executing the game control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 12-17, the game stop monitoring process shown in Figure 12-19, and the game stop process shown in Figure 12-27. It looks like this. In particular, as shown in FIG. 12-28, in the normal gaming state, time saving state, and variable probability state, the game is stopped when the MY counter value reaches 98194, while the MY counter value during the jackpot game is stopped. When the number reaches 98194, the game is stopped at the timing when the jackpot game ends (all round games end). In this embodiment, once the game stop flag is set, unless the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on together with the operation of the clear switch 92 (the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start), the game is stopped. There is no means to clear the stop flag. In other words, once the MY counter value reaches 98194 and the game stop flag is set during a jackpot game, the player then launches the game ball toward the left gaming area 2L to cause the game ball to enter the jackpot. First, even if the MY counter value is less than 98194, the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to stop playing when the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, if the MY counter value reaches 98194 during a jackpot game and the game stop flag is set, and a power outage occurs in the jackpot game state, the game stop flag is set in the power outage detection process. Backed up. Therefore, when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 without operating the clear switch 92, the pachinko game machine 1 starts in the jackpot game state instead of the game stop state. In other words, since the pachinko game machine 1 starts up in a jackpot game state even though the game stop flag is set, no special error notification etc. is executed in this state. After the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to be stopped based on the game stop flag being set.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-29(B), when the MY counter value reaches the specified value of 98194, the game is stopped and the terminal board From 16 onwards, the security signal is output. In addition, if the MY counter value reaches the specified value of 98194 and the game is stopped, turn off the power to the pachinko game machine 1 once, and then turn on the power to the pachinko game machine 1 again with the operation of the clear switch 92. When the initialization process (step 8 in FIG. 12-16) is executed, the game becomes ready for playing. In other words, the condition for canceling the game stop state is to start the pachinko game machine 1 (cold start) with initialization processing.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is once turned off while the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1, if the power is turned on again to the pachinko game machine 1 without operating the clear switch 92, the power supply When the power is turned off, backup data is created in the power failure detection process, and when the power is turned on again to the pachinko game machine 1, the recovery process (step 6 in FIG. 12-16) is executed. The machine 1 is restored based on the backup data while the game is stopped.

(Main side error processing)
Here, the main side error processing shown in FIG. 12-17 will be explained. In the main side error processing, for example, an abnormality determination process is executed to determine whether an abnormality has occurred by referring to the detection status of each switch or sensor, and when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, , specify the determined abnormality.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-29(A), the CPU 103 identifies the occurrence of a radio wave error based on the radio wave sensor 005SG070 detecting a predetermined radio wave, and the magnetic sensor 005SG060 detects a magnetic field with a predetermined strength or higher. The occurrence of a magnetic error is identified based on the detection of the special variable winning ball device 7 is open during a jackpot game or a small win game, that is, the jackpot door sensor 005SG091 is opened during a jackpot game or The occurrence of the game ball guidance lid operation error is identified based on the detection of the opening of the big winning opening door other than during a small winning game, and the occurrence of the second starting winning in the low base state (the second start winning in the low base state) The starting port switch 22B detects a game ball), and the controller sensor unit 35A detects an abnormality such as the inability to detect the operation of the stick controller 31A. The occurrence of a controller connection error is identified based on the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 by the door open sensor 005SG090, and the occurrence of a door open error is determined based on the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 by the out of ball sensor 005SG094. It is determined that a ball-out error has occurred based on the detection of a ball-out.

Priorities are set for these errors, and if multiple errors occur at the same time, the error notification command is set to be sent according to the error with the highest priority, and the CPU 103 is By executing the command control process shown in FIGS. 12-17, the error notification command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12.

Incidentally, if a game stop error occurs, the CPU 103 sets a game stop flag, executes the processes of S20c to S20e shown in FIG. 12-17, and stops the game. Also, configure transmission settings for error notification commands depending on the error that has occurred. Incidentally, the error notification command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12-17.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the above-mentioned game stop error (radio wave error, magnet error, game ball guide lid activation error) occurs, the jackpot game will end even if these game stop errors occur as long as the jackpot game is in progress. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, if a game stop error (radio wave error, magnet error, game ball guide lid activation error) occurs, Regardless of whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, the game may be stopped immediately.

In addition, if the game is stopped due to the occurrence of these game stop errors, please turn off the power to the pachinko game machine 1 and then turn the power back on to the pachinko game machine 1 by operating the clear switch 92. By executing the processing (step S8), the game stop error is canceled. In other words, the condition for canceling the radio wave error, magnet error, and game ball guide cover operation error is to start the pachinko game machine 1 (cold start) with initialization processing.

If an error with one of the top three priorities (gaming stop error) occurs, the terminal board 16 will cause the control computer installed in the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, each machine counting machine, etc. A security signal is output from the terminal board 16 to the management device. Incidentally, the security signal in this case is output from the occurrence of the game stop error until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

It should be noted that among these errors, for errors with a priority level of 4th or lower, the cancellation conditions and the output mode of the security signal are different for each error that occurs. Specifically, if a starting port 2 abnormal winning error occurs, the starting port 2 abnormal winning error will be canceled based on the elapse of 300 seconds from the occurrence, and a security signal will be output for 4 minutes from the occurrence. be exposed. When an illegal winning error occurs, the illegal winning error is canceled based on the elapse of 30 seconds from the occurrence, and a security signal is output from the occurrence until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off. When a controller connection error occurs, the controller connection error is canceled based on the lapse of 60 seconds from the occurrence, and a security signal is output from the occurrence until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. If a door opening error occurs, the door opening error is canceled based on the closing of the door (gaming machine frame 3), and no security signal is output. When an out-of-ball error occurs, the out-of-ball error is canceled based on the cancellation of the out-of-ball error (replacement balls have been supplied), and no security signal is output.

In this embodiment, radio wave errors, magnet errors, and game ball guide lid activation errors can be fixed by turning off the power to the pachinko game machine 1 and then turning on the power to the pachinko game machine 1 while operating the clear switch. Although we have illustrated examples of how to clear the form, the present invention is not limited to this. Radio wave errors, magnet errors, and game ball guide lid activation errors can be solved by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1 and then turning off the clear switch. It may also be canceled by turning on the power to the pachinko game machine 1 (starting the pachinko game machine 1 with a hot start) without any operation.

In addition, in this way, by turning off the power to the pachinko game machine 1 and then turning on the power to the pachinko game machine 1 without operating the clear switch, the radio wave error, magnet error, and game ball guide cover activation error can be cleared. In this case, the security signal is output based on the radio wave error, magnet error, and game ball guiding lid operation error for a predetermined period (for example, 4 minutes) after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may also do so.

(Prize ball processing)
Next, the prize ball processing (S21a) in the main processing will be explained. First, the payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and prize ball request signal (payout control command) that are transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be explained.

FIG. 12-30(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 12-30(A), the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the gaming control microcomputer 100 starts the gaming control main processing), and is output to the payout control board 21TM037. This is a signal (a connection confirmation signal for the main board 11) for notifying that the main board 11 has started up. Further, the connection confirmation signal indicates that the prize ball payout is possible. The connection confirmation signal is outputted via the I/O port 21TM057 and output circuit 21TM067 of the microcomputer 100 for game control, and is outputted via the input circuit 21TM373A and I/O port 21TM372e of the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control. The data is input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each connection confirmation signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted through one signal line. Note that the connection confirmation signal becomes ready to be output by setting the initial value to the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of output port 0 through the processing of S6 and S8 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Although it is output by the process of S21TM2080 shown in FIG. 12-34, it may be output at the timing of S6 and S8 shown in FIG. 12-16).

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 similarly to the game control microcomputer 100. Further, various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are similar to the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 12-30(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the control commands transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

As mentioned above, the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (8-digit binary data), and are output as control commands that indicate predetermined content depending on the content of the set 8-bit data. be done.

The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to check whether the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. Control command to be sent. The data content of the connection confirmation command is "A0(H)", that is, "1010000".

The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 issues a connection confirmation command. This is a control command that is sent as a response signal in response to the reception of the command. The data content of the connection OK command is "8x(H)", that is, "10000xxx". Here, if a prize ball error (an abnormal state in which the prize ball dispensing operation based on winning a prize or the ball lending and dispensing operation based on a ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the first bit "x" is set to "1". Further, when a full tank error occurs, the second bit "x" is set to "1". Further, when a ball out error occurs, the third bit "x" is set to "1". Furthermore, when a door opening error occurs, the fourth bit "x" is set to "1". In this way, while checking the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the game control microcomputer 100 can be notified.

The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number of game balls (0 to 14) for which a payout request is made, and is a control command sent by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a winning. . The content of the data of the prize ball number command is "5x(H)", that is, "0101xxxx". In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game balls are paid out by the general winning switch 25 corresponding to the general winning port 10. When the game ball is detected, 10 prize balls are put out, and when the first count switch 23 detects a game ball, 14 prize balls are put out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the prize ball number command "01010011" to notify the number of prize balls of 3 is transmitted, and the prize ball number command "01010011" is sent to the general winning port 10. If a game ball is detected by the corresponding prize opening switch, the prize ball number command "01011010" to notify the number of prize balls of 10 is sent, and if a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, the prize is A prize ball number command "01011110" for notifying the number of balls (14) is transmitted. Note that either the connection confirmation command or the prize ball number command is configured to be transmitted as the prize ball request signal. Note that the prize ball number command is transmitted in place of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted, based on the fulfillment of the prize ball payout condition (occurrence of winning, etc.). In this embodiment, as described above, the upper 4 bits are set with data corresponding to the number of prize balls, but the upper 4 bits are shared and the lower 4 bits are set with data corresponding to the number of prize balls. You can do it like this.

The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball action (prize ball payout action) has ended, and is a control command that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits based on the end of the prize ball action. The data content of the prize ball end command is "50 (H)", that is, "01010000". Note that the prize ball end command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the completion of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, data indicating error information is not set in the prize ball end command. This is because the prize ball end command is sent only once when the prize ball movement ends, so even if you do not send error information at that timing, data indicating the error information is set in the next connection OK command and sent. This is because it is possible to do so. Note that data indicating error information may be set in the lower four bits of the prize ball end command.

The prize ball preparation command is a control command that notifies that a predetermined error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not been completed, and the predetermined error occurs while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executing the prize ball operation. This is a control command that is sent based on what has happened. The data content of the connection OK command is "8x(H)", that is, "10000xxx". Here, if a prize ball error occurs, the first bit "x" is set to "1". Further, when a full tank error occurs, the second bit "x" is set to "1". Further, when a ball out error occurs, the third bit "x" is set to "1". Furthermore, when a door opening error occurs, the fourth bit "x" is set to "1". In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that a predetermined error has occurred during the execution of the prize ball operation and that the prize ball operation has not been completed. In addition, the contents of the error can also be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. Similarly to the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits according to the error state (changing the predetermined bits). Moreover, any one of the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command, and the prize ball end command is configured to be transmitted as a reception ACK signal. The prize ball preparation command is a command (signal) that is output not only when an error has occurred and the prize ball action cannot be executed, but also when the prize ball action is in progress.

In addition, the prize ball preparation command is sent in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is sent, based on the fact that an error has occurred and the prize ball operation cannot be performed. be.

FIG. 12-31 is a block diagram showing signal lines etc. used for transmitting and receiving the control signal shown in FIG. 12-30(A) and the control command shown in FIG. 12-30(B). As shown in FIG. 12-31, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. Also, among the control commands, the connection confirmation command and prize ball number command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100, and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Ru. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, prize ball end command, and prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control, and are output from the serial communication circuit built in the microcomputer 100 for game control. 21TM505. In addition, FIG. 12-31 shows two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a reception ACK signal) as signal lines for serial communication. However, in reality, the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal are transmitted and received using one signal line.

Next, the transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be explained. The prize ball request signal consists of a connection confirmation command and a prize ball number command, and the received ACK signal consists of a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparation command.

FIG. 12-32 is a sequence diagram showing signal transmission and reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 12-32, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the signal line connection between the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is disconnected via the serial communication circuit 21TM505. , and sends a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, it transmits a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, it transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has passed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly perform the connection confirmation communication process as described above as long as the connection state is normal.

(Payout control main process)
Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be explained. FIG. 12-23 is a flowchart showing the main process (payout control main process) executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU21TM371 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU21TM371 sets the built-in device register (S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM to an accessible state (S21TM1860). In addition, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the unpaid prize balls counter (S21TM1870).

In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in timer mode. Therefore, in the S21TM1840 built-in device register setting process and the S21TM1850 process, register settings are required to set the channel to be used in timer mode, register settings to enable interrupt generation, and register settings to set interrupt vectors. Settings are made. Then, an interrupt by that channel is used as a timer interrupt. If it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

Note that the interrupt vector set for the channel set to timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of timer interrupt processing. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified using the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. The timer interrupt process includes a payout control process that controls the payout means (at least includes a process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal regarding prize ball payout from the main board, and drives the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request). ) is executed.

In this embodiment, interrupt mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, it is possible to use interrupt processing based on counting up the built-in CTC. Furthermore, it is possible to set an interrupt processing start address according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. An interrupt based on the count up of channel 3 (CH3) of the CTC is an interrupt that occurs when the CPU's internal clock (system clock) counts down and the register value reaches "0", and is used as a timer interrupt. .

Next, the payout control CPU21TM371 first performs RAM clear processing (S21TM1880). In addition, initial values are set for flags, counters, etc. in the RAM area (S21TM1890). The process of S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the initial value of the unpaid prize balls counter to the unpaid prize balls counter.

Further, the payout control CPU21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process to initialize the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to serially communicate with the gaming control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100. Configure settings.

When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority order of interrupt processing to be executed in response to an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt processing according to the same process as the priority initialization process performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

Then, the CTC register provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically (S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt generation interval is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since interrupts are prohibited in S21TM1810 of the initialization process, interrupts are permitted before completing the initialization process (S21TM1930). After that, a loop process is started to monitor the occurrence of a timer interrupt.

As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate timer interrupts. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

(Payout control timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 12-34 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing (payout control timer interrupt processing) executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as a payout control process. First, the payout control CPU21TM371 performs input determination processing (S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process that detects the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, and reflects the detection results in a predetermined 1 byte of RAM (referred to as an input state flag). be. In addition, in the payout control process, when controlling based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not directly checked, but the input state is Check flag status.

Next, the payout control CPU21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (S21TM2030). The prepaid card unit control process in this embodiment is a process of writing data on the number of prize balls paid out to the player into a prepaid card based on the operation of the return switch 21TM063, and a process in which data on the prize balls is written. This includes processing for ejecting the prepaid card from the card unit 21TM050 and returning it to the player. Further, the payout control CPU21TM371 executes a main control communication process to be described later (S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process that performs control to pay out rented balls in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and controls to pay out the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board. (S21TM2040).

Then, the payout control CPU21TM371 executes error processing to detect various errors (S21TM2050). Further, information output processing is executed to output prize ball information and ball rental information to be output to the outside of the gaming machine (S21TM2060). Further, according to the result of the error processing, a predetermined display is made on the error display LED 21TM374, and display control processing is executed to light up the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out of ball LED 21TM054 (S21TM2070).

In this embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full tank error, a bulb out error, or a prepaid card unit disconnection error) are detected in error processing to be described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of S21TM2070, based on the fact that the error bit is set, the payout control CPU21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED21TM374. Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control to light up the prize ball LED 21TM053 when the prize ball is being put out in the display control process. Moreover, after finishing the prize ball payout, control is performed to turn off the prize ball LED21TM053.

Further, in this embodiment, RAM areas (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output states of the output ports are provided, but the payout control CPU 21TM371 The contents of the 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (S21TM2080: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer perform payout motor control processing (S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (S21TM2030), main control communication processing (S21TM2035), information output processing (S21TM2060), and display control processing. It is updated in (S21TM2070).

Next, in the main control communication process of S21TM2035, the operation of the payout control CPU21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to transmit and receive various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-31, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 that serially communicates various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 12-30(B) from the game control microcomputer 100 using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. Further, upon receiving the prize ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to transmit a prize ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal.

Similarly to the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control CPU 21TM371, when an interrupt request is received from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while in the interrupt enabled state, interrupts the interrupt request made by the serial communication circuit 21TM380. Execute interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 specifies that the cause of the interrupt is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received received data, it executes the reception interrupt process. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving reception data. In addition, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt process. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21 TM 371 determines whether or not the read received data is a prize ball number command in the reception interrupt process. Further, when the received data is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU21TM371 may add the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. In this way, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether the received data is a prize ball number command based on whether the reception interrupt flag is set, and the number of prize balls is determined. There is no need to perform a process of adding to the unpaid item counter.

(Communication between main board, payout control board, and card unit)
FIG. 12-35 is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the main board 11, payout control board 21TM037, and card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. Power supply to the gaming machine is started, and based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal into the ON state when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned ON in the serial communication circuit setting process that is the process of S10a shown in FIG. 12-16 (see FIG. 12-30(A)). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on the VL signal as a connection signal.

When a card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and from the card unit 21TM050. When the fall (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 125 balls) of rental balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(Prize ball payout control)

FIG. 12-36 is a timing diagram showing signal transmission and reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 12-36, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the game control microcomputer 100 receives a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, it again transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has passed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above as long as the connection state is normal.

If a prize is won while the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (from the time the connection OK command is received as the reception ACK signal until the connection confirmation command is sent as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in a prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and the prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation) is performed. Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal, it transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception.

Although not shown, if a prize is won during the execution of the connection confirmation communication process (from the time the connection confirmation command is sent as the prize ball request signal until the connection OK command is received as the reception ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, it is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and the payout of the prize balls (prize ball payout operation) is performed. Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. In addition, during execution of the payout of prize balls (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12-37. When the production control main process shown in FIG. 12-37 is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs the production control board. Performs register settings for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the 12. In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. After executing step S77, error notification processing is executed (step S78). In the error notification process, for example, control is performed to notify an error that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 by displaying an image on the image display device 5, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9, etc. be exposed. After executing step S78, a demonstration production process is executed (step S79). In the demonstration performance process, for example, the performance control CPU 120 operates a customer waiting demonstration start wait timer based on receiving a customer waiting demonstration designation command from the CPU 103. If a new variable display is not started during the operation period of the customer waiting demonstration start waiting timer, the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed based on the timer out of the customer waiting demonstration start waiting timer. Note that if a new variable display is started while the demonstration performance is being executed, the demonstration performance that is being executed is interrupted. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)

FIG. 12-38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 12-37 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 12-38, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a game stop notification command is received (step S160a). If the game stop notification command is received (step S160a; Y), the value of the production control process flag is updated to "6", which is the value corresponding to the game stop production process, and the process proceeds to step S160c (step S160b). If the game stop notification command is not received (step 160a; N), the process advances to step S160c.

In step 160c, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the performance control process flag is "6", which is a value corresponding to the game stop performance process. If the value of the production control process flag is "6" (step 160c; Y), the process advances to step S164, and if the value of the production control process flag is not "6" (step 160c; N), the advance notice production Setting processing is executed (step S161). In the pre-read preview performance setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the pre-read notice effect setting process, the number of prize balls paid out in each jackpot gaming state during the period from when the normal state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state until it is controlled to the normal state again is totaled. (step S162), and a game stop suggestion process (step S163) to execute a game stop suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be stopped. is executed, and the process advances to step S164.

In the prize ball number totaling process, the value of the prize ball number counter is set to 0 at the timing when the normal state is controlled to change to the jackpot game state, and the prize ball number notification command is issued according to the winnings in the jackpot slot during the jackpot game. The value of the prize ball counter may be added each time it is received.

In addition, in step S164, the performance control CPU 120 displays a right-hitting promotion display on the image display device 5 to urge the player to hit the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R in the jackpot gaming state, time saving state, and variable probability state. Execute the right-handed hitting promotion display process to do so.

In addition, in step 165, the performance control CPU 120 promotes left-handed hitting to prompt the player to launch the game ball toward the left gaming area 2L when the gaming state is controlled from the time-saving state or the variable probability state to the normal state. A left-handed hitting promotion display process for displaying the display on the image display device 5 is executed.

After executing the process of step S165, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the production process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process. In addition, the jackpot performance processing of this embodiment executes the V winning notification performance based on the reception of the V winning notification command that notifies that the game ball has been detected by the second count switch 24 during the jackpot game. It is also a process of

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

The game stop performance process in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "7". In this game stop effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes a game stop effect indicating that the game in the pachinko game machine 1 has been stopped based on receiving the game stop notification command. In the pachinko game machine 1 according to this embodiment, once the game is stopped, the power must be turned off and then turned on while operating the clear switch 92 to start up (start up with a cold start). Since the game will not become playable again, after the game is stopped, the game stop effect will continue to be executed unless the power is turned off.

(Pre-read preview effect setting process)
FIG. 12-39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 12-38 as the advance notice effect setting process. In the pre-read preview effect setting process shown in FIG. 12-39, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning reception command buffer 005SG194A (step 005SGS241) to see if there is an entry for which the pending display flag is not set. (Step 005SGS242).

If there is no entry whose pending display flag is not set (Step 005SGS242; N), the process advances to Step 005SGS252, and if there is an entry whose pending display flag is not set (Step 005SGS242; Y), the process proceeds to step 005SGS252. It is determined whether the symbol designation command is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a command indicating a miss (step 005SGS243). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (step 005SGS243; N), the numerical range of the MY counter value is specified (step 005SGS244). Note that the numerical range of the MY counter value may be specified, for example, from the received MY counter value notification command (see FIG. 12-5(D)).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the number of pending memories for which the variable display result is a jackpot from the starting winning reception command buffer 005SG194A (step 005SGS245), and the pending memory stored as the entry is the pending memory of a jackpot. In particular, the display pattern of the pending display is determined based on the number of pending memories that will result in a jackpot and the numerical range of the MY counter value (005SGS246).

In step 005SGS246, for example, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratios shown in FIGS. 12-40(A) and 12-40(B).

Specifically, there are three types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-read preview performance: display pattern α, display pattern β, and display pattern γ. Among these, when the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display area 5U. When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-read preview effect is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display is a white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display. is displayed in area 5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-read preview effect is determined to be display pattern γ, the pending memory display is in the alphabet "V" in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display area 5D. It is displayed in the pending storage display area 5U. Incidentally, when the prefetch preview performance is not executed, the pending display is displayed as a white circle (◯) in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display area 5U.

In addition, in step 005SGS246, as shown in FIG. 12-40 (A), when the MY counter value is 0 to 95000, when the MY counter value is 95001 or more and the number of pending memories that becomes a jackpot is 1, , based on the fact that the pending memory is a pending memory that will be a jackpot, it is decided at a rate of 5% not to perform the pre-read preview effect (displaying the pending display in a white circle), and at a rate of 25%. It is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect using the display pattern α (displaying the pending display as a white square), and execute the pre-read preview effect using the display pattern β at a rate of 65% (displaying the pending display using a white star). It is determined that the prefetch preview performance is to be displayed in the shape of a "V" at a rate of 5% (the pending display is to be displayed in the shape of a "V").

Furthermore, in step 005SGS246, if the MY counter value is 95001 or more and the number of pending memories that will become a jackpot is two or more, as shown in FIG. 12-40 (B), the pending memory is a pending memory that will become a jackpot. Based on a certain fact, it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview effect (displaying a pending display in a white circle) at a rate of 5%, and to execute the pre-read preview effect in the display pattern α at a rate of 30%. (Display the pending display as a white square), decide to execute the pre-read preview effect in display pattern β at a rate of 65% (display the pending display as a white star), It is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the display pattern γ (display the pending display in the shape of a "V") at a rate of %.

Further, in step 005SGS243, if the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 005SGS243; Y), the fluctuation category designation command of the entry is specified ( Step 005SGS248), Based on the identified variation category, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern (Step 005SGS249).

In step 005SGS249, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 12-40(C). For example, as shown in Figure 12-40 (C), when the fluctuation category is "non-reach", based on the fact that the relevant pending memory is a missed pending memory, 95% of the time the prefetch preview effect is It is decided not to execute (the pending display is displayed as a white circle), and it is decided that the pre-read preview effect is executed in display pattern α at a rate of 5% (the pending display is displayed as a white rectangle). , Deciding to execute the pre-read preview effect in display pattern β at a rate of 0% (displaying the pending display in a white star shape), and execute the pre-read preview effect in display pattern γ at a rate of 0%. (Display the hold display in the shape of a "V").

In addition, if the fluctuation category is "Other (normal reach)", based on the fact that the pending memory is an out-of-date pending memory, 75% of the time the pre-read preview effect will not be executed (the pending display will be changed to a white circle). It is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect in display pattern α at a rate of 20% (to display the pending display as a white rectangle), and to execute the pre-read notice effect at a rate of 5%. Deciding to execute with display pattern β (displaying the pending display in a white star shape), and executing the pre-read preview effect at a rate of 0% in display pattern γ (displaying the pending display in a "V" shape) to decide).

If the fluctuation category is "Super Reach", based on the fact that the pending memory is a missed pending memory, the pre-read preview effect will not be executed (the pending display will be displayed in a white circle) at a rate of 65%. 25% of the time, it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect in the display pattern α (the pending display is displayed as a white rectangle), and the pre-read notice effect is executed in the display pattern at the 10% rate. Deciding to execute it in β (displaying the pending display in a white star shape), and executing the pre-read preview effect at a rate of 0% in the display pattern γ (displaying the pending display in a "V" shape) ) to determine.

In other words, as shown in FIGS. 12-40(A) to 12-40(C), in this embodiment, when the prefetch preview effect is not executed (when the pending display is displayed as a white circle), , the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set lower than when the pre-read preview performance is executed (when the pending display is displayed as a white rectangle, star shape, or letter "V").

Furthermore, when the pre-reading notice performance is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set to be lowest when the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the display pattern α; When executed with γ, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is set to be the highest (the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state depending on whether or not the pre-read preview effect is executed and the display pattern (jackpot expectation level) : Pre-reading notice effect not executed < Pre-reading notice effect is executed with display pattern α< Pre-reading notice effect is executed with display pattern β< Pre-reading notice effect is executed with display pattern γ).

In particular, the display pattern γ is a display pattern that notifies that the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and the display pattern γ is determined when the MY counter value is 95001 or more and there are multiple pending memories that result in a jackpot. It is set so that it cannot be used.

After executing the process of step 005SGS246 or step 005SGS149, the performance control CPU 120 sets a flag value according to the display pattern and whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance to the pending display flag of the entry (step 005SGS247). For example, if it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, set the pending display flag of the entry to "0", and if it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α. sets the pending display flag of the entry to "1", and if it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect in the display pattern β, sets the pending display flag of the entry to "2", If it is determined that the display pattern γ of the pending display preview effect is to be executed, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "3" and the process proceeds to step 005SGS252.

Then, in step 005SGS252, the pending display is updated based on the storage contents (value of the pending display flag) of the start winning reception command buffer 005SG194A (step 005SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the reception command buffer 005SG194A at the time of starting winning is displayed in a display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", "2", and "3" set in the pending display flag. will be displayed. In addition, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start-up winning command buffer 005SG194A are shifted, the image display device 5 is The pending display of the first pending storage display area 5D and the second pending storage display area 5U provided at the lower position is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-8-18(B), if the number of first special symbol pending memories is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this pending memory display, when the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", "○" is displayed as shown in Figure 12-8-18 (B). If the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", it will be displayed in the display mode of "◇". ☆” is displayed. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is two, two pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 5D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 5D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 5D.

Although this embodiment exemplifies a form in which the process of step 005SGS252 is executed in the advance notice effect setting process, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first reservation storage display areas 5D The process for updating the hold display in the second hold storage display area 5U may be executed separately as a process (for example, hold display update process) that is different from the prefetch preview effect setting process.

In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, if a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special drawing is new. Both the reserved memory stored in the first prize and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance, but the present invention is directed to this. Although not limited to this, in such a case, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, and the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure. It is also possible to decide only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or non-execute the pre-read preview performance in the suspended memory in the first special figure is suspended in the second special figure. This is done with priority over the decision on whether or not to execute the preview performance in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure When it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is a short-time state or a variable probability state where high opening control is performed, the decision to execute or not execute the pre-read notice performance in the reserved memory of the second special symbol is stored in the reserved memory of the first special symbol. This is done with priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-read preview performance. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure When it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

(Game stop suggestion effect processing)
FIG. 12-41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S163 of FIG. 12-38 as the game stop suggestion effect process. In the game stop suggestion performance process shown in FIG. 12-41, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the game stop suggestion performance process timer is in operation (step 005SGS401). If the game stop suggestion production process timer is not in operation (step 005SGS401; N), it is further determined whether or not the third MY counter value notification command is received (step 005SGS402). If the 3rd MY counter value notification command is not received (step 005SGS402; N), the game stop suggestion effect processing is ended, and if the 3rd MY counter value notification command is received, that is, the MY counter value is in the range of 95001 to 98194. If so (step 005SGS402), the gaming state is specified (step 005SGS403), and it is determined whether the specified gaming state is the normal state (step 005SGS404).

If the specified gaming state is a regular state (Step 005SGS404; Y), a process table for a game stop suggestion effect corresponding to the normal state is selected, and the process proceeds to Step 005SGS407 (Step 005SGS405). In addition, if the specified gaming state is either a time-saving state or a variable probability state (step 005SGS404; N), select a process table for a game stop suggestion effect corresponding to the time-saving state or variable probability state, and proceed to step 005SGS407 ( Step 005SGS406).

Then, in 005SGS407, the performance control CPU 120 starts the game stop suggestion performance process timer in the process data 1 of the process table of the selected game stop suggestion performance (step 005SGS407). In this embodiment, a process table of game stop suggestion effects corresponding to each game stop suggestion effect is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

Then, the production control CPU 120 controls the contents of the first process data 1 of the set game stop suggestion production process table (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1, etc.) Accordingly, control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, game effect lamp 9 as a performance component, speakers 8L, 8R, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc. as a performance component) as a performance component is started, and the game starts. The stop suggestion production process ends (step 005SGS408).

In addition, if the game stop suggestion production process timer is operating in step 005SGS401 (step 005SGS401; Y), the game stop suggestion production process timer value is -1 (step 005SGS409), and the game stop suggestion production process timer is It is determined whether or not it is out (step 005 SGS410). If the game stop suggestion production process timer has not timed out (step 005SGS410; N), proceed to step 005SGS414, and if the game stop suggestion production process timer has timed out (step 005SGS410; Y), the timer has expired. It is determined whether the game stop suggestion production process timer is the last game stop suggestion production process timer (step 005SGS411). If the game stop suggestion production process timer that has timed out is the last game stop suggestion production process timer (step 005SGS411; Y), the processes of steps 005SGS407 and 005SGS408 are executed to end the game stop suggestion production process.

Further, if the game stop suggestion performance process timer that has timed out is not the last game stop suggestion performance process timer (step 005SGS411; N), the process data of the game stop suggestion performance is switched (step 005SGS412). That is, the next process timer (game stop effect process timer) is restarted by setting the next set value of the game stop effect process timer in the process table of the game stop suggestion effect to the process timer, and the process proceeds to step 005SGS414. Proceed (step 005SGS413).

In addition, in step 005SGS414, the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation part control execution data, etc. included in the process data of the game stop suggestion effect are changed according to the value of the game stop suggestion effect process timer. Based on this, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is executed, and the game stop doctor performance process is completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game stop suggestion performance is started based on the MY counter value reaching 95001 in the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, and these game stop suggestion performances are , is repeatedly executed in the pachinko game machine 1 until the game is stopped.

In addition, different process tables for game stop suggestion effects are selected when the gaming state is normal and when the gaming state is short time/variable probability state, so in normal state The performance mode of the game stop suggestion performance that is executed is different from the game stop suggestion performance that is executed in the time saving state and the probability variable state.

In addition, in this embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 suggests that the game will be stopped by executing the game stop suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the game stop suggestion effect, the number of balls remaining until the game is stopped (the net increase in the number of balls) may be notified to the player through the display on the image display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. good. In this way, when notifying the number of remaining balls until the game is stopped as a game stop suggestion performance, for example, the CPU 103 can send a command that can be sent to the performance control board 12 so that the out switch 26 stops the game balls. In addition to providing a command (out notification command) for notifying that the performance has been detected, a production MY counter whose value can be increased or decreased by the production control CPU 120 receiving an out notification command or prize ball number notification command is provided, and the production MY counter is provided. Depending on the value of the counter, it may be possible to inform whether or not to execute a game stop suggestion effect and the number of balls remaining until the game is stopped (net increase number of balls).

As mentioned above, when executing a game stop suggestion effect based on the value of the MY counter for effect, for example, the data on the effect control board 12 side may be reset due to an instantaneous power outage (momentary power outage), etc. If the command from the CPU 103 cannot be received normally, there is a possibility that the performance MY counter will not be able to grasp the accurate MY counter value. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 is able to grasp (specify) the performance MY counter value, the performance control CPU 120 notifies the remaining number of balls until the game is stopped as a game stop suggestion performance. If the player is unable to grasp (specify) the value of the MY counter for the effect, the game stop suggestion effect is a display of ``game stop almost'' instead of the specific number of balls remaining until the game is stopped (Figure 12-55 ), etc., may only indicate that the game will be stopped.

Furthermore, if it is possible to notify the remaining number of balls (net increase number of balls) until the game is stopped as a game stop suggestion effect, as described above, a command that the CPU 103 can send to the effect control board 12 In addition to the first to third MY counter value notification commands, a command to notify the thousands digit of the MY counter value (E1XXH), a command to notify the hundreds digit of the MY counter value (E2XXH), MY A command (E3XXH) to notify the tens digit of the counter value and a command (E4XXH) to notify the ones digit of the MY counter value are provided, and are set as "XX" (EXT data) of each command. The effect control CPU 120 may be able to specify the value of each digit based on the numerical value. By doing this, even if the performance control CPU 120 cannot specify the MY counter value due to failure to receive each command accurately, the performance control CPU 120 will be able to accurately determine the MY counter value at the start of the next variable display. It becomes possible to specify the MY counter value, and it becomes possible to accurately notify the remaining number of balls (net increase in the number of balls) until the game is stopped as a game stop suggestion performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state where the game stop flag is set in the jackpot game state is also the state where the game stop suggestion effect is being executed, but in this state, a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1. In this case, since the pachinko game machine 1 starts in the jackpot game state, the CPU 103 cannot send the MY counter value notification command with the start of a new variable display, and the production control CPU 120 does not suggest a game stop. Unable to resume performance. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine is started in a jackpot game state, the CPU 103 sends a game stop flag status notification command to the production control board 12, which indicates whether or not the game stop flag is set at the time of startup. However, the performance control CPU 120 may restart the game stop suggestion performance based on specifying that the game stop flag is set from the game stop flag status notification command.

(Right-handed hitting promotion display processing)
FIG. 12-42 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S164 of FIG. 12-38 as the right-handed driving promotion display process. In the right hit promotion display process shown in FIG. 12-42, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the value of the performance control process flag is "4" indicating the jackpot performance process (step 005SGS421). If the value of the production control process flag is "4" indicating the jackpot production process (step 005 SGS421; Y), it is determined whether or not the right-hitting promotion display is already being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 005SGS422). If the right-handed hitting promotion display is already being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 005 SGS422; Y), the right-handed hitting promotion display process is ended, and if the right-handed hitting promotion display is not yet displayed on the image display device 5 ( Step 005SGS422; N) starts displaying the right-handed hitting promotion display at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the upper center of the display area of the image display device 5), and ends the right-handed hitting promotion display process (step 005SGS423 ).

Furthermore, if the value of the production control process flag is not "4" indicating the jackpot production process (step 005SGS421; N), the value of the production control process flag is "0" indicating the variable display start waiting process. It is determined whether or not (Step 005SGS424). If the value of the production control process flag is "0" indicating the variable display start waiting process, it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state (step 005SGS425). If the gaming state is one of the time-saving state, variable probability state, or jackpot gaming state (step 005SGS425; N), the right-hand hitting promotion display process is terminated, and if the gaming state is the normal state (005SGS425; Y), further processing is performed. It is determined whether or not a right-handed hitting promotion display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (Step 005SGS426).

If the image display device 5 is not displaying a right-handed batting promotion display (step 005SGS426; N), the right-handed batting promotion display process is ended, and if the right-handed batting promotion display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (005SGS426; Y). ) ends the display of the right-handed hitting promotion display, and ends the right-handed hitting promotion display process (step 005SGS427).

Furthermore, if the value of the production control process flag is not "0" indicating the variable display start waiting process (step 005 SGS424; N), the value of the production control process flag is "6" indicating the game stop production process. It is determined whether or not (Step 005SGS428). If the value of the performance control process flag is "6" indicating the game stop performance process (Step 005SGS428; Y), the display of the right-hand hitting promotion display is ended, and the right-hand hitting promotion display process is ended (Step 005SGS427). If the value of the performance control process flag is not "6" indicating the game stop performance process (step 005SGS428; N), the right-handed hitting promotion display process is ended.

As described above, in this embodiment, the display of the right hitting promotion display is started on the image display device 5 by controlling to the jackpot game state based on the variable display in the normal state. In addition, the right hitting promotion display will be displayed until the variable display is executed 100 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state (until it is controlled to the normal state again). The display continues in this state.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 12-43 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. 12-39. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 005SGS431). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 005SGS431; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 005SG194A is "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 005SGS432). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 005SGS431 (step 005SGS431; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 005SGS433). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 005SGS433; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 005SGS433; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 005SG194A are stored in one buffer number. Shift upward by minutes (step 005SGS434). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 005SGS432 or step 005SGS434, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 005SGS435).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 005SGS436). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot A, the production control CPU 120, for example, when the three symbols are arranged in an even number as the stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbols). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot B, the stop symbols may include multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333'', ``555'', ``999'', etc.). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols with all "7" symbols is determined as the stop symbol. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the three symbols will be irregular as the stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (non-reach and off-reach symbols), and if the variation pattern is normal reach off or super reach off, the left and right symbols are aligned as a stop symbol, but the inner symbols are not aligned. What is necessary is to determine a combination of decorative symbols (for example, symbols that are out of reach and out of reach, such as "121" and "434").

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, the combination of even symbols is a jackpot, and if the jackpot type is jackpot B, the jackpot is a jackpot for a combination of odd symbols other than "7". Although the form for determining the symbols has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the jackpot type is A, a case may be provided in which the jackpot symbol is determined for a combination of odd symbols other than "7". Alternatively, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, a case may be provided in which the jackpot symbol is determined as a combination of even symbols. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is jackpot C, a case may be provided in which the jackpot symbol is determined to be a combination of odd numbers or even numbers other than "7".

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a preview performance determination process (step 005SGS438), and then selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (step 005SGS439). Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 005SGS440).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 005SGS441). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation patterns that correspond one-to-one to the variation pattern designation commands. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 005SGS442). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 005SGS443). In addition, the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative pattern on the center left to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is ended (step 005SGS444).

(Preview production decision processing)
FIG. 12-44 is a flowchart showing the preview effect determination process (step 005SGS438) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 12-43. In the preview performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and fluctuation pattern of the variable display from the read fluctuation pattern designation command, data stored in the display result designation command storage area, etc. (Step 005SGS451), the range of MY counter values is specified from the received MY counter value notification command (Step 005SGS452). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the preview performance and the performance pattern of the preview performance according to the specified variable display result, variation pattern, and MY counter value range (step 005SGS453).

Note that the preview performance in this embodiment is, for example, a character preview performance in which characters are displayed on the image display device 5, and the characters to be displayed differ depending on the performance pattern. Furthermore, as for the character preview performance, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot varies depending on the character to be displayed (performance pattern).

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-45 (A), when the variable display result is a jackpot and the MY counter value range is from 0 to 95000, it is decided not to perform the preview effect at a rate of 15%, It is decided to execute the preview performance in production pattern X with a proportion of 30% (displaying character It is decided to display character Y as a preview performance), and to execute the preview performance in the performance pattern Z at a rate of 5% (display character Z as a character preview performance).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-45 (B), when the variable display result is a jackpot and the MY counter value range is from 95001 to 98194, it is decided not to perform the preview effect at a rate of 15%, It is decided to execute the preview performance in production pattern X with a proportion of 30% (displaying character It is decided (to display character Y as a preview performance) and to execute the preview performance in performance pattern Z at a rate of 0% (to display character Z as a character preview performance).

As shown in Figure 12-45 (C), if the variable display result is off and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach, the decision is made to not execute the preview effect at a rate of 95%, and the allocation is at 5%. It is decided to execute the preview performance in the production pattern X (displaying the character (to be displayed), and it is determined to execute the preview performance in the performance pattern Z at a rate of 0% (to display the character Z as the character preview performance). In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, it will be decided not to execute the preview effect at a rate of 70%, and the preview effect will be executed using the effect pattern X at a rate of 25%. It is decided (to display character It is decided to execute the preview performance in the performance pattern Z (to display the character Z as the character preview performance) at a ratio of . Then, if the variable display result is a failure and the fluctuation pattern is super reach, it is decided not to execute the preview effect at a rate of 50%, and the preview effect is executed using the effect pattern X at a rate of 30%. (Displaying character % to execute the preview performance in the performance pattern Z (to display the character Z as the character preview performance).

That is, in this embodiment, when the preview effect is executed, the variable display result is set to become a jackpot at a higher rate than when the preview effect is not executed. Furthermore, regarding the case of executing a preview performance, when the preview performance is executed with performance pattern The rate at which the result is a jackpot is set high (variable display with or without execution of a preview performance and the rate at which the result is a jackpot in the performance pattern (jackpot expectation level): Not executing a preview performance <Executing a preview performance with performance pattern X <Execute preview performance using performance pattern Y <Execute preview performance using performance pattern Z).

In particular, the performance pattern Z of this implementation lay is a performance pattern that notifies you that the variable display result will be a jackpot, but it is a performance pattern that can only be determined when the MY counter value is in the range of 0 to 95000, and the MY counter value is set to not be determined if it is 95001 or more.

Returning to FIG. 12-44, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the preview performance in step 005SGS453 (step 005SGS454). If execution of the preview performance has not been decided (Step 005SGS454; N), the preview performance determination process is ended, and if execution of the preview performance has been decided (Step 005SGS454; Y), a timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance is set. The preview performance determination process ends (step 005SGS455).

In addition, when the preview performance start wait timer is set, the performance control CPU 120 increments the value of the preview performance start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display performance processing (step 172) is executed, and the value of the preview performance start wait timer is decreased by 1 until the start of the preview performance. From the timing when the waiting timer times out, a process table for preview performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern is selected and a process timer for preview performance is started. From then on, each time the variable display performance processing is executed, the value of the process timer of the preview performance is subtracted, the process data control contents are executed according to the process timer value of the preview performance, and the process timer and process data of the preview performance are executed. The preview effect may be executed by switching, etc.

Although this embodiment exemplifies a form in which a character preview performance can be executed as a preview performance, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a step-up preview in which the preview images change in stages, a group preview in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area, etc. may be decided to be executed, and these different types of previews may be executed. When determining the performance, the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the format of the preview performance, so different periods depending on the format of the preview performance may be set in the preview performance start wait timer.

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIG. 12-46 is a flowchart showing the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) in the production control process shown in FIG. 12-38. In the special figure hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot start designation command is received (step 005SGS800). If the jackpot start designation command is not received (step 005SGS800; N), it is further determined whether or not the production process timer is operating during the symbol confirmation period (step 005SGS801). If the production process timer is not operating during the symbol confirmation period (step 005SGS801; N), it is determined whether the first symbol confirmation command has been received in the variable display production process (step 005SGS803). If the first symbol confirmation command is received in the variable display processing (step 005SGS803; Y), the effect during the symbol confirmation period (first symbol confirmation period) is executed according to the symbol confirmation period being 0.5 seconds. Select the process table for (medium effect) and proceed to step 005SGS807 (step 005SGS804).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-49, the performance during the first symbol confirmation period in this embodiment only displays the fixed stop symbol during the symbol confirmation period until the start of the next variable display, and other image displays are not performed. This is a performance that does not include lighting of LEDs, output of sound effects, etc.

In addition, if the second symbol confirmation command is received in the variable display production process (Step 005SGS803; N), the production control CPU 120 specifies the value of the prize ball counter (Step 005SGS805), and the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds, and selects a process table for performance during the symbol confirmation period (performance during the second symbol confirmation period), and proceeds to step 005SGS807 (step 005SGS806).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-49, the performance during the second symbol confirmation period in this embodiment is such that variable display is executed 100 times without being controlled by the jackpot game state in the time saving state or the variable probability state. Basically, it is an effect that displays on the image display device 5 the fact that the gaming state is controlled from the time saving state or the variable probability state to the normal state and the value of the prize ball counter.

Then, in step 005SGS807, the production control CPU 120 starts the production process timer during the symbol confirmation period corresponding to the symbol confirmation period, and the contents of the first process data 1 of the process table for the selected symbol confirmation period (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation part control execution data 1, etc.) Control of the components (speakers 8L, 8R, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) is started, and the waiting process for a special drawing is ended (step 005SGS808).

In addition, if the production process timer is operating during the symbol confirmation period (step 005SGS801; Y), the production control CPU 120 reduces the value of the production process timer by 1 during the symbol confirmation period (step 005SGS809), and during the symbol confirmation period It is determined whether the production process timer has timed out (step 005SGS810). If the production process timer has not timed out during the symbol confirmation period (step 005SGS810; N), the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer during the symbol confirmation period and the special symbol hit waiting process is executed. If the production process timer during the symbol confirmation period has timed out (Step 005SGS810; Y), the production process timer during the symbol confirmation period that has timed out is the production process timer during the final symbol confirmation period. It is determined whether or not (Step 005SGS812).

If the timer-out symbol confirmation period production process timer is not the last symbol confirmation period production process timer (step 005SGS812; N), the process data is switched (step 005SGS813), and the next symbol confirmation period production process is started. A timer is started (step 005SGS814). Then, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (step 005SGS815), and the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

In addition, if the timed-out symbol confirmation period production process timer is the last symbol confirmation period production process timer (step 005SGS812; Y), the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process. It is updated (step 005SGS816), and the waiting process for the special drawing is ended.

Then, when a jackpot start designation command is received (step 005SGS800; Y), the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during the jackpot (step 005SGS817), and the special figure hit waiting process is ended. .

(Ending production processing)
FIG. 12-47 is a flowchart showing the ending effect processing (step S175) in the effect control process shown in FIG. 12-38. As shown in FIG. 12-49, the ending performance in this example is for 20 seconds after the end of the jackpot game, with a message indicating that the gaming state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state, and a message indicating that the player has forgotten to take out a prepaid card. This is an effect in which an image promoting prevention is displayed on the image display device 5.

In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect process timer is in operation (step 005SGS822). If the ending effect process timer is not operating (step 005SGS821; N), the process table for ending effect is selected (step 005SGS822), and the ending effect process timer is started (step 005SGS823). Furthermore, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (step 005SGS824), and the ending effect processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the ending effect process timer is in operation (step 005SGS821; Y), the value of the ending effect process timer is -1 (step 005SGS825), and it is determined whether the ending effect process timer has timed out. (Step 005SGS826). If the ending effect process timer has not timed out (step 005SGS826; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the ending effect process timer (step 005SGS831), and the ending effect process is ended.

If the ending effect process timer times out, it is determined whether the ending effect process timer that has timed out is the last ending effect process timer (step 005SGS827). If the ending effect process timer that has timed out is not the last ending effect process timer (step 005SGS827; N), the process data is switched (step 005SGS828), and the next ending effect process timer is started (step 005SGS829). Then, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (step 005SGS830), and the ending effect process is ended.

If the ending effect process timer that has timed out is the last ending effect process timer (Step 005SGS827; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (Step 005SGS832). , ends the ending effect processing.

(Game stop effect processing)
FIG. 12-48 is a flowchart showing the game stop effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. 12-38. As shown in FIG. 12-49, the game stop performance in this embodiment is composed of a first game stop performance and a second game stop performance that is executed after the first game stop performance. Among these, the first game stop performance is a performance that displays on the image display device 5 that the game has been stopped for 15 seconds after the game is stopped. Further, the first game stop performance is also a performance that displays the value of the prize ball number counter on the image display device 5 when the game is stopped in the time saving state or the probability changing state. The second game stop performance prevents forgetting to take out the prepaid card over a period from the end timing of the first game stop performance until the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (power cutoff). This is an effect in which a prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5.

In the game stop performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the second game stop performance process timer is in operation (step 005SGS841). If the second game stop effect process timer is not in operation (step 005SGS841; N), it is further determined whether the first game stop effect process timer is in operation (step 005SGS842).

If the first game stop performance process timer is not operating (Step 005SGS842; N), the performance control CPU 120 specifies the value of the prize ball counter (Step 005SGS843a) and the game state (Step 005SGS843b). . Then, a process table for the first game stop effect corresponding to the game state is selected (step 005SGS844). Further, the first game stop effect process timer is started (step 005SGS845), the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (step 005SGS846), and the game stop effect process is ended.

Furthermore, if the first game stop performance process timer is in operation (step 005SGS842; Y), the performance control CPU 120 reduces the value of the first game stop performance process timer by 1 (step 005SGS847), and It is determined whether the stop production process timer has timed out (step 005SGS848). If the first game stop effect process timer has not timed out (step 005SGS848; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the first game stop effect process timer (step 005SGS583), and the game When the stop performance processing is finished and the first game stop performance process timer times out (step 005SGS848; Y), whether or not the first game stop performance process timer that has timed out is the last game stop performance process timer. (Step 005SGS849).

If the first game stop effect process timer that has timed out is not the last first game stop effect process timer (step 005SGS849; N), the process data is switched (step 005SGS850), and the next first game stop effect is started. Start the process timer (step 005SGS851). Then, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (step 005SGS852), and the game stop production process is ended.

If the first game stop effect process timer that has timed out is the last game stop effect process timer (step 005SGS849; Y), then the second game stop effect process table is selected (step 005SGS854), 2 Start the game stop production process timer (step 005SGS855). Then, the production device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (step 005SGS856), and the game stop production process is ended.

Next, if the second game stop effect process timer is in operation (step 005SGS841; Y), the value of the second game stop effect process timer is -1 (step 005SGS857), and the second game stop effect process timer is It is determined whether or not the timer has expired (step 005SGS858). If the second game stop effect process timer has not timed out (Step 005SGS858; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the second game stop effect process timer (Step 005SGS863), and the game is stopped. Finish the production process. In addition, if the second game stop effect process timer times out (step 005SGS858; Y), it is determined whether the second game stop effect process timer that has timed out is the last second game stop effect process timer. (Step 005SGS589).

If the second game stop effect process timer that has timed out is not the last second game stop effect process timer (step 005SGS589; N), the process data is switched (step 005SGS860), and the next second game stop effect process timer is (Step 005SGS861). Further, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (step 005SGS862), and the game stop production process is ended. On the other hand, if the second game stop effect process timer that has timed out is the last second game stop effect process timer, the processes of step 005SGS855 and step 005SGS856 are executed to end the game stop effect process.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the first symbol confirmation period performance, second symbol confirmation period performance, ending performance, first game stop performance, and second game stop performance shown in FIG. 12-49. It has become.

Among these performances, the performance during the second symbol confirmation period is performed for 10 seconds after the end of the 100th variable display (missing variable display) in the time saving state or variable probability state, as shown in Figure 12-50. During the execution period of the second symbol confirmation performance, the right hitting promotion display is continuously executed from the time saving state on the image display device 5. The promotion display is hidden at the end of the performance during the second symbol confirmation period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the performance during the second symbol determination period, the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 is repeatedly executed at the cycle T1. Note that, when the second symbol determination period ends, the game effect lamp 9 turns off once and then starts lighting up in a manner corresponding to the normal state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-51, the ending performance is a performance that is performed for 20 seconds after the end of the jackpot game, and during the execution period of the ending performance, the image display device In step 5, the right-handed driving promotion display is continuously executed from the jackpot game state. Furthermore, during the execution period of the ending effect, the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 is repeatedly executed at a cycle T2. Incidentally, when the ending performance is finished, the game effect lamp 9 turns off once and then starts lighting up in a manner according to the game state (probability change state or time saving state) after the jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 12-52(A) and 12-52(B), the game stop effect is executed when the MY counter value reaches 98194 at a timing other than during a jackpot game, and when the game stop effect is executed during a jackpot game. There are cases where the process is executed when the MY counter value reaches 98194.

As shown in FIG. 12-52(A), if the MY counter value reaches 98194 at a timing other than during a jackpot game, if a variable display is being executed at that timing, the variable display is stopped, If a right-handed game promotion display is being displayed on the image display device 5, the right-handed game promotion display is hidden, and the first game stop effect is executed for 15 seconds. Then, from the timing when the first game stop performance ends, the second game stop performance is executed over the timing until the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (B), if the MY counter value reaches 98194 during the jackpot game, the right-hand hitting promotion display is hidden when the jackpot game ends, and the first game The stop effect is executed for 15 seconds. Then, from the timing when the first game stop performance ends, the second game stop performance is executed over the timing until the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-52 (A) and 12-52 (B), in the first game stop performance of this embodiment, the game effect is displayed during the second symbol stop period for the first 10 seconds. By using the same data as the data for blinking the lamp 9, the game effect lamp 9 is blinked at the cycle T1. Also, for 5 seconds after the 10 seconds corresponding to the performance period of the second symbol stop period performance has elapsed, and also in the second game stop performance following the first game stop performance, the performance during the second symbol stop period. By continuously using the same data as the data for blinking the game effect lamp 9, the game effect lamp 9 is made to blink at the cycle T1.

(Production style)
Next, the performance aspects of the ending performance, second symbol confirmation period performance, game stop suggestion performance, game stop performance, and demonstration display performance in this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 12-53 to 12-59.

First, as shown in FIGS. 12-53(A) to 12-53(D), if the variable display result is a jackpot in the normal state, the image display device 5 displays a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot. Then, the jackpot game starts. At this time, a right-handed hitting promotion display is started at the upper end of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 12-53(D), during the jackpot game, the player can select the music to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R by operating the stick controller 31A or push button 31B. At a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (in the present embodiment, the lower left of the display area of the image display device 5), the title of the song currently being output from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed. Further, in the lower right part of the image display device 5, the number of prize balls that can be paid out during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls that are paid out during the jackpot game are displayed.

When the jackpot game ends, as an ending effect, a message indicating that the game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state ("Chance time has entered!" shown in Figure 12-53 (E)) is displayed, and a prize ball counter is displayed. The value is displayed. In addition, in the ending effect, as shown in Figures 12-53 (F) and 12-53 (G), images are displayed to encourage people to avoid forgetting to take out their prepaid cards, and messages to encourage people to prevent them from becoming addicted to the game. Display is also performed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-54 (A) to 12-54 (D), if the variable display is executed 100 times without the variable display result becoming a jackpot in the time saving state or probability change state (Jackpot game If the time saving control is executed over 100 variable displays without being controlled by the state), the performance will be executed during the second symbol confirmation period from the timing when the 100th variable display ends. During the second symbol confirmation period, the performance will include a display that the gaming state will be controlled to the normal state (a display of "Chance Time Ended"), and a display that will display the value of the prize ball counter (the value of the prize ball counter that will be controlled to the normal state from the first hit). The value of the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game is displayed. After the performance ends during the second symbol confirmation period, a left-hitting promotion display will be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) to prompt the player to hit the game ball toward the left gaming area 2L. It will be done.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-55 (A) to 12-55 (F), in the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, the MY counter value increases when the game ball enters any of the winning slots. When reaching 95001, from the start of the next variable display, a game stop suggestion image indicating that the pachinko game machine 1 will soon stop playing is displayed at both left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5 as a game stop suggestion effect. (Display of "Game is about to stop") is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-55(C) and 12-55(F), the display mode of the game stop suggestion image that is displayed when the MY counter value reaches 95001 in the normal state , the display mode of the game stop suggestion image that is displayed when the MY counter value reaches 95001 in the time saving state or the probability changing state is different.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-56(A) to 12-56(F), regarding the case where the MY counter value reaches 95001 due to the game ball entering any of the winning slots during the jackpot gaming state. After the end of the jackpot game, a game stop suggestion image is displayed as a game stop suggestion performance from the start timing of the first variable display in the time saving state or probability changing state.

Then, as shown in Figures 12-57 (A) to 12-57 (H), after the game stop suggestion effect has started, when the game ball enters any of the winning slots, the MY counter value increases. When reaches 98194, the first game stop performance is executed and then the second game stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-57 (A) to 12-57 (D), if the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the normal state, the MY counter value is set as the first game stop effect. When the value reaches 98194, a message is displayed to the effect that the game has stopped. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 12-57(E) to 12-57(H), if the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the first game stop occurs. As an effect, a message indicating that the game has been stopped due to the MY counter value reaching 98194, a message indicating a blessing due to the MY counter value reaching 98194, and a value of the prize ball counter value are displayed. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance mode of the first game stop performance is different between when the gaming state is the normal state and when the gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-57(C), 12-57(D), 12-57(G), and 12-57(H), the second game stop performance is performed regardless of the gaming state. First, a message is displayed to remind the player not to forget to take out the prepaid card, and to call an employee of the gaming parlor set in the pachinko game machine 1 because the game has stopped.

In addition, regarding the first game stop performance and the second game stop performance of this embodiment, the right hit promotion display is hidden from the start timing of the first game stop performance, and the first game stop performance and the second game stop performance are The effect image of the effect (see Figures 12-57 (B) to 12-57 (D), Figures 12-57 (F) to 12-57 (H)) to the previous decorative symbols, pending display, and game value Images such as stop suggestion effects and small patterns are displayed overlappingly so that they are no longer visible. With this, for example, even if the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to the MY counter value reaching 98194 during the execution of variable display, decorative patterns and other effects can be displayed as still images on the image display device 5. It becomes possible to hide the image from the player, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the appearance becomes unsightly.

Further, as the first game stop effect of this embodiment, it is assumed that the player takes his eyes off the image display device 5 because he is playing the game while operating a mobile terminal, and the player From the sound output during the variable display, so that you can notice the effect image displayed in 5 (the image indicating that the game has been stopped, as shown in Figure 12-57 (B) and Figure 12-57 (F)). Also, high-pitched or loud sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Furthermore, as the second game stop effect of this embodiment, a display prompting the above-mentioned gaming parlor employee to be easily recognized by the gaming parlor employee (Fig. 12-57 (D), Fig. 12 -57 (H)), the speakers 8L and 8R also repeatedly output a voice prompting to call an employee of the game hall.

Furthermore, if the voice prompting the pachinko machine 1 to call the pachinko machine 1 is output for a long time before the pachinko machine 1 arrives, the player of the pachinko machine 1 and other people in the vicinity may To avoid stress for players, the output of a voice prompting players to call an employee of the game parlor should be performed at intervals (for example, after outputting a voice for 1 minute, After a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) of outputting a voice prompting to call an employee of the amusement park, the speakers 8L and 8R may The output of the audio may not be executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-52(A) and 12-52(B), during the execution of the first game stop effect and during the execution of the second game stop effect in this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 Although the present invention is not limited to this, in the first game stop performance, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the first game stop performance. (flashing or lighting), while in the second game stop effect, the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a manner corresponding to the second game stop effect and different from the first game stop effect. . In particular, as the second game stop effect, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, which constitutes the game effect lamp 9, A part or all of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d may emit light. Furthermore, as the second game stop effect, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, A part or all of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d may be made to emit light with higher brightness than during variable display or during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-58 (A) to 12-58 (H), if the variable display result is a jackpot when the game stop suggestion effect is executed, the jackpot game will be the last game played. A message indicating that the game will be stopped ("ENDING FEVER!" shown in FIG. 12-58(B)) is displayed and the jackpot game is started. If the MY counter value reaches 98194 during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will not be interrupted until the final round game, as shown in Figures 12-58 (E) to 12-58 (H). Continued. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the ending effect is executed after the end of the conventional jackpot game, but after the first game stop effect is executed in the same manner as the first game stop effect in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the ending effect is executed after the end of the conventional jackpot game. 2. A game stop effect is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-59(A) and 12-59(B), when the gaming state is the normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state, the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is not executed. First, in the case where there is no pending memory, when the period during which the variable display is not executed reaches a predetermined period (for example, one minute), the customer waiting demonstration effect is started. As for the customer waiting demonstration performance in this embodiment, first, as shown in Figure 12-59 (B), a display indicating that the game is equipped with an ending function that stops the game when the MY counter value reaches 98194 is displayed. is displayed for 6 seconds. Next, an introductory movie is displayed for 30 seconds to introduce the effects, gameplay, etc. performed in the pachinko game machine 1. Note that while the introduction movie is being displayed, a display indicating that the above-mentioned ending function is installed is continuously executed.

When the display of the introductory movie ends, the display indicating that the ending function is installed also ends, and instead, as a customer waiting demonstration performance, the manufacturer logo of Pachinko machine 1 shown in Figure 12-59 (D) is displayed. The display is displayed for 3 seconds, the message to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game as shown in Figure 12-59 (E) is displayed for 6 seconds, and the message that the ending function is installed as shown in Figure 12-59 (F) is displayed for 6 seconds. , respectively, are executed.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 12-59 (H), a key visual image including the main character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, etc. is displayed for 5 minutes. executed. Thereafter, the displays shown in FIGS. 12-59(B) to 12-59(H) are repeatedly executed as customer waiting demonstration effects. Incidentally, the display as the customer waiting demonstration effect is ended when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole.

In addition, in this embodiment, the customer waiting demonstration performance is performed when the gaming state is one of the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is not being executed, and there is no pending memory. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, in the case where a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed during execution of a game stop suggestion effect, for example, an image may be used as a game stop suggestion effect. By drawing the image displayed on the display device 5 in a layer with a higher priority than the image displayed on the image display device 5 as the customer waiting demonstration effect, the image of the game stop suggestion effect is changed to the image of the customer waiting demonstration effect. It may be displayed with priority over.

In addition, when the game stop suggestion performance and the customer waiting demonstration performance are executed in parallel as described above, the display period of the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the display period of the ending to encourage prevention of becoming addicted to the game, etc. The image of the game stop suggestion performance may be temporarily hidden during a display period that is different from the display indicating that the function is installed and is more important than other displays. By doing this, when the game stop suggestion performance and the customer waiting demonstration performance are being executed in parallel, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and to continue playing the game. It is possible to educate people more effectively about preventing addiction.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment, the game in the pachinko game machine 1 can be stopped on the condition that the MY counter value reaches 98194. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and further variable display is executed 100 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state, , as shown in FIGS. 12-50 and 12-54, in the 100th variable display symbol regular period, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state as a performance during the second symbol confirmation period, and the jackpot in the consecutive winning state. The number of prize balls paid out in the gaming state, that is, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed. Furthermore, after the jackpot game ends in a state where the MY counter value has not reached 98194, as shown in Figures 12-51 and 12-53, a message that the ending effect will be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state is displayed. It is now possible to do so. As shown in Figure 12-56, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 during a jackpot game, as shown in Figures 12-52 and 12-58, the jackpot game has been executed to the end. Afterwards, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a game stop performance instead of the ending performance, so that the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 that can stop the game can be improved.

In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed at the end of the consecutive game state including the time saving state, so that the player can pay out money in the jackpot game during the consecutive game state. It is possible to improve the game interest by recognizing the number of prize balls that have been thrown out, and even if the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the jackpot game is controlled, the game can be stopped after the jackpot game ends. By displaying the value of the prize ball counter as an effect, it is possible to make the player aware of the number of prize balls paid out before the game is stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby further improving the enjoyment of the game. .

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game when the MY counter value has not reached 98194, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed for 20 seconds as an ending effect, while when the MY counter value has reached 98194. In the jackpot game, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a game stop effect (first game stop effect) for 15 seconds after the end of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. In a jackpot game where the MY counter value has not reached 98194, the prize ball is released as a game stop effect (first game stop effect) for 20 seconds, the same as after the end of the jackpot game when the MY counter value has not reached 98194. The counter value may also be displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-50, during the performance during the second symbol confirmation period, the game effect lamp flashes at a cycle T1 for 10 seconds, while as shown in FIG. 12-52, In the game stop performance, after the game effect lamp 9 is flashed at a cycle T1 for 10 seconds as the first game stop performance, the game effect lamp 9 is flashed for 5 seconds at a cycle T1 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. 9 continues to blink. In particular, in this embodiment, by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a common cycle in the second symbol confirmation period performance and the first game stop performance, the data for making the game effect lamp 9 blink can be transferred to these periods. It can be used for the 2nd symbol confirmation period performance and the 1st game stoppage performance, and the period for displaying the value of the prize ball counter is different between the 2nd symbol confirmation period performance and the 1st game stoppage performance while playing pachinko. The manufacturing cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 is blinked at a cycle T1 as a form in which the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a common predetermined pattern in the second symbol confirmation period performance and the first game stop performance. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the game effect lamp 9 may be emitted in a common predetermined pattern during the second symbol confirmation period performance and the first game stop performance. The effect lamps 9 may be made to emit light in the same color or with the same brightness.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-54 (C) and 12-57 (F), when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect. and when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a performance during the second symbol confirmation period due to the variable display being executed 100 times without being controlled by the jackpot game state in the time saving state or variable probability state. By having different display formats, it is possible to display the value of the prize ball counter in a format depending on the situation. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-54, if the variable display is executed 100 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state or variable probability state, when the control is returned to the normal state, left-handed hitting is promoted. While the display is displayed, as shown in Figures 12-57 and 12-58, if the MY counter value reaches 98194 and the game is stopped, the left-handed hitting promotion display is not displayed, so the prize ball counter It is possible to appropriately display the left-handed hitting promotion display depending on the state to which the player transitions after the value of is displayed.

Furthermore, in the consecutive game state of this embodiment, by displaying a right-hitting promotion display on the image display device 5, it is possible to urge the player to hit the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-50, 12-52, 12-54, 12-57, and 12-58, when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a production during the second symbol confirmation period. While the right-handed hitting promotion display is displayed, the right-handed hitting promotion display is not displayed when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect. In other words, when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop performance, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, so the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop performance. Sometimes, by hiding the right-hitting promotion display, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being hit toward the right game area 2R while the game is stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the right-hitting promotion display is hidden when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect, the right hitting promotion display is displayed smaller than before the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect. Alternatively, the right-handed hitting promotion display may be displayed at a position that is less visible to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-57(E) to 12-57(H), when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the time saving state, and when the gaming state is By displaying the value of the prize ball counter as a game stop effect in the same manner as in the case where the MY counter value reaches 98194 while in the variable probability state, the MY counter value will be displayed when the game state is in the time saving state. The data used to display the value of the prize ball counter as a game stop effect is shared between when the value reaches 98194 and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is in a variable state. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko game machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same aspect is applied when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the time saving state and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the variable probability state. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the present invention is not limited to this example, and the present invention is not limited to this. When the MY counter value reaches 98194 in this state, the game stop effect may be executed in a different manner. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize whether the game has been stopped in the time saving state or in the variable probability state.

In addition, the normal state of this embodiment is generally a state in which game balls can win only in the first starting hole and the general winning hole 10, and the number of game balls that enter these winning holes is in a time saving state and a variable probability state. , is a gaming state that is less than the jackpot gaming state. As shown in FIGS. 12-57(A) to 12-57(B), in the first game stop effect when the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the normal state, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed. Therefore, when the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in the normal state, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed, thereby preventing the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-57(E) to 12-57(H), when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the time saving state, and when the gaming state is the variable probability state. Since the game stop effect is executed in the same manner as when the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the time saving state, the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the variable probability state and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the time saving state. Since the data used to execute the game stop effect can be shared in both cases where the game stop effect is reached, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko game machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-57(A) to 12-57(H), when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is normal, and when the gaming state is short time or variable probability state, When the MY counter value reaches 98194, the game stop effect is executed in a different manner, so the game stop effect is suitably executed depending on the state in which the MY counter value reaches 98194. It is now possible.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are two cases: when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the normal state, and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state. , exemplifies the form in which the game stop effect is executed in different modes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the normal state , When the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the time saving state, and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the game stop effect is executed in different ways. It may also be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to more suitably execute the game stop effect according to the state in which the MY counter value has reached 98194.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-55 (D) to 12-55 (F), when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the gaming state is in the time saving state, and when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, Since the game stop suggestion effect is executed in the same manner as when the MY counter value reaches 95001 in The data used for executing the game stop suggestion performance can be shared in the case where the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the state, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko game machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-55 (A) to 12-55 (F), when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the gaming state is normal, and when the gaming state is short time or variable probability state, Since the game stop suggestion effect is executed in a different manner depending on when the MY counter value reaches 95001, the game stop suggestion effect is suitably executed depending on the state in which the MY counter value reaches 95001. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are two cases: when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the normal state, and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state. , exemplifies a form in which the game stop suggestion effect is executed in a different manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, if the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the time saving state, and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the game stop is suggested in different ways. The performance may be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to more suitably execute the game stop suggestion performance in accordance with the state in which the MY counter value has reached 98194.

Further, in this embodiment, a hold display performance can be executed as a pre-read preview performance. Three types of display patterns are provided as display patterns for the hold display, display patterns α to display patterns γ, and depending on which display pattern the hold display is displayed. The ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot expectation level) is different. In particular, in this embodiment, the display pattern γ suggests that the control is to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state at a rate of 100% (a display pattern that notifies that the control is to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state); In this case, when the MY counter value is 95001 or more and there are two or more pending memories that result in a jackpot, the ratio determined as the display pattern of the pending display is set to 0%. By doing so, in this embodiment, even though the hold display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped before being controlled to the jackpot game state multiple times. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the MY counter value is 95001 or more and there are two or more pending memories that result in a jackpot, the display pattern γ is used as the display pattern of the pending display to notify that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Although we have exemplified a form in which the determination ratio is set to 0%, this invention is not limited to this. For example, if the MY counter value is 95001 or more and there are two or more pending memories that will be a jackpot. However, the presence or absence of restrictions on the determination of the display pattern γ may vary depending on the gaming state, or the degree of restriction on the determination of the display pattern γ may vary depending on the gaming state.

For example, even if the MY counter value is 95001 or more and there are two or more pending memories that result in a jackpot, if the gaming state is the normal state, the determination ratio of the display pattern γ is set to 0%. On the other hand, in a time saving state or a variable probability state, the determination ratio of the display pattern γ may be set to 5%. By doing this, for example, if the hold display is displayed in the display pattern γ while the game stop suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display of the hold display will be executed before the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the preview performance can be executed in any of the performance patterns X to Z during the variable display, and in which performance pattern the preview performance is executed. The ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot expectation level) differs depending on the number of players. In particular, the performance pattern Z in this embodiment is a performance pattern that 100% suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (a performance pattern that notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state); When the MY counter value is 95001 or more, the ratio of Z to be determined as a performance pattern of the preview performance is set to 0%. By doing this, in this embodiment, for example, even though the preview performance is executed in the performance pattern Z during the variable display, the jackpot is achieved because the MY counter value reaches 98194 during the variable display. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in playing from decreasing due to the occurrence of an event in which the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped before the game is controlled to the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the MY counter value is 95001 or more, only the determination ratio of the performance pattern Z with the highest jackpot expectation as the performance pattern of the preview performance is set to 0%. The invention is not limited to this, but if the MY counter value is 95001 or more, the determination ratio is also determined for production pattern Y, which has a lower jackpot expectation than production pattern Z and a higher jackpot expectation than production pattern X. may be set to 0%, or the preview effect may not be executed uniquely.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is immediately stopped, while in the jackpot gaming state, the MY counter value reaches 98194. If the number reaches 98194, the game on the pachinko game machine 1 can be suitably stopped by stopping the game on the pachinko game machine 1 when the jackpot game state is controlled to the time-saving state or the variable probability state. It is possible. In particular, in this embodiment, even if the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the jackpot game state, the game is not stopped until the jackpot game ends. Events are prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-34, in the payout control timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, a series of processing is executed regardless of whether or not the game is stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1, the player operates the ball lending switch 21TM062 to execute the prize ball lending control process, thereby executing the lending of game balls. When the player operates the return switch 21TM063, the prepaid card unit control process is executed, and the prepaid card is returned. For this reason, for example, when the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1, the prepaid card can be returned, so the prepaid card will not be returned when the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to prevent troubles from occurring. Furthermore, since no complicated processing is required as the payout control timer interrupt processing when the game is stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1, unintended malfunctions may occur in a series of processes within the payout control timer interrupt processing. can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-57, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, a message is displayed on the image display device 5 to urge the player not to forget to take out the prepaid card as a game stop effect. Therefore, for example, when the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the player forgets to return the prepaid card (operate the return switch 21TM063) and leaves the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to prevent such troubles from occurring.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-56 and 12-57, in this embodiment, even in the ending effect after the end of the jackpot game, the player is reminded not to forget to take out the prepaid card in the same manner as in the game stop effect. Since the image display device 5 displays a message reminding you not to forget to take out the prepaid card, at least part of the data for displaying the message reminding you not to forget to take out your prepaid card is shared as the game stop effect and the ending effect. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko game machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a game stop effect or an ending effect, a display is displayed on the image display device 5 to remind the user not to forget to take out a prepaid card, but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, in the game stop effect, the display reminding you not to forget to take out your prepaid card is displayed in a wider area than the ending effect, in more colors than the ending effect, and for a longer period of time than the ending effect. By displaying the ending effect in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than when the ending effect is executed, such as by displaying the ending effect across the screen, troubles such as the player forgetting to return the prepaid card and leaving the pachinko machine 1 may occur. It may be possible to prevent this more reliably.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has the following functions: when the MY counter value reaches 98194, and when a game stop error such as a radio wave error, a magnet error, or a game ball guide lid activation error occurs, the pachinko gaming machine 1 games are now suspended. Furthermore, in both cases when the MY counter value reaches 98194 and when the above-mentioned game stop error occurs, the information output circuit 112 outputs the security signal until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. Therefore, by outputting the security signal, it is possible for employees of the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to easily understand that the gaming of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been stopped. It has become. In particular, when the game is stopped as described above, the security signal is output until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off, so that the pachinko game machine 1 is notified that the game is stopped. It is also possible to prevent employees from overlooking the information.

In addition to the game stop errors described above, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment can also detect errors for which the security signal output priority is lower than the game stop errors, such as the start port 2 abnormal winning error. . Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-29, when the start port 2 abnormal winning error occurs, unlike when the MY counter value reaches 98194 or when a game stop error occurs, the security signal is not activated for 4 minutes. is output. In other words, in this embodiment, the output period of the security signal is different between when a game stop error occurs and when an error that has a lower priority than the game stop error and does not stop the game occurs. Employees of the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed can easily determine whether an error occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a game stop error based on the output period of the security signal, and , it is possible to take appropriate measures against the error that has occurred.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-58, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop performance, and then the pachinko game is displayed as the second game stop performance. Although a display prompting to call the attendant of the gaming hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed is shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in (A) to Figure 12-60 (C), when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a game stop effect, and then in addition to the value of the prize ball counter. A display may be made to prompt the player to call an employee of the gaming parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. By doing this, it is possible to make the player recognize the prize balls awarded before the game is stopped, thereby improving the game master, and also to make the player aware of the prize ball given to the player before the game is stopped. By prompting the player to call the employee of the pachinko game machine 1, the game hall employee can easily take measures such as stopping the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 where gaming has been stopped.

Further, in the above embodiment, a mode in which a pre-reading preview effect (pending display preview effect) that indicates to the player the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state depending on the display mode of the pending display was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 12-61(A) as modification example 005SG-2, the second special figure holding memory after the 100th variable display in the time saving state or the variable probability state (when the gaming state is normal) The pending storage corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol executed up to four times after being controlled by the state may be excluded from the execution target of the pre-read preview performance.

In addition, in this way, if the second special symbol holding memory after the 100th variable display in the time saving state or variable probability state is excluded from the execution target of the pre-read preview performance, As shown in (C), if there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot in these second special symbol pending memories, the second special symbol will be displayed after being controlled to the normal state during the second symbol confirmation period. In the variable display based on the figure retention memory, a revival notification effect that notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot (in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-61(C), a plurality of stars appears in the display area of the image display device 5 It may also be possible to perform an effect that is displayed across the screen.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-61 (D), there may be a case where there is a second special figure pending memory in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot even at the start timing of the game stop effect, but this case has already been explained. Since the game is in a stopped state, the revival notification effect may not be executed while the game stop effect is being executed. In this way, by not performing the revival performance during the execution of the game stop performance, it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's gaming mastery due to not being controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the frequency display LED 21TM060 is installed on the upper part of the upper tray of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the frequency display LED 21TM060 is configured to display the remaining amount (prepaid card balance) for borrowing game balls. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 12-62(A) and 12-62(B) as a modified example 005SG-3, games can be played in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In a certain state (playable state), the remaining amount for borrowing game balls (prepaid card balance) is displayed on the frequency display LED 21TM060, while the game is stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (playing stop state). In this case, the frequency display LED 21TM060 may display a display different from the remaining balance (balance of the prepaid card) indicating that the game is no longer possible. By doing this, in addition to the game stop effect on the image display device 5, the player can easily recognize whether the game of the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped by the display mode of the frequency display LED 21TM060. Can be done.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the display monitor 21TM029 that is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided, and various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 005SG-4, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a playable state (playable state), various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. On the other hand, when the game is stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (playing stopped state), as shown in FIG. A display indicating that the game is no longer possible may be displayed. By doing this, when the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to play, an employee of the game parlor or the like can visually check the display monitor 21TM029 from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be stopped. It is possible to suitably confirm that the state has become impossible.

Further, in the embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main board 11) outputs a connection confirmation signal to the payout control board 21TM037, and the payout control board 21TM037 has a PRDY signal in the ON state and a BRDY signal in the payout control board 21TM037. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which a predetermined number of game balls can be lent out by driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the ON state of both the BRQ and BRQ signals, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modification 005SG-5, when the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 may be stopped. When the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped in this way, the output of the PRDY signal, BRDY signal, and BRQ signal is also stopped, so that as a result, after the game of the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, that is, the game stop effect During execution, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated by the player, new game ball lending (prize ball lending control process shown in FIG. 12-34) can be prevented from being executed.

In addition, in this modification, when the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1, by stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11, a new game ball is rented out (a prize ball shown in FIG. 12-34). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, when the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1, a connection confirmation signal is output from the main board 11. While stopping new game balls from being lent out, the prepaid card may be returned to the player by operating the return switch 21TM063. By doing so, even if the game is stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a trouble in which the prepaid card is not returned to the player.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the game is stopped based on the MY counter value reaching 98194, after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off, the clear switch 92 is operated and the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted. Although the embodiment in which the pachinko game machine 1 becomes ready for playing by turning on power (starting the pachinko game machine 1 by cold start) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and modification example 005SG 12-65(A) to FIG. 12-65(D), when the game is stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the clear switch 92 is turned off after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. While the pachinko game machine 1 can be played by turning on the power to the pachinko game machine 1 again (starting the pachinko game machine 1 by cold start) along with the operation, it is also possible to clear the pachinko game machine 1 after turning off the power. When turning on the power to the pachinko game machine 1 again without operating the switch 92 (starting the pachinko game machine 1 by hot start), it is necessary to check that the pachinko game machine 1 is still in a stopped state. , an error notification prompting the user to turn on the power to the pachinko game machine 1 while operating the clear switch 92 may be executed as an image display on the image display device 5 or as a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. By doing so, it is possible to make the instructors, etc. of the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed aware of the fact that the game is stopped when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the error notification. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the pachinko game machine 1 will be left in a state where the game is stopped from the time the power is turned on.

Furthermore, if the pachinko game machine 1 starts up while the game is stopped, it is an abnormal state, so the above-mentioned error notification will be made during the game (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, jackpot game state) or during the game stop performance. The error notification sound may be outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R at a louder volume than the outputted sound.

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a mode in which it is possible to determine whether or not a variable display result becomes a jackpot at a ratio of 1 according to the gaming state was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and As shown in Figure 12-65 as Example 005SGS-7, for example, multiple setting values can be set by operating a specific setting means, and the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on which setting value is set. The ratio may be made different. In addition, when any setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 in this way, turn off the power of the pachinko game machine 1, and turn on the power to the pachinko game machine 1 again while operating the clear switch 92. (cold start) so that the set values are reflected.

In addition, in this way, in the case where the rate at which the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state according to the set value set is different, the CPU 103 changes the set value when accepting the change of the set value. Outputs a setting change state notification command to notify the production control board 12 that the setting value can be changed, and the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) receives the setting change state notification command. It may also be possible to perform an effect that notifies the user that the setting value can be changed based on the change. Further, the CPU 103 may cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to stop playing and the information output circuit 112 to output a security signal, in addition to outputting the setting change state notification command. Note that the output period of the security signal may be different from the output period of the security signal based on the MY counter value reaching 98194 or the output period of the security signal when other errors are detected (for example, as shown in FIG. -5 seconds after the setting value can be changed, as shown in (C). By doing this, when a game on Pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, it is possible to change the setting value when the game is stopped due to the occurrence of a specific error, the MY counter value has reached 98194, etc. Since it is possible to determine from the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 which of the following is the cause, the game stoppage based on the fact that the setting value can be changed does not stop when the MY counter value reaches 98194. It is possible to prevent the game from being mistakenly recognized as being stopped due to the detection of errors or other errors.

In addition, in this modification, a mode was exemplified in which the pachinko game machine 1 is brought into a setting value changeable state to stop the game on the pachinko game machine 1 (put into a game stop state), but the present invention is not limited to this. Although not limited to this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be set in a setting confirmation state in which the set values can be checked by an employee of the game parlor, in addition to the setting value changeable state. Good too.

Further, in the above embodiment and this modification example, the mode in which the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to the occurrence of a magnet error or a radio wave error has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting value confirmation state described above, it is assumed that an employee of the gaming parlor will be close to the pachinko gaming machine 1 to check the setting value, so the magnetic sensor 005SG060, radio wave sensor 005SG070, etc. The sensor for detecting a stop error may be disabled to prevent the pachinko game machine 1 from entering a game stop state due to malfunction of sensors such as the magnetic sensor 005SG060 and the radio wave sensor 005SG070.

Furthermore, in this modification example, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by putting the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting value confirmation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, if the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to be in the game stop state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be prevented from shifting to the setting value confirmation state.

Furthermore, in this modification example, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by putting the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a setting value changeable state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to stop playing, the pachinko game machine 1 can be set to a setting value changeable state, and the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed. may be changeable. In this case, by cold-starting the pachinko game machine 1, the pachinko game machine 1 automatically becomes capable of playing games, and becomes controllable to a jackpot game state with a probability according to the set value.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state, the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is immediately stopped. The invention is not limited to this, but if the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the gaming state is in the time saving state or variable probability state, it means that the gaming state has been controlled to the normal state, or that the next jackpot game The game in the pachinko game machine 1 may be stopped after the game ends.

Further, in the above embodiment, even if the MY counter value reaches a value close to 98194 (for example, 98000), the game can be continued if the MY counter value does not reach 98194 during a jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the jackpot game state is controlled when the MY counter value is a value near the above-mentioned 98194, the MY counter value will not reach 98194 at the end of the jackpot game. Even if there is no pachinko game machine 1, the game on the pachinko game machine 1 may be stopped. By doing this, for example, by intentionally not hitting the game ball in a jackpot game with a small number of rounds, such as jackpot B, until a jackpot game with a large number of rounds, such as jackpot C, is executed. It is possible to prevent a strategy game that causes a delay in stopping the game of the pachinko game machine 1.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state, the ending effect is executed for 20 seconds regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the ending effect is may differ depending on the jackpot type. In addition, even if the execution period of the ending effect differs depending on the type of jackpot, if the MY counter value reaches 98194 during the jackpot game, the period after the end of each jackpot game (for example, The value of the prize ball counter may be displayed as the first game stop effect for a uniform period of 15 seconds.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, in the consecutive game states including the jackpot game state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state, the image display device 5 exemplifies a form in which a right-handed driving promotion display is displayed, but the present invention is limited to this. In addition to or in place of the right-handed driving promotion display, an LED (right-handed hitting lamp) is lit to encourage the player to hit the game ball toward the right playing area 2R in the consecutive game state. By doing so, it may be made easier for the player to understand that the consecutive winning state is a gaming state in which a game ball is launched toward the right gaming area 2R. Note that it is sufficient that the right-handed hitting lamp is always lit in the consecutive hit state, as in the display period of the right-handed hitting promotion display.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the right hitting promotion display is hidden at the same time as the game stop effect is started. In the case where it is possible to display both the right-hand hitting promotion display and the right-hand hitting lamp lighting in the consecutive game state, it is possible to display the right-hand hitting promotion display and turn on the right-hand hitting lamp, when the game is stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, the game ball is directed toward the right gaming area 2R. Since the player is not in a gaming state where he or she is in a game state where he or she hits the ball, the right-hand game promotion display may be hidden and the right-hand game lamp may be turned off, and the time saving flag may be set even though the game has been stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Based on this, the display of the right-handed batting promotion display and the lighting of the right-handed batting lamp may be continued. Furthermore, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the CPU 103 clears the time saving flag and the probability change flag, and based on the clearing of the time saving flag and the probability change flag, hides the right-hand hitting promotion display and You may turn off the lamp.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-57 and 12-58, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the second game stop effect is to prompt the user not to forget to take out the prepaid card, and to stop the game. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. 2. As the game stop effect, like the ending effect, a display may be displayed to remind the player not to forget to take out a prepaid card and to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game. By doing this, it is possible to share at least part of the data for executing the second game stop effect and the data for executing the ending effect, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the pachinko game machine 1. be able to.

Further, in the embodiment, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation display device 25A, the second reservation display Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the player is notified that the game in the pachinko game machine 1 has been stopped by turning off all the lights of the device 25B and the general figure hold display device 25C, the present invention is not limited to this. When the MY counter value reaches 98194, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first pending display device 25A, the second pending display device 25B, and the normal It is also possible to notify the player that the game in the pachinko game machine 1 has been stopped by lighting up all the figure hold display devices 25C.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, when the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the CPU 103 becomes unable to execute winning information processing. When the game is stopped, calculation of winning ratio and winning ratio cannot be executed at the timing of stopping the game, and the winning ratio and winning ratio finally displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 and the actual winning ratio and winning ratio are different from each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped during the payout of prize balls, the winning information by the CPU 103 It may be possible to execute the process and to reduce the error that occurs between the continuous ratio/winning ratio displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 and the actual continuous ratio/winning ratio.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 performs initial control of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation confirmation. Although the mode of performing the operation (performing the initial operation control processing) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the power supply of the Pachinko game machine 1 is turned on while the game of the Pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When turning off the power to the pachinko game machine 1 again without operating the clear switch 92, the pachinko game machine 1 will be started while the game is stopped, so the performance control CPU 120 may not execute the above-described initial operation control process, or may execute only a part of the initial operation control process.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the CPU 103 executes the game stop process and the game stop notification command is transmitted only once. However, in consideration of the case where the game stop notification command is not normally received on the production control board 12 side, the game stop notification command may be sent multiple times or every time the CPU 103 executes the game stop process. You can also send it. By doing this, the game stop notification command can be reliably received on the production control board 12 side, so
It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such as a game stop effect not being executed even though the game is stopped.

Further, in the embodiment, the counter counts the difference between the number of prize balls paid out in the pachinko game machine 1 and the number of out balls (net increase number of balls), and even if the out switch 26 is turned on, the counter remains at the initial value. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which it is determined whether or not to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a gaming stop state based on the MY counter value, which never becomes a value lower than a certain 0, the present invention is not limited to this. A counter that counts the difference between the number of prize balls paid out in the gaming machine 1 and the number of out balls (net increase in number of balls), and which becomes a value lower than the initial value each time the out switch 26 is turned on. It may be determined whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 should be brought to a gaming stop state using a so-called difference ball counter.

In addition, when determining whether or not to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the gaming stop state using the MY counter of this embodiment, the value of the counter will never be lower than the initial value, so the jackpot gaming state cannot be determined. When the counter value reaches 98194, the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to stop playing, that is, the upper limit of the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is "98194".

On the other hand, when determining whether or not to put the pachinko game machine 1 into a gaming stop state using the above-mentioned difference ball counter, the value of the counter may be lower than the initial value, so the value of the counter may be lower than the initial value. If the player enters the consecutive winnings state from a time when the value is lower than the initial value, the player will receive the upper limit of "98194" and the difference between the initial value from the point when the player enters the consecutive winnings state. It becomes possible to get the ball.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the game is stopped when the MY counter value reaches 98194, regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the variable probability state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the MY counter values for stopping the game may be different depending on the gaming state. For example, if the gaming state is normal, the game will be stopped when the MY counter value reaches 98194, while if the gaming state is time saving state or variable probability state, the MY counter value will be a jackpot for 10 rounds. The game may be stopped when the value reaches 96398, which is a value that does not reach 100000 even if executed twice. In particular, as mentioned above, if the gaming state is a time-saving state or variable probability state in which it is easier to win the 10-round jackpot than in the friendship state, the judgment value of the MY counter that stops the game is set to the MY counter that stops the game in the normal state. By setting the value smaller than the determination value (98194) of the counter, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will acquire too many prize balls before the game stops.

Further, in the embodiment, the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game when a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 during the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the present invention can be controlled to a small winning game state in which the big prize opening is opened like the jackpot playing state, and the game ball is specified during the small winning game. A pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state by passing through an area of The present invention may be applied to machines etc.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 31B Push button 31B
32 Movable body 100 Microcomputer 120 for game control CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to calculate a counter value related to the difference between the gaming value used in the game and the gaming value given,
controllable into a normal state, a first special state more advantageous than the normal state, and a second special state more advantageous than the first special state,
After the end of the advantageous state, control is possible to the first special state or the second special state,
If the counter value reaches the operating value while being controlled in the first special state, control is performed to stop the progress of the game;
If the counter value reaches the operating value while being controlled in the second special state, control is performed to stop the progress of the game;
If the counter value reaches the operating value while being controlled to the advantageous state, control to stop the progress of the game is not performed, and control is performed to the first special state and the second special state after the advantageous state ends. Performs control to stop the progress of the game without any trouble,
When the counter value becomes an operating value while being controlled in the first special state and control to stop the progress of the game is performed, displaying a display indicating that the progress of the game is stopped;
When the counter value becomes the operating value while being controlled in the second special state and control to stop the progress of the game is performed, displaying a display indicating that the progress of the game is stopped;
When the counter value reaches the operating value while being controlled to be in the advantageous state and control is performed to stop the progress of the game after the advantageous state ends, a display indicating that the progress of the game is stopped is displayed. death,
A display indicating that the progress of the game has been stopped is displayed when the counter value reaches the operating value while being controlled in the first special state, and a display indicating that the progress of the game is stopped when being controlled in the second special state. A display indicating that the progress of the game has been stopped is displayed when the counter value reaches the operating value, and a display indicating that the progress of the game is stopped when the counter value becomes the operating value at a predetermined timing when the control is in the advantageous state. A gaming machine that has a common display with a display indicating that the progress of the game is being stopped, which is displayed when control is performed to stop the progress of the game after the game ends.

Images